Home

Zebra ML-1499-LAK1-01R lightning arrester

1. 0 00 00 terieri akiti 6 4 Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes 0 0005 6 5 Configuring Kerberos Authentication 0 0 0 0 0 c cece cece ees 6 9 Configuring 802 1 EAP Authentication 2 c24 c2 se05004eses50ce0e0055 6 11 Coniguring WEP ERC PU CMs skccs ccc nwo me eda are ee eared done tao ects 6 15 Configuring KeyGuard Encryption 00 0 c cece eee eee eee 6 17 Configuring WPA Using TKIP 0 2 cece neces 6 19 Configuring WPAZ CGMP 802 111 wcisccicctasbacne cee caae anda ceunaunn 6 22 Configuring Firewall Settings 00 0 0 ccc ttri r nher ences 6 25 Configuring LAN to WAN Access 00 c cece cee e eee en 6 27 Pu ADIS PIOC Sc nde ceed nnbeetee nate rebar deren 6 30 Configuring Advanced LAN Access 0 00 00 000 0s ces ee aw aes 6 30 COnREUTING VPN Tunnels ss enh deacaccatwantenedeardexauceoenandenes 6 33 Configuring Manual Key Settings c2 c0 ss4ee0 4sececbeabeawess 6 36 Configuring Auto Key Settings 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee ees 6 40 Configuring IKE Key Settings 0 0 c ccc eee eens 6 42 Viewing VEN a erete ariki EEE 6 46 Configuring Content Filtering Settings sr ssrerrerisrirririsrirrerisrirre 6 48 Configuring Rogue AP Detection co0 cine eeu dean ese aceaen tanta aun 6 51 Moving Rogue APs to the Allowed AP List 00 6 54 Displaying Rogue AP Details 0 00200200055 6 56 Using MUs to Detect R
2. 8 16 CLI network wireless commands 8 56 CULE EE E EEEE eee ae 8 152 CIOS wtincn Usdceodanade B ocdaee seas cowed 8 93 CLI radio configuration 0 8 76 CLI rogue AP commands 8 101 GUI wouter nammands 0 0 sie kot ka decease ke 8 116 CLI security commands 8 62 CU S6rial POtt cs i5ts garde sr dedeaweeeedecddes 8 1 CL SOAP BOCES So iiia due iomnkiie faawsda de 8 141 CLI SNMP commands Swi gutta PEPA IS 8 140 HURE e E E E TTS 8 146 HUE e e E E ore Sees Siti 8 175 CLI system access commands 8 126 CLI system commands A E rere eee 8 121 CLI system test 020 000 0000 8 172 GU telnet soc soccer ccc cle dociceandasdebedes 8 2 CLI type filter commands 2 5 8 29 CLI WAN App Commands 8 52 CLI WAN commands 0 00000 ene 8 34 CLI WAN NAT commands 5 8 37 CLI WAN VLAN Commands EEDA PPS 8 43 command line interface CLI 0 00 3 2 CONNG EE E E 3 2 config import export 2 00 0 e eee eee 4 31 configuration EEEE ean ces EE TEETE 1 15 configuration file import export o unauna 1 13 configuration options ere ere named configuration restoration 00 cee 1 13 content filtering EN EETA TOET TEE SE 6 48 conventions notational 20555 viii C
3. AP 5131 Bed LAN Setting E Wes ae fees LAN Timeout Dsabros Sex g torr l 17 9 al 80 ts Pot AsherGcatos eername ac Pasowors serere Address Ategomert Range a P Adtress Demat Name Networt Mase Primary ONS Garver Defaut Oateway Secondary ONS Server Dyssen tame AP S1 1 2 Configure the LAN Setting field to enable the AP 5131 LAN interface assign a timeout value enable 802 1q trunking configure VLAN mapping and enable 802 1x authentication Enable LAN Interface Select the checkbox to forward data traffic over the AP 5131 LAN connection The LAN connection is enabled by default Network Management 5 3 LAN Timeout Use the LAN Timeout drop down menu to specify whether the LAN timeout is Disabled Enabled or uses a Hardware Detect option to detect traffic over the LAN port Using Hardware Detect if a LAN cable becomes disconnected from the AP 5131 MUs disassociate and the AP 5131 radio s power off If enabled is selected enter a value in seconds The AP 5131 uses this timeout value when no traffic is detected over the LAN connection If no data is transmitted or received over the LAN connection for the defined interval the LAN connection is terminated and MUs disassociate with the AP 5131 Eventually the AP 5131 radio s power off Default is 30 seconds Enable 802 1q Select the Enable 802 19 Trunking checkbox to enable the Trunking AP 5131 to conduct VLAN tagging If selected click the VLAN Config
4. For information displaying existing WLAN security settings using the applet GUI see Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page 6 5 8 64 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless security gt create Description Defines the parameter of AP 5131 security policies Syntax create show set sec name lt name gt auth lt authtype gt kerb realm lt name gt server lt sidx gt lt ip gt port lt sidx gt lt port gt eap server lt sidx gt lt ip gt port lt sidx gt lt port gt secret lt sidx gt lt secret gt reauth mode lt mode gt period lt time gt Command Line Interface Reference 8 65 Defines the parameters of a security policy Displays new or existing security policy parameters Sets the name of the security policy Sets the authentication type for WLAN lt idx gt to lt type gt none eap or kerberos Note Kerberos parameters are only in affect if kerberos is specified for the authentication method set auth lt type gt Sets the Kerberos realm Sets the Kerberos server lt sidx gt 1 primary 2 backup or 3 remote to KDC IP address Sets the Kerberos port to lt port gt KDC port for server lt ksidx gt 1 primary 2 backup or 3 remote Note EAP parameters are only in affect if eap is specified for the authentication method set auth lt type gt Sets the radius server 1 primary or as 2 secondary IP addres
5. 7 16 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide dropped or could not decrypt The information within the 802 11a Radio Statistics screen is view only with no configurable data fields To view detailed radio statistics 1 Select Status and Statistics gt Radio Summary gt Radio Statistics from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol pees Configuration Radio2 802 2 1 1a sea r WAN Information a a Wire gt pile HW Address 00 A0 F8 71 59 20 Placement Indoor irewall e LAN to WAN Access Radio Type 80211a Current Channet 36 S Advanced LAN Access Power 20 dBm Num Associated MUs 0 lt XX Router ess2 vlan2 open tkip System Configuration s83 vian3 open open Quick Setup ods ess5 vian5 eap tkip System Settings ess9 viand open wep1 28 AP 5131 Access Certificate Mgmt Traffic Ge SNMP Access Total Rx Tx NTP servers Packets per second 0 0 Pps 0 0 Pps 0 0 Pps Logging Configuration Q Config ImportExport Throughput 000 Mbps 0 00 000 Mbps 0 00 000 Mbps K Firmware Update Avg Bit Speed 0 00 000 Mbps Status amp Statistics Approximate RF Utilization 0 00 000 S kneg Non unicastpkts 0 00 000 A Wireless Stats RF Status Errors Radio Summary Num re Radio1 802 1 1b g Statistics mol Skeet 00 0 8 dom Fug Nam of Reties goe pen Radio2 8021 1a Statistics Avy MU Noise 0 0 00 dBm Dropped Packets 0 00 0 00 4 MU Stats Avy MU SNR 0 0 00 dB of Undecryptable Pkts 0 00 0 00 al
6. Adds list directory command to the deny list Adds make directory command to the deny list Adds connect directory command to the deny list Adds passive mode command to the deny list Adds helo SMTP command to the deny list Adds mail SMTP command to the deny list Adds rcpt SMTP command to the deny list Adds data SMTP command to the deny list Adds quit SMTP command to the deny list Adds send SMTP command to the deny list Adds saml SMTP command to the deny list Adds reset SMTP command to the deny list Adds vrfy SMTP command to the deny list Adds expn SMTP command to the deny list For information on configuring Content Filtering using the applet GUI see Configuring Content Filtering Settings on page 6 48 8 54 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan app gt delcmd Description Deletes application control commands from the deny list Syntax delcmd web file lt filename gt lt ext gt Deletes specified web file name from deny list lt filename gt can be up to 15 characters and can be used to match any string lt ext gt can be up to 10 characters such as htm html or java Up to 10 files can be specified proxy Allows web proxies activex Allows Activex files ftp put Deletes put command from the deny list get Deletes get command from the deny list Is Deletes list directory command from the deny list mkdir Deletes make directory command from the deny list cd
7. Network Management 5 17 PPPoE State Displays the current connection state of the PPPoE client When a PPPoE connection is established the status displays Connected When no PPPoE connection is active the status displays Disconnected Keep Alive Select the Keep Alive checkbox to maintain the AP 5131 WAN connection indefinitely no timeout interval Some ISPs terminate inactive connections Enabling Keep Alive keeps the AP 5131 WAN connection active even when there is no traffic If the ISP drops the connection after an idle period the AP 5131 automatically re establishes the connection to the ISP Enabling Keep Alive mode disables grays out the Idle Time field Idle Time seconds Specify an idle time in seconds to limit how long the AP 5131 s WAN connection remains active after outbound and inbound traffic is not detected The Idle Time field is grayed out if Keep Alive is enabled Authentication Type Use the Authentication Type menu to specify the authentication protocol s for the WAN connection Choices include None PAP or CHAP PAP or CHAP Password Authentication Protocol PAP and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP are competing identify verification methods PAP sends a username and password over a network to a server that compares the username and password to a table of authorized users If the username and password are matched in the table server access is authorized WatchGuard products do not support th
8. e DATA Tells the SMTP receiver to treat the following information as mail data from the sender e QUIT Tells the receiver to respond with an OK reply and terminate communication with the sender e SEND Initiates a mail transaction where mail is sent to one or more remote terminals e SAML Send and Mail Initiates a transaction where mail data is sent to one or more local mailboxes and remote terminals e RESET Cancels mail transaction and informs the recipient to discard data sent during transaction e VAFY Asks receiver to confirm the specified argument identifies a user If argument does identify a user the full name and qualified mailbox is returned e EXPN Expand Asks receiver to confirm a specified argument identifies a mailing list If the argument identifies a list the membership list of the mailing list is returned 4 Configure the FTP field to block or restrict various FIP traffic on the network Configuring Access Point Security 6 51 Block Outbound FTP File Transfer Protocol FTP is the Internet standard for host to host Actions mail transport FTP generally operates over TCP port 20 and 21 FTP filtering allows the blocking of any or all outgoing FIP functions Check the box next to the command to disable the command when using FIP across the AP 5131 s WAN port e Storing Files Blocks the request to transfer files sent from the client across the AP s WAN port to the FIP server e Retrieving Files
9. 1 Select Network Configuration gt Firewall gt Advanced LAN Access from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 BE Mirton Cordguratoni Advanced LAN Access keu oe Sertngs FRR een Ww VWats 0 4 Bee yy MUA La g Fawwan Raes 7 Hee tg 1ain fh Manag m A Dew HE r io pens d eatin hen a Insaan 367 298 271 092 ToP 1045 365535 Advanced LAN Access UQ ote Q onium I jad Berst t Droim risme AP 51 J1 2 Configure the Settings field as needed to override the settings in the LAN to WAN Access screen and import firewall rules into the Advanced LAN Access screen Override LAN to WAN Select this checkbox to enable advanced subnet access rules and Access settings disable existing subnet access rules port forwarding and 1 to many mappings from the system Only enable advanced subnet access rules if your configuration requires rules that cannot be configured within the LAN to WAN Access screen Import rules fromLAN Select this checkbox to import existing access rules NAT packet to WAN Access forwarding VPN rules etc into the Firewall Rules field This rule import overrides any existing rules configured in the Advanced Subnet Access screen A warning box displays stating the operation cannot be undone 6 32 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 3 Configure the Firewall Rules field as required add insert or delete firewall rules into the list of advanced rules Inbound or Outbound Select Inbound or Outbou
10. 5 lan wan abc ah 100 1000 For information on configuring the Firewall options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6 25 Command Line Interface Reference 8 115 AP5131 gt admin network firewall gt advanced Description Displays whether an AP 5131 firewall rule is intended for inbound traffic to an interface or outbound traffic from that interface Syntax import Imports rules from LAN to WAN access inbound Goes to the Inbound Firewall Rules submenu outbound Goes to the Outbound Firewall Rules submenu Goes to the parent menu i Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to flash memory quit Quits and exits the CLI session Example admin network firewall gt set override enable admin network firewall gt advanced admin network firewall rules gt inbound admin network firewall rules inb gt list Idx SCR IP Netmask Dst IP Netmask TP SPorts DPorts Rev NAT Action 1 1 2 3 4 2 2 2 2 all 1 1 0 0 0 0 deny 255 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 65535 65535 nat port 33 2 33 3 0 0 10 10 1 1 tcp 1 1 11 11 1 0 allow 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 65535 65535 nat port 0 For information on configuring the Firewall options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6 25 8 116 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 5 Network Router Commands AP5131 gt admin network router gt Description Displays the router s
11. A CAUTION Do not supply power to the AP 5131 until the cabling of the unit is complete For Symbol power injector installations a b Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the Power Injector Data In connector Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the power injector Data amp Power Out connector and the AP 5131 LAN port Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source host to the power injector and AP 5131 does not exceed 100 meters 333 ft The power injector has no On Off power switch The power injector receives power as soon as AC power is applied For more information on using the power injector see Symbol Power Injector System on page 2 7 For standard Symbol 48 Volt Power Adapter Part No 50 24000 050 and line cord installations a Connect RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the AP 5131 LAN port Verify the power adapter is correctly rated according the country of operation Connect the power supply line cord to the power adapter Attach the power adapter cable into the power connector on the AP 5131 Hardware Installation 2 15 e Plug the power adapter into an outlet NOTE f the AP 5131 is utilizing remote management antennae a wire cover can be used to provide a clean finished look to the installation Contact Symbol for more information 9 Verify the behavior of the AP 5131 LEDs For more information see LED Indicators
12. AP PSBIAS T 1P AF is included in certain orderable configurations but can be added to any configuration For more information on the Symbol power injector see Symbol Power Injector System on page 2 7 NOTE A standard Symbol 48 Volt Power Adapter Part No 50 24000 050 is recommended with AP 5131 product SKUs that do not include the Symbol power injector For an overview on the optional antennae available for the AP 5131 see Antenna Options on page 2 5 For detailed specifications on the 2 4 GHz and 5 2 GHz antenna suite see 2 4 GHz Antenna Matrix on page A 4 and 5 2 GHz Antenna Matrix on page A 4 2 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 2452 APA2 01 could render the AP 5131 s Rogue AP Detector Mode A CAUTION Using an antenna other than the Dual Band Antenna Part No ML feature inoperable Contact your Symbol sales associate for specific information 2 3 Requirements The minimum installation requirements for a single cell peer to peer network AP 5131 either the dual or single radio model AP 5131 48 Volt Power Supply Part No 50 24000 050 or Symbol power injector Part No AP PSBIAS T 1P AF a power outlet Dual Band Antennae Part No ML 2452 APA2 01 NOTE The AP 5131 optimally uses 2 antennae for the single radio model and 4 antennae for the dual radio model 2 4 Placement of the AP 5131 For optimal performance install the AP 5131 away from transformers heavy duty
13. Align the bottom of the ceiling T bar with the back of the AP 5131 Orient the AP 5131 chassis by its length and the length of the ceiling T bar Rotate the AP 5131 chassis 45 degrees clockwise or about 10 o clock Push the back of the AP 5131 chassis on to the bottom of the ceiling T bar A CAUTION Ensure the safety wire and cabling used in the T Bar AP 5131 installation is securely fastened to the building structure in order to provide a safe operating environment Hardware Installation 2 17 10 Rotate the AP 5131 chassis 45 degrees counter clockwise The clips click as they fasten to the T bar 11 The AP 5131 is ready to configure For information on an AP 5131 default configuration see Getting Started on page 3 1 For specific details on AP 5131 system configurations see System Configuration on page 4 1 NOTE f the AP 5131 is utilizing remote management antennae a wire cover can be used to provide a clean finished look to the installation Contact Symbol for more information 2 7 4 Above the Ceiling Plenum Installations An AP 5131 above the ceiling installation requires placing the AP 5131 above a suspended ceiling and installing the provided light pipe under the ceiling tile for viewing the rear panel status LEDs of the unit An above the ceiling AP 5131 installation enables installations compliant with drop ceilings suspended ceilings and industry standard tiles from 625 to 75 inches thi
14. ESSID Displays the ESSID of the rogue AP This information could be useful if the ESSID is determined to be non hostile and the device should be defined as an allowed AP RSSI Shows the Relative Signal Strength RSSI of the rogue AP Use this information to assess how close the rogue AP is The higher the RSSI the closer the rogue AP If multiple AP 5131 s have detected the same rogue AP RSSI can be useful in triangulating the location of the rogue AP Refer to the Rogue Detector Detail field for the following information Finders MAC The MAC address of the AP 5131 detecting the rogue AP 6 58 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Detection Method Displays the RF Scan by MU RF On Channel Detection or RF Scan by Detector Radio method selected from the Rogue AP screen to detect rogue devices For information on detection methods see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 First Heard Defines the time in days hrs min that the rogue AP was initially days hrs min heard by the detecting AP Last Heard Defines the time in days hrs min that the rogue AP was last heard days hrs min by the detecting AP Channel Displays the channel the rogue AP is using 5 Click OK to securely exit the Detail screen and return to the Active APs screen 6 Click Cancel if necessary to undo any changes made and return to the Active APs screen 6 13 2 Using MUs to Detect Rogue Devices The AP 5131 can use an associated MU that has its r
15. Pkts Displays the average number of retries for all MUs associated with the AP 5131 802 114 or 802 11b g radio The number in black represents retries for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents retries for the last hour Displays the percentage of packets the AP gave up on for all MUs associated with the AP 5131 802 11a or 802 11b g radio The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour Displays the percentage of undecryptable packets for all MUs associated with the 802 11a or 802 11b g radio The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour Click the Clear Radio Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections Click the Logout button to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet Monitoring Statistics 7 19 7 4 1 1 Retry Histogram Refer to the Retry Histrogram screen for an overview of the retries transmitted by an AP 5131 radio and whether those retries contained any data packets Use this information in combination with the error fields within a Radio Stats screen to assess overall radio performance To display a Retry Histogram screen for an AP 5131 radio 1 Select Status and Statistics gt Radio Summary gt Radio Statistics gt Retry Histogram from the AP 5131 menu tree A R
16. These separate WLANs can be configured to use different channel assignments to avoid RF interference AP 5131 Introduction 1 19 e Multiple AP 5131 s wired together provide a network with better coverage area and performance when using the same ESSID 1 2 3 MAC Layer Bridging The AP 5131 provides MAC layer bridging between its interfaces The AP 5131 monitors traffic from its interfaces and based on frame address forwards the frames to the proper destination The AP 5131 tracks source and destination addresses to provide intelligent bridging as MUs roam or network topologies change The AP 5131 also handles broadcast and multicast messages and responds to MU association requests The AP 5131 listens to all packets on its LAN and WAN interfaces and builds an address database using MAC addresses An address in the database includes the interface media that the device uses to associate with the AP 5131 The AP 5131 uses the database to forward packets from one interface 1 20 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide to another The bridge forwards packets addressed to unknown systems to the Default Interface Ethernet The AP 5131 internal stack interface handles all messages directed to the AP 5131 Each AP 5131 stores information on destinations and their interfaces to facilitate forwarding When a user sends an ARP Address Resolution Protocol request packet
17. and signal reception in areas where interference is significant and is recommended when two antennas are supported The Power Level parameter defines the transmit power of the 802 114 or 802 1 1b g antenna s The values are expressed in dBm and mW Specify b only g only or b and g to define whether the 802 11b g radio transmits in the 2 4 Ghz band exclusively for 802 11b legacy clients or transmits in the 2 4 Ghz band for 802 1 1g clients Selecting b and g enables the AP 5131 to transmit to both b and g clients if legacy clients 802 11b partially comprise the network Select accordingly based on the MU requirements of the network This parameter does not apply to AP 5131 802 114 radios Click the Set Rates button to display a window for selecting minimum and maximum data transmit rates for the radio At least one Basic Rate must be selected as a minimum transmit rate value Supported Rates define the data rate the radio defaults to if a higher selected data rate cannot be maintained Click OK to implement the selected rates and return to the 802 11a or 802 11b g radio configuration screen Clicking Cancel reverts the Set Rates screen to the last saved configuration Symbol recommends using the default rates unless qualified to understand the performance risks of changing them Network Management Set Rates Basic Rates Supported Rates vi j2 55 vib 9 w 11 12 18 24 y 36 y 48 y 54 OK Cancel He
18. better security that takes longer to decode hack than the 40 bit encryption mode Each WLAN 16 WLANs available in total to an AP 5131 regardless of the model can have a separate security policy However more than one WLAN can use the same security policy Therefore to avoid confusion do not name security policies the same name as WLANs Once security policies have been created they are selectable within the Security field of each WLAN screen If the existing default 6 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide security policy does not satisfy the data protection requirements of a specific WLAN a new security policy using the authentication and encryption schemes discussed above can be created To enable an existing WLAN security policy or create a new policy 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu tree The Security Configuration screen displays 2 lf anew security policy is required click the Create button Matusi Pre shared try NO atertr aon Kerberos EE PATI ta Enipon io Enoypaen WEP 64 10 othe WEP 128 104 bti veyOuard WRATH WPAIICOMP 802 118 Apoi f Cancel Hete The New Security Policy screen displays with the Manually Pre shared key No authentication and No Encryption options selected Naming and saving such a policy as is would provide no security and might only make sense in a guest network wherein no sensitive data is either transmitted
19. gt Description Displays the AP 5131 wireless LAN WLAN submenu The items available under this command include show Displays the AP 5131 s current WLAN configuration create Defines the parameters of a new WLAN edit Modifies the properties of an existing WLAN delete Deletes an existing WLAN gt Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI For an overview of the Wireless configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs on page 5 22 8 58 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless wlan gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 s current WLAN configuration Syntax show summary Displays the current configuration for existing WLANs wlan lt number gt Displays the configuration for the requested WLAN WLAN 1 through 16 Example admin network wireless wlan gt show wlan 1 ESS Identifier 101 WLAN Name Lobby 802 11la Radio available 802 11b g Radio not available Maximum MUs 127 Security Policy Default MU Access Control Default Kerberos User Name Default Kerberos Password z kkkkkkkk Disallow MU to MU Communication disable Use Secure Beacon disable Accept Broadcast ESSID disable QoS Policy Default For information on displaying WLAN infromation using the applet GUI see Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs on page 5 22 Command
20. gt set unspec ip 2 111 223 222 1 wan nat gt show 2 disable 157 235 91 2 1 to many 1 to 1 Outbound Mappings LAN Inbound Mappings Port Forwarding unspecified port forwarding mode disable unspecified port fwd ip address 111 223 222 1 For an overview of the AP 5131 NAT options available using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings on page 5 18 8 40 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan nat gt add Description Adds NAT entries Syntax add lt idx gt lt name gt lt tran gt lt port1 gt lt port2 gt lt ip gt lt dst_port gt Sets an inbound network address translation NAT for WAN address lt idx gt where lt name gt is the name of the entry 1 to 7 characters lt tran gt is the transport protocol one of tcp udp icmp ah esp gre or all lt port1 gt is the starting port number in a port range lt port2 gt is the ending port number in a port range lt ip gt is the internal IP address and lt dst_port gt is the optional internal translation port Example admin network wan nat gt add 1 indoors udp 20 29 10 10 2 2 admin network wan nat gt list 1 index name prot start port end port internal ip translation port Related Commands delete list Deletes one of the inbound NAT entries from the list Displays the list of inbound NAT entries For an overview of the AP 5131 NAT options availabl
21. undecryptable for each device Undecryptable packets can be the result of corrupt packets bad CRC checks or incomplete packets Associated MUs Set a maximum threshold for the total number of MUs associated with each device 3 Configure the Minimum Packets field to define a minimum packet throughput value for trap generation Minimum number of Enter the minimum number of packets that must pass through the packets required fora device before an SNMP rate trap is sent Symbol recommends trap to fire using the default setting of 1000 as a minimum setting for the field 4 Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP FF Traps screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on SNMP RF Traps screen to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 5 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP Network Time Protocol NTP manages time and or network clock synchronization in the AP 5131 managed network environment NTP is a client server implementation The AP 5131 an NTP client periodically synchronizes its clock with a master clock an NTP server For example the AP 5131 resets its clock to 07 04 59 upon reading a time of 07 04 59 from its des
22. 0 0 0 0 lan 0 3 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 For information on configuring the Router options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Router Settings on page 5 47 8 4 System Commands AP5131 gt admin system gt Description Displays the System submenu The items available under this command are shown below restart show set debug lastpw exec access cmgr snmp ntp logs cfg update fw update test save quit Restarts the AP 5131 Shows AP 5131 system parameter settings Defines AP 5131 system parameter settings Accesses AP 5131 password protected debug information Displays last debug password Goes to a Linux command menu Goes to the AP 5131 access submenu where AP 5131 access methods can be enabled Goes the Certificate Manager submenu Goes to the SNMP submenu Goes to the Network Time Protocol submenu Displays the log file submenu Goes to the configuration file update submenu Goes to the firmware update submenu Goes to the test group sub menu Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu Saves the configuration to system flash Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 121 8 122 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system gt restart Description Restarts the AP 5131 access point Syntax restart Restarts the AP 5131 Example admin system gt restart kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
23. 101112131415161718191A1B1C Key2 202122232425262728292A2B2C Key 3 303132333435363738393A3B3C Key 4 404142434445464748494A4B4C 6 Click the Apply button to save any changes made within the WEP 64 Setting or WEP 128 Setting field of the New Security Policy screen 7 Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the WEP 64 Setting or WEP 128 Setting field and return to the WLAN screen This reverts all settings to the last saved configuration 6 7 Configuring KeyGuard Encryption KeyGuard is a proprietary encryption method developed by Symbol Technologies KeyGuard is Symbol s enhancement to WEP encryption and was developed before the finalization of WPA TKIP This encryption implementation is based on the IEEE Wireless Fidelity Wi Fi standard 802 111 WPA2 CCMP not KeyGuard offers the highest level of security among the encryption methods available with the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu tree 6 18 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide If security policies supporting KeyGuard exist they appear within the Security Configuration screen These existing policies can be used as is or their properties edited by clicking the Edit button To configure a new security policy supporting KeyGuard continue to step 2 2 Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting KeyGuard The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encrypti
24. 11 8 34 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 2 Network WAN Commands AP5131 gt admin network wan gt Description Displays the WAN submenu The items available under this command are shown below show Displays the AP 5131 WAN configuration and the AP 5131 s current PPPoE configuration set Defines the AP 5131 s WAN and PPPoE configuration nat Displays the NAT submenu wherein Network Address Translations NAT can be defined vpn Goes to the VPN submenu where the AP 5131 VPN tunnel configuration can be set app Displays the Outbound Content Filtering submenu where data types can be included excluded from AP 5131 throughput m Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the current configuration to the AP 5131 system flash quit Quits the CLI and exits the current session For an overview of the AP 5131 s WAN configuration options using the applet GUI see Configuring WAN Settings on page 5 13 AP5131 gt admin network wan gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 WAN port parameters Syntax Command Line Interface Reference 8 35 show Shows the general IP parameters for the WAN port along with settings for the WAN interface Exampl e admin network wan gt show WAN Interface WAN DHCP Client Mode IP address Network Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server WAN WAN WAN WAN WAN WAN WAN IP IP IP IP IP IP IP PPPoE PPPoE PP
25. 182 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin stats echo gt set Description Defines the parameters of the echo test Syntax set station lt mac gt Defines MU target MAC address request lt num gt Sets number of echo packets to transmit 1 539 length lt num gt Determines echo packet length in bytes 1 539 data lt hex gt Defines the particular packet data For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 Command Line Interface Reference 8 183 AP5131 gt admin stats echo gt start Description Initiates the echo test Syntax start Initiates the echo test Example admin stats echo gt start admin stats echo gt list Station Address OOAOF843AABB Number of Pings 10 Packet Length 100 Packet Data in HEX 1 Number of MU Responses 2 For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 8 184 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin stats gt ping Description Defines the ping test values used to conduct a ping test to an AP with the same ESSID Syntax ping list Defines ping test packet length set Determines ping test packet data start Begins pinging the defined station lt i Goes to parent menu Goes to root menu quit Quits CLI session For information on Known AP tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on p
26. 2 20 17 Place the ceiling tile back in its frame and verify it is secure The AP 5131 is ready to configure For information on an AP 5131 default configuration see Getting Started on page 3 1 For specific details on AP 5131 system configurations see System Configuration on page 4 1 2 8 LED Indicators The AP 5131 utilizes seven LED indicators Five LEDs display within four LED slots on the front of the AP 5131 on top of the AP 5131 housing and two LEDs for above the ceiling installations are located on the back of the device the side containing the LAN WAN and antenna connectors Hardware Installation 2 21 Power and Error Conditions Split LED Data Over Ethernet 802 11a Radio Activity 802 11b g Radio Activity The five LEDs on the top housing of the AP 5131 are clearly visible in table top wall and below ceiling installations The five AP 5131 top housing LEDs have the following display and functionality Power Status Solid white indicates the AP 5131 is adequately powered Error Conditions Solid red indicates the AP 5131 is experiencing a problem condition requiring immediate attention Ethernet Activity Flashing white indicates data transfers and Ethernet activity 802 11a Radio Activity Flickering amber indicates beacons and data transfers over the AP 5131 802 1 1a radio 802 11b g Radio Flickering green indicates beacons and
27. 224 206 107 22 1 If tunnel type is Manual proper SPI values and Keys must be configured after adding the tunnel admin network wan vpn gt list Eng2EngAnnex Manual 192 168 32 2 24 192 168 33 1 192 168 24 198 SJSharkey Manual 206 107 22 46 27 255 255 255 224 209 235 44 31 admin network wan vpn gt For information on configuring VPN using the applet GUI see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt set Description Sets VPN entry parameters Syntax set type lt name gt lt tunnel type gt authalgo lt name gt lt authalgo gt authkey lt name gt lt dir gt lt authkey gt esp type lt name gt lt esptype gt esp encalgo lt name gt lt escalgo gt esp enckey lt name gt lt dir gt lt enckey gt esp authalgo lt name gt lt authalgo gt esp authkey lt name gt lt dir gt lt authkey gt spi lt name gt lt algo gt lt dir gt lt value gt usepfs lt name gt lt mode gt Command Line Interface Reference 8 45 Sets the tunnel type lt name gt to Auto or Manual for the specified tunnel name Sets the authentication algorithm for lt name gt to None MD5 or SHA1 Sets the AH authentication key if type is Manual for tunnel lt name gt with the direction set to IN or OUT and the manual authentication key set to lt authkey gt The key size is 32 hex characters for MD5 and 40 hex characters for SHA1 Sets the Encapsulating Security Payload ESP type Opt
28. 5131 device access SNMP settings network time importing exporting device configurations and device firmware updates see Chapter 4 System Configuration on page 4 1 e For detailed information on configuring AP 5131 LAN interface subnet and WAN interface see Chapter 5 Network Management on page 5 1 e For detailed information on configuring specific encryption and authentication security schemes for individual AP 5131 WLANs see Chapter 6 Configuring Access Point Security on page 6 1 e To view detailed statistics on the AP 5131 and its associated MUs see Monitoring Statistics on page 7 1 The Symbol AP 5131 contains a built in browser interface for system configuration and remote management using a standard Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Netscape Navigator or Mozilla Firefox The browser interface also allows for system monitoring of the AP Web management of the AP 5131 requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later or Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later NOTE For optimum compatibility use Sun Microsystems JRE 1 5 or higher available from Sun s Web site and be sure to disable Microsoft s Java Virtual Machine if installed To connect to the AP the AP 5131 IP is required Enter 192 168 0 1 for the default IP address The password is symbol NOTE DNS names are not supported as a valid IP address for the AP 5131 The user is required to enter a numerical IP address 4 2 AP 513
29. 604800 Sets the TKIP key type Sets the TKIP key to lt 256 bit key gt Sets the TKIP ASCII pass phrase to lt ascii phrase gt 8 63 characters Enables or disabled the broadcast key Sets the broadcast key rotation interval to lt time gt in seconds 300 604800 Sets the CCMP key type Sets the CCMP key to lt 256 bit key gt Sets the CCMP ASCII pass phrase to lt ascii phrase gt 8 63 characters Enables or disables mixed mode allowing WPA TKIP clients Enables or disables preauthentication fast roaming 8 68 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide add policy Adds the policy and exits Disregards the policy creation and exits the CLI session For information on configuring the encryption and authentication options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Security Options on page 6 2 Command Line Interface Reference 8 69 AP5131 gt admin network wireless security edit gt Description Edits the properties of a specific security policy Syntax show Displays the new or modified security policy parameters set lt index gt Edits security policy parameters change Completes policy changes and exits the session Cancels the changes made and exits the session Example admin network wireless security edit gt admin network wireless security edit gt show Policy Name Default Authentication Manual Pre shared key No Authentication Encryption type n
30. AP 5131 connectivity Use the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen to create new ACL policies using the New MU ACL Policy sub screen or edit existing policies using the Edit MU ACL Policy sub screen Once new policies are defined they are available for use within the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screens to assign to specific WLANs based on MU interoperability requirements Symbol recommends using the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screens strategically to name and configure ACL policies meeting the requirements of the particular WLANs they may map to However be careful not to name policies after specific WLANs as individual ACL policies can be used by more than one WLAN For detailed information on assigning ACL policies to specific WLANs see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 To create or edit ACL policies for WLANs 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt MU ACL from the AP 5131 menu tree The Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen displays with existing ACL policies and their current WLAN if mapped to a WLAN NOTE When the AP 5131 is first launched a single ACL policy default is available and mapped to WLAN 1 It is anticipated numerous additional ACL policies will be created as the list of WLANs grows 5 30 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP 5131 Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration BE Merea Contguratord eum gt O von Poncy
31. AP 5131 network address information via the LAN connection This is recommended if the AP 5131 resides within a large corporate network or the Internet Service Provider ISP uses DHCP DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and delivery of host specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host If DHCP Client is selected the first DHCP or BOOTP server to respond sets the IP address and network address values since DHCP and BOOTP are interoperable Select this button to enable BOOTP to set AP 5131 network address information via the LAN connection When selected only BOOTP responses are accepted by the AP 5131 If both DHCP and BOOTP services are required do not select BOOTP Client Select the This interface uses static IP Address button and manually enter static network address information in the areas provided The AP 5131 can be configured to function as a DHCP server over the LAN connection Select the This interface is a DHCP Server button and manually enter static network address information in the areas provided Use the address assignment parameter to specify a range of numerical non DNS name IP addresses reserved for mapping client MAC addresses to IP addresses If a manually static mapped IP address is within the IP address range specified that IP address could still be assigned to another client To avoid this ensure all statically mapped IP addresses are outside of the IP
32. Access Control List ACL violation This can result from a missing incorrect IP address entered within the SNMP Access Control screen Configure the Network Traps field to generate traps when the AP 5131 s link status changes or when the AP s firewall detects a DOS attack Physical port status change Denial of service DOS attempts Send trap every Generates a trap whenever the status changes on the AP 5131 The physical port status changes when a link is lost between the AP 5131 and a connected device Generates a trap whenever a Denial of Service DOS attack is detected by the AP 5131 firewall A new trap is sent at the specified interval until the attack has stopped Defines the interval in seconds the AP 5131 uses to generate a trap until the Denial of Service attack is stopped Default is 10 seconds 4 24 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 5 Configure the System Traps field to generate traps when the AP 5131 re initializes during transmission saves its configuration file When a trap is enabled a trap is sent every 5 seconds until the condition no longer exists System Cold Start Generates a trap when the AP 5131 re initializes while transmitting possibly altering the SNMP agent s configuration or protocol entity implementation Configuration Generates a trap whenever changes to the AP 5131 s Changes configuration file are saved Rogue AP detection Generates a trap if a Rogue AP is detected by the AP 51
33. DHCP options are used for out of the box rapid deployment for Symbol wireless products The following are the two DHCP options available on the AP 5131 e Enable Automatic Firmware Update e Enable Automatic Configuration Update These options can be used to update newer firmware and configuration files on the AP 5131 through either the LAN or WAN interface The AP 5131 uses DHCP Vendor Specific Option 43 with the following options embedded within it 4 36 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Option Code Data Type AP 5131 TFIP Server Name 181 IP address AP 5131 Firmware File Name 187 String AP 5131 Configuration File Name 188 String The Vendor Class Identifier used is SymbolAP 5131 V1 0 The DHCP Server needs to be configured with the above mentioned vendor specific options and vendor class identifier The interface selected LAN or WAN on the AP 5131 must be configured as a DHCP client for the Auto DHCP Update feature to function properly Enable Automatic Firmware Update Enable Automatic Configuration Update Select this checkbox to allow an automatic firmware update each time firmware versions are found to be different between the AP 5131 and the specified LAN or WAN interface This option is used in conjunction with other DHCP options configured on a DHCP server Symbol recommends selecting the Enable Automatic Configuration Update checkbox if auto updating AP 5131 firmware as backing up the AP 5131 configuration is
34. DNS Server Secondary DNS Server WINS Server admin network lan gt 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 192 168 0 1 255 192 192 192 168 0 1 168 0 2 168 0 254 For information on displaying LAN information using the applet GUI see Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5 1 Command Line Interface Reference 8 15 AP5131 gt admin network lan gt set Description Sets the LAN parameters for the LAN port Syntax set lan lt mode gt timeout lt seconds gt trunking lt mode gt username lt name gt passwd lt password gt ip mode lt ip gt ipadr lt ip gt mask lt ip gt dgw lt ip gt domain lt name gt dns lt ip gt wins lt ip gt Example admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network Related Commands show lan gt lan gt set lan gt set lan gt set lan gt set lan gt set lan gt set lan gt set lan gt set lan gt set Enables or disables the AP 5131 LAN interface Sets the interval in seconds the AP 5131 uses to terminate its LAN interface if no activity is detected for the specified interval Enables or disables 802 11q Trunking over the AP 5131 LAN port Specifies the user name for 802 1x port authentication over the LAN interface The 0 32 character password for the username for the 802 1x port Defines the AP 5131 LAN port IP mode Sets
35. Effort traffic is negatively impacted by data transfers with long delays as well as multimedia traffic Video Video traffic includes music streaming and application traffic requiring priority over all other types of network traffic Voice Voice traffic includes VoIP traffic and typically receives priority over Background and Best Effort traffic 7 Configure the CW min and CW max contention windows AIFSN Arbitrary Inter Frame Space Number and TXOPs Time opportunity to transmit for each Access Category Their values are explained below CW Min The contention window minimum value is the least amount of time the MU waits before transmitting when there is no other data traffic on the network The longer the interval the lesser likelihood of collision This value should be set to a smaller increment for higher priority traffic Reduce the value when traffic on the WLAN is anticipated as being smaller 5 36 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide CW Max AIFSN TXOPs Time 32usec TXOPs Time ms Select the Set Default Values button if needed to restore all the field values to their The contention window maximum value is the maximum amount of time the MU waits before transmitting when there is no other data traffic on the network The longer the interval the lesser likelihood of collision but the greater propensity for longer transmit periods The AIFSN is the minimum interframe space between data packets transmitted f
36. Ethernet PPPoE parameters To configure WAN settings for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN from the AP 5131 menu tree 5 14 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP 5131 symbol ee vk Contguraer S WAN f o Fw WAN P Cotfiguraten On Z Enable WAN irtectace z varou ra a bee ean P Ad ress t P z Subnet Mack Defaut Gateway Primen ONS Goret Seconsary ONS Bere More P Adare PPP over Ethernet Aspis Unde Change Gyetern Marne AP S520 2 address information for the WAN connection Refer to the WAN IP Configuration field to enable the WAN interface and set network NOTE Symbol recommends that the WAN and LAN ports should not both be configured as DHCP clients Enable WAN Interface Select the Enable WAN Interface checkbox to enable a connection between the AP 5131 and a larger network or outside world through the WAN port Disable this option to effectively isolate the AP 5131 s WAN No connections to a larger network or the Internet are possible MUs cannot communicate beyond the LAN This interface is a DHCP Client IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Network Management 5 15 This checkbox enables DHCP for the AP 5131 WAN connection This is useful if the larger corporate network or nternet Service Provider ISP uses DHCP DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and
37. F Z gt In order to avoid problems when using the AP 5131 CLI these characters should be avoided Example admin gt passwd Old Admin Password New Admin Password Verify Admin Password For information on configuring passwords using the applet GUI see Setting Passwords on page 6 3 Command Line Interface Reference 8 7 AP5131 gt admin gt summary Description Displays the AP 5131 s system summary Syntax summary Displays a summary of high level characteristics and settings for the WAN LAN and WLAN Example admin gt summary AP 5131 firmware version 1 0 0 0 xxx country code us serial number OOAOF8716A74 WLAN Name ESSID Radio VLAN Security Policy QOS Policy 1 Lobby 101 lla 2 Open Voice LAN Interface IP Address Network Mask LAN DHCP Mode enable 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 server WAN Interface IP Address Network Mask LAN Default Gateway DHCP Client enable 157 235 91 63 255 255 255 0 157 235 91 2 enable For information on displaying a system summary using the applet GUI see Basic Device Configuration on page 3 3 8 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin gt Description Displays the parent menu of the current menu This command appears in all of the submenus under admin In each case it has the same function to move up one level in the directory structure Example admin network lan gt admin network gt Command Line Interface Reference 8 9 AP5131
38. F 0 305 RG 58 LAK2 N F N M 10JK N M N M 3 05 RG 8 25JK N M N M 7 62 RG 8 50JK N M N M 15 24 RG 8 100JK N M N M 30 48 RG 8 A 5 Country Codes The following list of countries and their country codes is useful when using the AP 5131 configuration file CLI or the MIB to configure the AP 5131 Country Argentina Australia Austria Bahrain Belarus Belgium Brazil Code AR AU AT BH BY BE BR Country New Zealand Norway Oman Peru Philippines Poland Portugal Code NZ NO OM PE PH PL PT A 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Bulgaria Canada Chile Country China Colombia Costa Rica Croatia Cypress Czech Rep Denmark Ecuador Estonia Egypt Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Indonesia Ireland Israel Italy Japan BG CA CL Code CN CO CR HR CY CZ DK EC EE EG FI Qatar Romania Russian Federation Country Saudi Arabia Singapore Slovak Republic Slovenia South Africa South Korea Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey Ukraine UAE United Kingdom USA Uruguay Vietnam Venezuela QA RO RU Code Technical Specifications A 7 Jordan JO Kazakhanstan KZ Kuwait KW Country Code Country Code Latvia LV Liechtenstein LI Lithuania LI Luxembourg LU Malaysia MY Malta MT Mexico MX Morocco MA Nambia NA Netherlands NL A 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Re
39. ISP uses DHCP DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and delivery of host specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host Some of these parameters are IP address network mask and gateway NOTE Symbol recommends that the WAN and LAN ports should not both be configured as DHCP clients Specify an IP address for the AP 5131 s WAN connection An IP address uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation for example 190 188 12 1 no DNS names supported Specify a Subnet Mask for the AP 5131 s WAN connection This number is available from the ISP for a DSL or cable modem connection or from an administrator if the AP 5131 connects to a larger network A subnet mask uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation For example 255 255 255 0 is a valid subnet mask Define a Default Gateway address for the AP 5131 s WAN connection The ISP or a network administrator provides this address Getting Started 3 7 f Specify the address of a Primary DNS Server The ISP or a network administrator provides this address 6 Optionally use the Enable PPP over Ethernet checkbox to enable Point to Point over Ethernet PPPoE for a high speed connection that supports this protocol Most DSL providers are currently using or deploying this protocol PPPoE is a data link protocol for dialup connections PPPoE will allow the AP 5131 to use a broadband modem DSL cable modem etc for acce
40. Line Interface Reference 8 59 AP5131 gt admin network wireless wlan gt create Description Defines the parameters of a new AP 5131 WLAN Syntax create set ess lt essid gt wlan name lt name gt 11a lt mode gt 11bg lt mode gt max mu lt number gt security lt name gt acl lt name gt passwd lt ascii string gt no mu mu lt mode gt sbeacon lt mode gt bcast lt mode gt qos lt name gt add wlan Example Defines the ESSID for a target WLAN Determines the name of this particlular WLAN 1 32 Enables or disables access to the AP 5131 802 11a radio Enables or disables access to the AP 5131 802 11b g radio Defines the maximum number of MU able to operate within the WLAN default 127 MUs Sets the security policy to the WLAN 1 32 Sets the MU ACL policy to the WLAN 1 32 Defines a Kerberos password used if the WLAN s security policy uses a Kerberos server based authentication scheme Enables or disables MUs associated to the same WLAN to not communicate with each other Enables or disables the AP 5131 from transmitting the ESSID in the beacon Enables or disables the AP 5131 from accepting broadcast IDs from MUs Broadcast IDs are transmitted without security Defines the index name representing the QoS policy used with this WLAN Apply the changes to the modified WLAN and exit Disregard the changes to the modified WLAN and exit admin network wireless wlan create gt show wlan ESS Ident
41. No AP PSBIAS T 1P AF Software and Documentation CD ROM Accessories Bag AP 5131 13042 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Dual Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Software and Documentation CD ROM 4 Dual Band Antennae Part No ML 2452 APA2 01 Accessories Bag AP 5131 13043 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Dual Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Software and Documentation CD ROM Power Injector Part No AP PSBIAS T 1P AF 4 Dual Band Antennae Part No ML 2452 APA2 01 Accessories Bag Hardware Installation 2 3 Symbol Part Description AP 5131 40020 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Single Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Software and Documentation CD ROM Accessories Bag AP 5131 40021 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Single Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Software and Documentation CD ROM Power Injector Part No AP PSBIAS T 1P AF Accessories Bag AP 5131 40022 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Single Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Software and Documentation CD ROM 2 Dual Band Antennae Part No ML 2452 APA2 01 Accessories Bag AP 5131 40023 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Single Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Software and Documentation CD ROM Power Injector Part No AP PSBIAS T 1P AF 2 Dual Band Antennae Part No ML 2452 APA2 01 Accessories Bag Verify the model indicated on the bottom of the AP 5131 is correct Contact the Symbol Support Center to report missing or improperly functioning items The Symbol power injector Part No
42. Password Settings screen for specifying authentication and password settings for an SNMP v3 user The maximum password length is 11 characters Use the Authentication Algorithm drop down menu to specify MD5 or SHA1 as the authentication algorithm Use the Privacy Algorithm drop down menu to define an algorithm of DES or AES 128bit When entering the same username on the SNMP Traps and SNMP Access screens the password entered on the SNMP Traps page overwrites the password entered on the SNMP Access page To avoid this problem enter the same password on both pages Use the Access pull down list to specify read only R access or read write RW access for a user Read only access permits a user to retrieve AP 5131 information while read write access allows a user to modify AP 5131settings 4 Specify the users who can read and optionally modify the SNMP capable client SNMP Access Control Click the SNMP Access Control button to display the SNMP Access Control screen for specifying which users can read SNMP generated information and potentially modify related settings from an SNMP capable client The SNMP Access Control screen s Access Control List ACL uses Internet Protocol IP addresses to restrict access to the AP s SNMP interface The ACL applies to both SNMP v3 user definitions and SNMP v1 v2c community definitions For detailed instructions of configuring SNMP user access and modification privileges see Configuring SNMP Access Con
43. Pings 10 Packet Length 100 Packet Data in HEX 1 Number of AP Responses 2 For information on Known AP tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 8 188 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Technical specifications include specifications in the following areas A 1 Physical Characteristics The AP 5131 has the following physical characteristics A 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Dimensions Housing Weight Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Altitude Vibration Humidity Electrostatic Discharge Drop 5 32 inches long x 9 45 inches wide x 1 77 inches thick 135 mm long x 240 mm wide x 45 mm thick Metal Plenum Housing UL2043 1 95 Ibs 0 88 Kg single radio model 2 05 Ibs 0 93 Kg dual radio model 20 to 50 Celsius 40 to 70 Celsius 8 000 feet 2438 m 28 Celsius operating 15 000 feet 4572 m 12 Celsius storage Vibration to withstand 02g2 Hz random sine 20 2k Hz 5 to 95 operating 5 to 85 storage 15kV air 50 rh 8kV contact 50 rh Bench drop 36 inches to concrete excluding side with connectors A 2 Electrical Characteristics The AP 5131 has the following electrical characteristics Operating Voltage Operating Current 48Vdc Nom 200mA Peak 48Vdc 170mA Nom 48Vdc Technical Specifications A 3 A 3 Radio Characteristics The AP 5131 has the following radio charac
44. Protocol HTTP is the protocol used to transfer information to and from Web sites HTTP Blocking allows for blocking of specific HTTP commands going outbound on the AP 5131 WAN port HTTP blocks commands on port 80 only The Block Outbound HTTP option allows blocking of the following user selectable outgoing HTTP requests e Web Proxy Blocks the use of Web proxies by clients e ActiveX Blocks all outgoing ActiveX requests by clients Selecting ActiveX only blocks traffic scripting language with an ocx extension 6 50 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Block Outbound URL Enter a URL extension or file name per line in the format of Extensions filename ext An asterisk can be used as a wildcard in place of the filename to block all files with a specific extension 3 Configure the SMTP field to disable or restrict specific kinds of network mail traffic Block Outbound SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol SMTP is the Internet standard for Commands host to host mail transport SMTP generally operates over TCP on port 25 SMTP filtering allows the blocking of any or all outgoing SMTP commands Check the box next to the command to disable that command when using SMTP across the AP 5131 s WAN port e HELO Hello Identifies the SMTP sender to the SMTP receiver e MAIL Initiates a mail transaction where data is delivered to one or more mailboxes on the local server e RCPT Recipient Identifies a recipient of mail data
45. SNMP interface NOTE The ACL applies to both SNMP v3 user definitions and SNMP v1 v2c community definitions on the AP 5131 SNMP Access screen To configure SNMP user access control for the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt SNMP Access from the AP 5131 menu tree Click on the SNMP Access Control button from within the SNMP Access screen 4 18 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 2 Configure the SNMP Access Control screen to add the IP addresses of those users receiving SNMP access Access Control List Add Edit Delete SNMP Access Control Enter IP Address Ranges to allow Leave the table blank to allow any IP Start IP End IP 157 235 12 1 157 235 12 18 Cancel Enter Start IP and End IP addresses numerical addresses only no DNS names supported to specify a range of user that can access the AP 5131 SNMP interface An SNMP capable client can be set up whereby only the administrator for example can use a read write community definition Use just the Starting IP Address column to specify a single SNMP user Use both the Starting IP Address and Ending IP Address columns to specify a range of addresses for SNMP users To add a single IP address to the ACL enter the same IP address in the Start IP and End IP fields Leave the ACL blank to allow access to the SNMP interface from the IP addresses of all authorized users Click Add to create a new ACL entry Click Edit to revise
46. VLANs or edit the properties of an existing VLAN 1 Select Network Configuration gt LAN from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Ensure the Enable 802 1q Trunking button is selected from within the LAN Setting field Trunk links are required to pass VLAN information between destinations A trunk port is by default a member of all the VLANs existing on the AP 5131 and carry traffic for all those VLANs Trunking is a function that must be enabled on both sides of a link 3 Select the VLAN Name button Network Management 5 7 VLAN Name ees VLAN Name VLANID Marketing 1 Create VLAN Config ox He The VLAN name screen displays The first time the screen is launched a default VLAN name of 1 and a default VLAN ID of 1 display The VLAN name is auto generated once the user assigns a VLAN ID However the user has the option of re assigning a name to the VLAN using New VLAN and Edit VLAN screens To create a new VLAN click the Create button to edit the properties of an existing VLAN click the Edit button Edit VLAN VLAN ID A VLAN ID 3 VLAN Name VLAN 2 VLAN Name demo room Appi cance Het opn cance Hei Java Applet Window Java Applet Window 4 Assign a unique VLAN ID from 1 to 4095 to each VLAN added or modified 5 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information the AP 5131 needs to process the frame across the netwo
47. VPN from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Refer to the VPN Tunnel Config field select the Auto IKE Key Exchange checkbox and click the Auto Key Settings button Configuring Access Point Security 6 41 Auto Key Settings Use Perfect Forward Secrecy Yes v Security Association Life Time 300 sec AH Authentication iMD5 v ESP Type lesp ESP Encryption Algorithm AES 256 bit v OK Cancet Help Configure the Auto Key Settings screen to modify the following Use Perfect Forward Forward secrecy is a key establishment protocol guaranteeing the Secrecy discovery of a session key or long term private key does not compromise the keys of other sessions Select Yes to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy Select No to disable Perfect Forward Secrecy AH Authentication AH provides data authentication and anti replay services for the VPN tunnel Select the desired authentication method from the drop down menu e None Disables AH authentication and the rest of the fields in this area are not active e MD5 Enables the Message Digest 5 algorithm requiring 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e SHA1 Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1 requiring 160 bit 40 character hexadecimal keys AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide ESP Type ESP provides packet encryption optional data authentication and anti replay services for the VPN tunnel Use the drop down menu to select the ESP type e None Disables ESP The res
48. WLAN The ESSID can be modified within individual WLAN configuration screens See Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 to change the ESSID of a specific WLAN Radio The Radio field displays the name of the AP 5131 radio the WLAN is mapped to either the 802 11a radio or the 802 11b g radio To change the radio designation for a specific WLAN see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 5 24 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide VLAN The VLAN field displays the specific VLAN the target WLAN is mapped to For information on VLAN configuration for the WLAN see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 Security Policy The Security Policy field displays the security profile configured for the target WLAN For information on configuring security for a WLAN see Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page 6 5 QoS Policy The QoS Policy field displays the quality of service currently defined for the WLAN This policy outlines which data types receive priority for the user base comprising the WLAN For information on QoS configuration for the WLAN see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 3 Click the Create button if necessary to launch the New WLAN screen Use the New WLAN screen to define the properties of anew WLAN that would display and be selectable within the Wireless Configuration screen For additional information see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 4 Click
49. aimas ronm m morn j ONMP Access Cortet AP 551 1 NMP v Etone O IMP Acces bu 00001 840SEGDE22F 87 ACHE Drem mame AP 5131 SNMP v1 v2c community definitions allow read only or read write access to AP 5131 management information The SNMP community includes users whose IP addresses are specified on the SNMP Access Control screen A read only community string allows a remote device to retrieve information while a read write community string allows a remote device to modify settings Symbol recommends considering adding a community definition using a site appropriate name and access level Set up a read write definition at a minimum to facilitate full access by the AP 5131 administrator 2 System Configuration 4 15 Configure the SNMP v1 v2 Configuration field if SNMP v1 v2 is used to add or delete community definitions name the community specify the OID and define community access Add Delete Community OID Access Click Add to create a new SNMP v1 v2c community definition Select Delete to remove a SNMP v1 v2c community definition Use the Community field to specify a site appropriate name for the community The name is required to match the name used within the remote network management software Use the OID Object Identifier pull down list to specify a setting of All or a enter a Custom OID Select All to assign the user access to all OIDs in the MIB The OID field uses numbers expressed in dot not
50. an existing policy 5 28 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol RE geet Corttgurat of Security Configuration roo 4 Gru T 4 a f ree ate Marre snr j g IP Arce Orom Name AP 51 J1 The Security Configuration screen appears with existing policies and their attributes displayed NOTE When the AP 5131 is first launched a single security policy default is available and mapped to WLAN 1 It is anticipated numerous additional security policies will be created as the list of WLANs grows Configuring a WLAN security scheme with a discussion of all the authentication and encryption options available is beyond the scope of this chapter Chapter 6 of the AP 5131 Product Reference Guide is dedicated to configuring AP 5131 security For detailed information on the authentication and encryption options available to the AP 5131 and how to configure them see to Configuring Security Options on page 6 2 and locate the section that describes your intended security scheme 2 Click Logout to exit the Security Configuration screen Network Management 5 29 5 3 1 2 Configuring a WLAN Access Control List ACL An Access Control Lists ACL affords a system administrator the ability to grant or restrict MU access by specifying a MU MAC address or range of MAC addresses to either include or exclude from
51. any changes to the LAN Configuration screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the LAN configuration screen to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 5 1 1 Configuring VLAN Support A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a means to electronically separate data on the same AP 5131 from a single broadcast domain into separate broadcast domains The AP 5131 can group devices on one or more WLANs so that they can communicate as if they were attached to the same wire when in fact they are located on a different LAN segment Because VLANs are based on logical instead of physical connections they are extremely flexible By using a VLAN you can group by logical function instead of physical location A maximum of 16 VLANs can be supported on the AP 5131 regardless of the AP 5131 being single or dual radio model An administrator can map 16 WLANs to 16 VLANs and enable or disable dynamic VLAN assignment 5 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide VLANs enable organizations to share network resources in various network segments within large areas airports shopping malls etc A VLAN is a group of clients with a common set of
52. can be configured and keys entered For more information see Configuring Manual Key Settings on page 6 36 6 36 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Auto IKE Key Select the Auto IKE Key Exchange checkbox to configure AH and Exchange or ESP without having to manually enter keys The keys automatically generate and rotate for the authentication and encryption type selected Auto Key Settings Select the Auto IKE Key Exchange checkbox and click the Auto Key Settings button to open a screen where AH authentication and ESP encryption authentication can be configured For more information see Configuring Auto Key Settings on page 6 40 IKE Settings After selecting Auto IKE Key Exchange click the IKE Settings button to open a screen where IKE specific settings can be configured For more information see Configuring IKE Key Settings on page 6 42 4 Click Apply to save any changes to the VPN screen as well as changes made to the Auto Key Settings IKE Settings and Manual Key Settings screens Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the VPN Auto Key Settings IKE Settings and Manual Key Settings screens to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the lo
53. current AP 5131 Rogue AP detection configuration set Defines the Rogue AP detection method mu scan Goes to the Rogue AP mu uscan submenu allowed list Goes to the Rogue AP Allowed List submenu active list Goes the Rogue AP Active List submenu rogue list Goes the Rogue AP List submenu 4 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 102 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap gt show Description Displays the current AP 5131 Rogue AP detection configuration Syntax show Displays the current AP 5131 Rogue AP detection configuration Example admin network wireless rogue ap gt show MU Scan disable MU Scan Interval 60 minutes On Channel disable Detector Radio Scan enable Detector Radio Band llbg Auto Authorize Symbol APs disable Approved APs age out 0 Rogue APs age out 0 For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 Command Line Interface Reference 8 103 AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap gt set Description Defines the AP 5131 ACL rogue AP method Syntax set mu scan lt mode gt Enables or disables to permit MUs to scan for rogue APs interval lt minutes gt Define an interval for associated MUs to beacon in attempting to locate rogue APs Value not avai
54. default is available and mapped to WLAN 1 It is anticipated additional QoS policies will be created as the list of WLANs grows Network Management 5 33 AP 5131 symbo PRE MNetwon Condgurato of Quality of Service Configuration LO System Setio Hag aF tAcce C Lente ate arn key SNMP Acce HO NTP Serve Gyeters Name AP 51 71 Click the Create button to configure a new QoS policy or select a policy and click the Edit button to modify an existing QoS policy The AP 5131 supports a maximum of 16 QoS policies 5 34 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide New QoS Policy Policy Name video2 C Support Voice prioritization Multicast MaskjAddress1 Multicast MaskjAddress2 y Enable Wi Fi Multimedia WMM QoS Extensions Set Default Values Java Applet Window Access cw cw AIFSN TXOPs Time TXOPs Time Category Minimum Maximum 32usec ms Background 15 H4 1023 HHI 7H o 00 Bestefion 15 hos AHI 34 o 00 Video 7 Hhs HHI 24 94 3 008 Voce B Hf H ae 47 1 504 Cancel Help 3 Assign a name to the new or edited QoS policy that makes sense to the AP 5131 traffic receiving priority More than one WLAN can use the same Qos policy 4 Select the Support Voice prioritization checkbox to allow legacy voice prioritization Certain products may not receive priority over other voice or data traffic Consequently ensure the Support Voice Prioritization checkbox is selected if using products that
55. designate the secondary antenna for Radio 1 A CAUTION Both the Dual and Single Radio model AP 5131 s use RSMA type 3 Remove the backings from the four 4 rubber feet and attach them to the four rubber feet recess areas on the AP 5131 2 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 4 Cable the AP 5131 using either the Symbol power injector solution or an approved line cord and power supply CAUTION Do not supply power to the AP 5131 until the cabling of the unit is A N complete For Symbol power injector installations a Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the power injector Data In connector b Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the power injector Data amp Power Out connector and the Symbol AP 5131 LAN port c Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source host to the power injector and AP 5131 does not exceed 100 meters 333 ft The power injector has no On Off power switch The power injector receives power as soon as AC power is applied For more information on using the power injector see Symbol Power Injector System on page 2 7 For standard Symbol 48 Volt power adapter Part No 50 24000 050 and line cord installations a Connect RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the AP 5131 LAN port Verify the power adapter is correctly rated according the country of operation Connect the power supply line cord t
56. do not support Wi Fi Multimedia WMM to provide preferred queuing for these VOIP products If the Support Voice Prioritization checkbox is selected the AP 5131 will detect non WMM capable legacy phones that connect to the AP 5131 and provide priority queueing for their traffic over normal data Network Management 5 35 NOTE Wi fi functionality requires that both the AP 5131 and its associated clients are WMM capable and have WMM enabled WMM enabled devices can take advantage of their QoS functionality only if using applications that support WMM and can assign an appropriate priority level to the traffic streams they generate 5 Use the two Multicast Address fields to specify one or two MAC addresses to be used for multicast applications Some VoIP devices make use of multicast addresses Using this mechanism ensures that the multicast packets for these devices are not delayed by the packet queue 6 Select the Enable Wi Fi Multimedia WMM QoS Extensions checkbox to configure the AP 5131 s QoS Access Categories The Access Categories are not configurable unless the checkbox is selected Access Categories include Background Backgrounds traffic is typically of a low priority file transfers print jobs ect Background traffic typically does not have strict latency arrival and throughput requirements Best Effort Best Effort traffic includes traffic from legacy devices or applications lacking QoS capabilities Best
57. enable admin network firewall gt set src enable admin network firewall gt set syn enable admin network firewall gt set win enable admin network firewall gt show Firewall Status enable Override LAN to WAN Access disable Configurable Firewall Filters ftp bounce attack filter enable syn flood attack filter enable unaligned ip timestamp filter enable source routing attack filter enable winnuke attack filter enable seq num prediction attack filter enable mime flood attack filter enable max mime header length 8192 max mime headers 16 8 114 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network firewall gt access Description Enables or disables firewall permissions through LAN to WAN ports Syntax show Displays LAN to WAN access rules set Sets LAN to WAN access rules add Adds LAN to WAN exception rules delete Deletes LAN to WAN access exception rules list Displays LAN to WAN access exception rules Goes to parent menu Goes to root menu save Saves configuration to system flash quit Quits and exits the CLI session Example admin network firewall gt set override disable admin network firewall gt access admin network firewall lan wan access gt set rule allow admin network firewall lan wan access gt list index from to name prot start port end port 1 lan wan HTTP tcp 80 80 2 lan wan abc udp 0 0 3 lan wan 123456 ah 1440 2048 4 lan wan 654321 tcp 2048 2048
58. for assoc_mus which must be an integer For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet GUI see Configuring Specific SNMP Traps on page 4 22 Command Line Interface Reference 8 149 AP5131 gt admin system snmp traps gt add Description Adds SNMP trap entries Syntax add viv2 lt ip gt lt port gt lt comm gt lt ver gt Adds an entry to the SNMP v1 v2 access list with the destination IP address set to lt ip gt the destination UDP port set to lt port gt the community string set to lt comm gt 1 to 31 characters and the SNMP version set to lt ver gt v lt ip gt lt port gt lt user gt lt sec gt lt auth gt lt pass1 gt lt priv gt lt pass2 gt Adds an entry to the SNMP v3 access list with the destination IP address set to lt ip gt the destination UDP port set to lt port gt the username set to lt user gt 1 to 31 characters and the authentication type set to one of none auth or auth priv The following parameters must be specified if lt sec gt is not none Authentication type lt auth gt set to md5 or shat Authentication password lt pass1 gt 8 to 31 chars The following parameters must be specified if lt sec gt is set to auth priv Privacy algorithm set to des or aes Privacy password lt pass2 gt 8 to 31 chars Example admin system snmp traps gt add viv2 203 223 24 2 333 mycomm v1 admin system snmp traps gt list viv2c index dest ip dest port community version ad
59. for proof of identity supplied to the AP 5131 by the user and then transmits the user data back to the server to complete the authentication An MU is not able to access the network if not authenticated When configured for EAP support the access point displays the MU as an EAP station EAP is only supported on mobile devices running Windows XP Windows 2000 using Service Pack 4 and Windows Mobile 2003 Refer to the system administrator for information on configuring a RADIUS Server for EAP 802 1x support For additional information on configuring EAP see Configuring 802 1x EAP Authentication on page 6 11 1 1 8 3 WEP Encryption All WLAN devices face possible information theft Theft occurs when an unauthorized user eavesdrops to obtain information illegally The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links particularly vulnerable to this form of theft Most forms of WLAN security rely on encryption to various extents Encryption entails scrambling and coding information typically with mathematical formulas called a gorithms before the information is transmitted An algorithm is a set of instructions AP 5131 Introduction or formula for scrambling the data A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data The same device host computer or front end processor usually performs both encryption and decryption The data transmi
60. gt admin gt Description Displays the root menu that is the top level CLI menu This command appears in all of the submenus under admin In each case it has the same function to move up to the top level in the directory structure Example admin network 1lan gt admin gt 8 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin gt save Description Saves the configuration to system flash The save command appears in all of the submenus under admin In each case it has the same function to save the current configuration Syntax save Saves configuration settings The save command works at all levels of the CLI The save command must be issued before leaving the CLI for updated settings to be retained Example admin gt save admin gt Command Line Interface Reference 8 11 AP5131 gt admin gt quit Description Exits the command line interface session and terminates the session The quit command appears in all of the submenus under admin In each case it has the same function to exit out of the CLI Once the quit command is executed the login prompt displays again Example admin gt quit 8 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 Network Commands AP5131 gt admin network gt Description Displays the network submenu The items available under this command are shown below lan Goes to the LAN submenu wan Goes to the WAN submenu wireless Goes to the Wireless Config
61. http symbol com services downloads Symbol Developer Program http software symbol com devzone Additional Information Obtain additional information by contacting Symbol at 1 800 722 6234 inside North America 1 516 738 5200 in outside North America http www symbol com B 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Index IN 6 AP 5137 Access Point Product Reference Guide basic device configuration recrer ia SSO Oe est teeta Dak eal ean T a pele I 1 12 CAM stations 0 00 c cece eee 1 12 PSP eU soos ohacaw adore awnensen odes 1 12 Bil cide ARE AES OPETE T E EEE 1 4 pullets Usb Ol ci seston kav ee etetei detent eases viii c CP PERSIE oiran aA 4 8 CAM acc ae er ever PEET PEEN srida 1 12 cellular coverage cc iach ocase riori tiarri tkan 1 15 certificate authority edited arr T 4 8 certificate management 20 00 4 8 CLI ACL commands ake Guba PEEN ever 8 71 CLI bandwith management 8 98 CLI common commands 0 0005 8 3 CLI connection n nonan unnan nannan eee ee 8 1 CLI firewall commands 000 8 111 CLI firmware update 0 00 8 168 CLI logcommands 0005 8 155 CLI network commands EEEE 8 12 CLI network LAN commands 8 13 CLI network LAN DHCP commands 8 23 CLI network LAN VLAN commands
62. identity to a server and vice versa across an insecure network connection Once a client and server use Kerberos to prove their identity they can encrypt all communications to assure privacy and data integrity Kerberos can only be used on the AP 5131 with Symbol clients that it is running on a trusted host with an untrusted network If host CAUTION Kerberos makes no provisions for host security Kerberos assumes security is compromised Kerberos is compromised as well Kerberos uses the Network Time Protocol NTP for synchronizing the clocks of its Key Distribution Center KDC server s Use the NTP Servers screen to specify the IP addresses and ports of available NTP servers Kerberos requires the Enable NTP on AP 5131 checkbox be selected for authentication to function properly See Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP on page 4 26 to configure the NTP server NOTE If 802 114 is selected as the radio used for a specific WLAN the WLAN cannot use a Kerberos supported security policy as no 802 114 clients can support Kerberos on the AP 5131 To configure Kerberos on the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu tree If security policies supporting Kerberos exist they appear within the Security Configuration screen These existing policies can be used as is or their properties edited by clicking the Edit button To configure a new security policy supporting Ke
63. inbound SPI Security Parameter Index SPI for each of the tunnels The SPI is used locally by the AP 5131 to identify a security association There are unique outbound and inbound SPls 6 48 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Life Time Tx Bytes Rx Bytes Reset VPNs Use the Life Time column to view the lifetime associated with a particular Security Association SA Each SA has a finite lifetime defined When the lifetime expires the SA can no longer be used to protect data traffic The maximum SA lifetime is 3600 seconds 1 hour The Tx Bytes column lists the amount of data in bytes transmitted through each configured tunnel Use the Rx Bytes column to view the amount of data in bytes received through each configured tunnel Click the Reset VPNs button to reset active VPNs Selecting Reset VPNs forces renegotiation of all the Security Associations and keys The users associated with the Security Associations could notice a slight pause in network performance 3 Reference the IKE Summary field to view the following Tunnel Name IKE State Destination IP Remaining Life Displays the name of each of the tunnels configured to use IKE for automatic key exchange Lists the state for each of the tunnels configured to use IKE for automatic key exchange When the tunnel is not active the IKE State field displays NOT_CONNECTED When the tunnel is active the IKE State field displays CONNECTED Displays
64. motors fluorescent lights microwave ovens refrigerators and other industrial equipment Signal loss can occur when metal concrete walls or floors block transmission Install the AP 5131 in open areas or add access points as needed to improve coverage Antenna coverage is analogous to lighting Users might find an area lit from far away to be not bright enough An area lit sharply might minimize coverage and create dark areas Uniform antenna placement in an area like even placement of a light bulb provides even efficient coverage Place the AP 5131 using the following guidelines Install the AP 5131 at an ideal height of 10 feet from the ground Orient the AP 5131 antennae vertically for best reception Point the AP 5131 antenna s downward if attaching to the ceiling Hardware Installation 2 5 Symbol recommends conducting a site survey to define and document radio interference obstacles before installing the AP 5131 to maximize its radio coverage area 2 4 1 Site Surveys A site survey analyzes the installation environment and provides users with recommendations for equipment and placement The optimum placement of 802 11a access points differs from 802 11b g access points because the locations and number of access points required are different to support the radio coverage area Symbol recommends conducting a new site survey and developing a new coverage area floor plan when switching from 2 or 11Mbps access points AP 3021 or
65. network admin network admin network admin network wireless wireless wireless wireless acl create gt set name engineering acl create gt set mode deny acl create gt add addr OOAOF843AABB acl create gt add policy For information on configuring the ACL options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring a WLAN Access Control List ACL on page 5 29 8 74 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless acl edit gt Description Edits the properties of an existing MU ACL policy Syntax show Displays MU ACL policy and its parameters set Modifies the properties of an existing MU ACL policy add Adds an MU ACL table entry delete Deletes an MU ACL table entry including starting and ending MAC address ranges change Completes the changes made and exits the session Cancels the changes made and exits the session For information on configuring the ACL options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring a WLAN Access Control List ACL on page 5 29 Command Line Interface Reference 8 75 AP5131 gt admin network wireless acl gt delete Description Removes an MU ACL policy Syntax delete lt acl name gt lt index gt Deletes a partilcular MU ACL policy all Deletes all MU ACL policies For information on configuring the ACL options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring a WLAN Access Control List ACL o
66. obtain a leased IP address and configuration information from a remote server DHCP is based on the BOOTP protocol and can coexist or interoperate with BOOTP Configure the AP 5131 to send out a DHCP request searching for a DHCP BOOTP server to acquire HTML firmware or network configuration files when the AP 5131 boots Because BOOTP and DHCP interoperate whichever responds first becomes the server that allocates information The AP 5131 can be set to only accept replies from DHCP or BOOTP servers or both this is the default setting Disabling DHCP disables BOOTP and DHCP and requires network settings to be set manually If running both DHCP and BOOTP do not select BOOTP Only BOOTP should only be used when the server is running BOOTP exclusively The DHCP client automatically sends a DHCP request at an interval specified by the DHCP server to renew the IP address lease as long as the AP 5131 is running this parameter is programmed at the DHCP server For example Windows 2000 servers typically are set for 3 days 1 14 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 1 23 Multi Function LEDs The AP 5131 houses seven LED indicators Four LEDs exist on the top of the AP 5131 and are visible from wall ceiling and table top orientations Three of these four LEDs are single color activity LEDs and one is a multi function red and white status LED Two LEDs exist on the rear of the AP 5131 and are viewable using a single customer installed exte
67. on page 2 20 The AP 5131 is ready to configure For information on an AP 5131 default configuration see Getting Started on page 3 1 For specific details on AP 5131 system configurations see System Configuration on page 4 1 2 7 3 Suspended Ceiling T Bar Installations A suspended ceiling mount requires holding the AP 5131 up against the T bar of a suspended ceiling grid and twisting the AP 5131 chassis onto the T bar The mounting hardware and tools customer provided required to install the AP 5131 on a ceiling T bar consists of e Safety wire recommended e Security cable optional To install the AP 5131 on a ceiling T bar 1 If required loop a safety wire with a diameter of at least 1 01 mm 04 in but no more than 0 158 mm 0625 in through the tie post above the AP 5131 s console connector and secure the loop 2 lf required install and attach a security cable to the AP 5131 lock port 3 Attach the radio antennae to their correct connectors antenna connectors On the Dual Radio AP 5131 a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for both Radio 1 2 4 GHz and Radio 2 5 2 GHz Two dots designate the secondary antenna for both Radio 1 and Radio 2 On Single Radio models a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for Radio 1 and two dots designate the secondary antenna for Radio 1 A CAUTION Both the Dual and Single Radio model AP 5131s use RSMA t
68. packets that are non unicast Non unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets Displays the average number of retries per packet on each radio A high number could indicate network or hardware problems 3 Click the Clear All Radio Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections Do not clear the radio stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point For information on viewing radio statistics particular to the AP 5131 radio type displayed within the AP Stats Summary screen see Viewing Radio Statistics on page 7 15 4 Click the Logout button to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet 7 4 1 Viewing Radio Statistics Refer to the Radio Stats screen to view detailed information for the AP 5131 radio either 802 11a or 802 11b g displayed within the Radio Summary screen There are four fields within the screen The Information field displays device address and location information as well as channel and power information The Traffic field displays statistics for cumulative packets bytes and errors received and transmitted The Traffic field does not add retry information to the stats displayed Refer to the RF Status field for an average MU signal noise and signal to noise ratio information Finally the Errors field displays retry information as well as data transmissions the AP 5131 radio either
69. pkts per second Total bits per second Total associated MUs Clear all RF Stats 4 Click the Clear RF Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order Displays the average number of retries per packet An excessive number could indicate possible network or hardware problems Click this button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections Do not clear the WLAN stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point Displays the average number of RF packets sent per second across all active WLANs on the AP 5131 The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents total pkts per second for the last hour Displays the average bits sent per second across all active WLANs on the AP 5131 The number in black displays this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue displays this statistic for the last hour Displays the current number of MUs associated with the active WLANs on the AP 5131 If the number is excessive reduce the maximum number of MUs that can associate with the AP 5131 for more information see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 Click the Clear all RF Stats button to reset statistic counters for each WLAN and the Total AP RF totals to 0 Do not clear RF stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losi
70. reduce processor overhead Use the WLAN Security screens WEP Kerberos etc as required for setting user authentication and data encryption parameters To configure the AP 5131 firewall settings 1 Select Network Configuration gt Firewall from the AP 5131 menu tree iy een taguntor Firewall Bw Gone F ewah Dis adie g z wee CC E i ete Ome iy La Timeout Configuration yras GD Banaan Manag NAT Timona Mn e Ad Lo Cortiguratee Firewarl Fitters Qe tet Mar Header Longi 256 bytes Max Headers 12 heaters Grete Name AP 1 J1 2 Refer to the Global Firewall Disable field to enable or disable the AP 5131 firewall 6 26 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 3 Disable Firewall Select the Disable Firewall checkbox to disable all firewall functions on the AP 5131 This includes firewall filters NAT VPN content filtering and subnet access Disabling the AP 5131 firewall makes the AP 5131 vulnerable to data attacks and is not recommended during normal operation if using the WAN port Refer to the Timeout Configuration field to define a timeout interval to terminate IP address translations NAT Timeout Network Address Translation NAT converts an IP address in one network to a different IP address or set of IP addresses in a different network Set a NAT Timeout interval in minutes the AP 5131 uses to terminate the IP address translation process if a response no translation activity is
71. secrets to verify RADIUS messages with the exception of the Access Request message sent by a RADIUS enabled device configured with the same shared secret Apply the qualifications of a well chosen password to the generation of a shared secret Generate a random case sensitive string using letters numbers and symbols Verify the shared secret is at least 22 characters to protect the RADIUS server from brute force attacks An example of a strong and secure shared secret is 8d gt 9fq4bV H7 a3 2E13sW Select the Advanced Settings tab as required to specify a MU quiet period timeout interval transmit period and retry period for MUs and the authentication server MU Quiet Period Specify an idle time in seconds between MU authentication 1 65535 secs attempts as required by the authentication server The default is 10 seconds MU Timeout Define the time in seconds for the AP 5131 s retransmission of 1 255 secs EAP Request packets The default is 10 seconds 6 14 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide MU Tx Period 1 65635 secs MU Max Retries 1 10 retries Server Timeout 1 255 secs Server Max Retries 1 255 retries 7 Select the Reauthentication tab as required to define authentication connection policies Specify the time period in seconds for the AP 5131 s retransmission of the EAP Identity Request frame The default is 5 seconds Specify the maximum number of times the AP 5131 retransmits an E
72. security for VPN negotiation and remote host or network access IKE provides an automatic means of negotiation and authentication for communication between two or more parties In essence IKE manages IPSec keys automatically for the parties Configuring Access Point Security 6 43 To configure IKE key settings for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt VPN from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Refer to the VPN Tunnel Config field select the Auto IKE Key Exchange checkbox and click the IKE Settings button IKE Settings Operation Mode Main Mode Local ID Type FQDN Local ID Data tunneli Remote IO Type FOON j lt Remote ID Data tunnelt IKE Authentication Mode Pre Shared Key PSK al IKE Authentication Algorithm SHA1 IKE Authentication Passphrase ereee IKE Encryption Algorithm 30ES Da Key Lifetime 3600 set Difie Heliman Group Group 1 768bit Cancel Help 3 Configure the IKE Key Settings screen to modify the following The Phase protocols of IKE are based on the ISAKMP identity protection and aggressive exchanges IKE main mode refers to the identity protection exchange and IKE aggressive mode refers to the aggressive exchange e Main Standard IKE mode for communication and key exchange e Aggressive Aggressive mode is faster but less secure than Main mode Identities are not encrypted unless public key encryption is used The authentication method canno
73. see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 Command Line Interface Reference 8 163 AP5131 gt admin system cfg update gt partial Description Restores a partial factory default configuration The AP 5131 s LAN WAN and SNMP settings are uneffected by the partial restore Syntax default Restores a partial AP 5131 configuration Example admin system cfg update gt partial Are you sure you want to partially default the AP5131 lt yes no gt For information on importing exporting AP 5131 configurations using the applet GUI see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 8 164 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cfg update gt show Description Displays import export parameters for the AP 5131 configuration file Syntax show Shows all import export parameters Example admin system cfg update gt show cfg filename cfg txt ftp tftp server ip address 192 168 0 101 ftp user name myadmin ftp password z RRKKKKKK For information on importing exporting AP 5131 configurations using the applet GUI see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 Command Line Interface Reference 8 165 AP5131 gt admin system cfg update gt set Description Sets the import export parameters Syntax set file lt filename gt Sets the configuration file name 1 to 39 characters in length path lt path gt Defines the path used for the configuration file upl
74. segment of the radio frequency band or spectrum Direct sequence is a spread spectrum technique where the transmitted signal is spread over a particular frequency range The Symbol AP 5131 uses Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS for radio communication Direct sequence systems communicate by continuously transmitting a redundant pattern of bits called a chipping sequence Each bit of transmitted data is mapped into chips by the AP 5131 and rearranged into a pseudorandom spreading code to form the chipping sequence The chipping sequence is combined with a transmitted data stream to produce the AP 5131 s output signal MUs receiving a direct sequence transmission use the spreading code to map the chips within the chipping sequence back into bits to recreate the original data transmitted by the AP 5131 AP 5131 Introduction Intercepting and decoding a direct sequence transmission requires a predefined algorithm to associate the spreading code used by the transmitting AP 5131 to the receiving MU This algorithm is established by IEEE 802 11b specifications The bit redundancy within the chipping sequence enables the receiving MU to recreate the original data pattern even if bits in the chipping sequence are corrupted by interference The ratio of chips per bit is called the spreading ratio A high spreading ratio increases the resistance of the signal to interference A low spreading ratio increases the bandwidth available to the user The AP
75. the log txt file Click Save and specify a location to save the log file Use the WordPad application to view the saved log txt file on a Microsoft Windows based computer Do not view the log file using Notepad as the Notepad application does not properly display the formatting of the AP 5131 log file Log entries are not saved in the AP 5131 While the AP is in operation log data temporarily resides in memory AP memory is completely cleared each time the AP reboots 4 30 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Logging Level Use the Logging Level drop down menu to select the desired log level for tracking system events Eight logging levels 0 to 7 are available Log Level 6 Info is the AP 5131 default log level These are the standard UNIX LINUX syslog levels The levels are as follows 0 Emergency 1 Alert 2 Critical 3 Errors 4 Warning 5 Notice 6 Info 7 Debug Enable logging toan The AP 5131 can log events to an external syslog system log external syslog server Server Select the Enable logging to an external syslog server checkbox to enable the server to listen for incoming syslog messages and decode the messages into a log for viewing Syslog server IP If the Enable logging to an external syslog server checkbox is address selected the numerical non DNS name IP address of an external syslog server is required in order to route the syslog events to that destination 3 Click Apply to save any changes t
76. the AP 5131 the MU also needs to be configured for WEP 128 and use the same WEP keys Ensure the MU is associated with the AP 5131 before testing for connectivity 1 Select Status and Statistics gt MU Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Select the Echo Test button from within the MU Stats Summary screen 3 Define the following parameters for the test Station Address The station address is the IP address of the target MU Refer to the MU Stats Summary screen for associated MU IP address information Number of pings Defines the number of packets to be transmitted to the MU The default is 100 3 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Packet Length Specifies the length of each packet transmitted to the MU during the test The default length is 100 bytes 4 Click the Ping button to begin transmitting packets to the specified MU address Refer to the Number of Responses value to assess the number of responses from the MU versus the number of ping packets transmitted by the AP 5131 Use the ratio of packets sent versus the number of packets received the link quality between the MU and the AP 5131 Click the OK button to exit the Echo Test screen and return to the MU Stats Summary screen 3 3 3 Where to Go from Here Once basic connectivity has been verified the AP 5131 can be fully configured to meet the needs of the network and the users it supports Refer to the following e For detailed information on AP
77. the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e AES 192 bit Enables the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 192 bit 48 character hexadecimal keys e AES 256 bit Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 256 bit 64 character hexadecimal keys The number of seconds the key is valid At the end of the lifetime the key is renegotiated The AP 5131 forces renegotiation every 3600 seconds There is no way to change the renegotiation value If the IKE Lifetime is greater than 3600 the keys still get renegotiated every 3600 seconds AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Diffie Hellman Group Select a Diffie Hellman Group to use The Diffie Hellman key agreement protocol allows two users to exchange a secret key over an insecure medium without any prior secrets Two algorithms exist one 768 bit and one 1024 bit algorithm Select one of the following options e Group 1 768 bit Somewhat faster than the 1024 bit algorithm but secure enough in most situations e Group 2 1024 bit Somewhat slower than the 768 bit algorithm but much more secure and a better choice for extremely sensitive situations 4 Click Ok to return to the VPN screen Click Apply to retain the settings made on the IKE Settings screen 5 Click Cancel to return to the VPN screen without retaining the changes made to the IKE Settings screen 6 11 4 Viewing VPN Status Use the VPN Status scre
78. the IP address used by the LAN port Defines the IP address used for AP 5131 LAN port network mask Sets the Gateway IP address used by the LAN port Specifies the domain name used by the AP 5131 LAN port Defines the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS servers used by the LAN port Defines the IP address of the WINS server used by the LAN port lan enable timeout 45 trunking disable dns 1 192 168 0 1 dns 2 192 168 0 2 wins 192 168 0 254 trunking disable username phil passwd ea0258cl1 Shows the current settings for the AP 5131 LAN port For information on configuring the AP 5131 LAN using the applet GUI see Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5 1 8 16 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 1 1 Network LAN VLAN Commands AP5131 gt admin network lan vlan gt Description Displays the AP 5131 VLAN submenu show Displays the VLAN list currently defined for the AP 5131 set Sets the AP 5131 VLAN configuration create Creates a new AP 5131 VLAN edit Edits the properties of an existing AP 5131 VLAN delete Deletes a VLAN mapping Maps AP 5131 WLANs to VLANs 7 Moves to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI and exits the session For an overview of the AP 5131 s VLAN configuration options using the applet GUI see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 Command Line Interface Reference 8 17 AP5131 gt admin network lan v
79. the Quality of Service Configuration screen Click the Set Default Values button to restore factory default CW AIFSN and TXOPs values to the Set RF QoS screen Click OK to implement the selected QoS values and return to the 802 114 or 802 11b g radio configuration screen Clicking Cancel reverts the screen to the last saved configuration Set RF QoS Access CW cw Category Minimum Maximum Background 15 HI Bestefot 15 HH lss H Video 7 kH hs HI Voice 3 fe 17 ic 1 Set Default Values Cancel Help 5 Refer to the Beacon Settings field to set the radio beacon and DTIM intervals 6 Beacon Interval DTIM Interval Network Management 5 43 The beacon interval controls the performance of power save stations A small interval may make power save stations more responsive but it will also cause them to consume more battery power A large interval makes power save stations less responsive but could increase power savings The default is 100 Avoid changing this parameter as it can adversely affect performance The DTIM interval defines how often broadcast frames are delivered If a system has an abundance of broadcast traffic and it needs to be delivered quickly Symbol recommends decreasing the DTIM interval However decreasing the DTIM interval decreases the battery life on power save stations The default is 10 Symbol recommends using the default value unless qualified to understand the performance risks of chang
80. the network connection is verified MUs attach to the network and interact with the AP transparently The AP 5131 should be installed in an area tested for radio coverage using one of the site survey tools available to the Symbol field service technician Once an installation site has been identified the installer should carefully follow the hardware precautions requirements mounting guidelines and power options outlined in Hardware Installation on page 2 1 3 1 Installing the AP 5131 Make the required cable and power connections before mounting the AP 5131 in its final operating position Test the AP 5131 with an associated MU before mounting and securing the AP 5131 Carefully follow the mounting instructions in one of the following sections to ensure the AP 5131 is installed correctly e For instructions on installing the AP 5131 on a table top see Desk Mounted Installations on page 2 11 e For instructions on mounting an AP 5131 to a wall see Wall Mounted Installations on page 2 13 3 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide For instructions on mounting an AP 5131 to a ceiling T bar see Suspended Ceiling T Bar Installations on page 2 15 To install an AP 5131 in an above the ceiling attic space see Above the Ceiling Plenum Installations on page 2 17 For information on the 802 11a and 802 11b g radio antenna suite available to the AP 5131 see Antenna Options on page 2 5 For more information on using a Symbol Power Inj
81. the pertinent information Only 4 values are required the others optional Key ID Enter a logical name for the certificate to help distinguish between certificates The name can be up to 7 characters in length Subject The required Subject value contains important information about the certificate Contact the CA signing the certificate to determine the content of the Subject parameter Signature Algorithm Use the drop down menu to select the signature algorithm used for the certificate Options include e MD5 RSA Message Digest 5 algorithm in combination with RSA encryption e SHA1 RSA Secure Hash Algorithm 1 in combination with RSA encryption System Configuration 4 11 Key Length Defines the length of the key Possible values are 512 1024 and 2048 4 Complete as many of the optional values within the Certificate Request screen as possible 5 When the form is completed click the Generate button The Certificate Request screen disappears and the ID of the generated certificate request displays in the drop down list of certificates 6 Click the Export Request button The generated certificate request displays in Self Certificates screen text box 7 Click the Copy to Clipboard button The content of certificate request is copied to the clipboard Create an email to your CA paste the content of the request into the body of the message and send it to the CA The CA signs the certificate and will send it back Once
82. the radio One of two possible radio configuration pages are available on the AP 5131 depending on which model SKU is purchased If the AP 5131 is a single radio model the Radio Configuration screen enables you to configure the single radio for either 802 11a or 802 11b g use The Radio Configuration screen contains two radio buttons whose selection is mutually exclusive Network Management 5 37 If the AP 5131 is a dual radio model the Radio Configuration screen enables you to configure one radio for 802 11a use and the other for 802 11b g no other alternatives exist for the dual radio model Using a dual radio AP 5131 individual 802 11a and 802 11b g radios can be enabled or disabled using the Radio Configuration screen checkboxes To set the AP 5131 radio configuration this example is for a dual radio AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Radio Configuration from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol n Netecth Cortgeratert Radio Configuration at Rane Comtgaasen Puar Enbe Rado AF beng of operator w hafi z 0211 24 OHH y Corant E weng SE verwe 802 118 5 OND r yw Go 9 Rado Contgutatins et wey Mo oe D Frowa LOF Q era to ae 5w tat Gystern Name AP S839 2 Enable the radio s using the Enable Radio checkbox es If using a single radio model enable the radio then select either 802 11a 5 GHz or 802 1 1b g 2 4 GHz from the RF band of operation field Only one R
83. the remaining lifetime of the IKE key Example admin network wan vpn gt ikestate Eng2EngAnnex Not Connected SJSharkey Not Connected admin network wan vpn gt For information on configuring IKE using the applet GUI see Configuring IKE Key Settings on page 6 42 8 52 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 2 3 Network WAN App Commands AP5131 gt admin network wan app gt Description Displays the outbound content filtering submenu The items available under this command are shown below addcmd Adds app control commands to the deny list delcmd Deletes app control commands from the deny list list Lists app control entries j Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 53 AP5131 gt admin network wan app gt addcmd Description Adds app control commands to the deny list Syntax addcmd_ web file lt filename gt lt ext gt proxy activex ftp put get Is mkdir cd pasv smtp helo mail rcpt data quit send saml reset vrfy expn Denies specified web file name lt filename gt can be up to 15 characters and can be used to match any string lt ext gt can be up to 10 characters such as htm html or java Up to 10 files can be specified Denies web proxies Denies ActiveX files Adds put command to the deny list Adds get command to the deny list
84. tree If security policies supporting WPA TKIP exist they appear within the Security Configuration screen These existing policies can be used as is or their properties edited by clicking the Edit button To configure a new security policy supporting WPA TKIP continue to step 2 Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting WPA TKIP The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encryption options selected Select the WPA TKIP radio button The WPA TKIP Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy Marrsaty Pre aned boy NO shert ston Ker 34 ai y saman Key RonBen O02 1x6 Update Broadcast keys every Key Setegs SENP Ne Eecnetor ASCH Passpvete WEP 64 40 bt hay WEP 178 104 bt key Koyveeert s venno ALL AZ 1 737675267 VR AVOCMP 002110 Eater 10 hex characters per feed Java Window 5 Configure the Key Rotation Settings area as needed to broadcast encryption key changes to MUs and define the broadcast interval Broadcast Key Rotation Update broadcast keys every 300 604800 seconds Configuring Access Point Security 6 21 Select the Broadcast Key Rotation checkbox to enable or disable the broadcasting of encryption key changes to MUs Only broadcast key changes when required by associated MUs to reduce the transmissions of sensitive k
85. user base the AP 5131 supports engineering retail etc System Location Enter the location of the AP 5131 The System Location parameter acts as a reminder of where the AP can be found Use the System Name field as a specific identifier of device location Use the System Name and System Location fields together to optionally define the AP name by the radio coverage it supports and specific physical location For example second floor engineering Admin Email Address Specify the AP administrator s email address Country The AP 5131 prompts the user for the correct country code after the first login A warning message also displays stating that an incorrect country setting will lead to an illegal use of the AP 5131 Use the pull down menu to select the country of operation Selecting the correct country is extremely important Each country has its own regulatory restrictions concerning electromagnetic emissions channel range and the maximum RF signal strength transmitted To ensure compliance with national and local laws be sure to set the Country field correctly If using the AP 5131 configuration file CLI or MIB to configure the AP 5131 s country code see Country Codes on page A 5 AP 5131 Version The displayed number is the current version of the AP 5131 device firmware Use this information to determine if the AP is running the most recent firmware available from Symbol Use the Firmware Update screen to keep the AP s firmwar
86. via FTP to a location specified with the set command Use the set command to set the FIP login and site information Example admin system logs gt send File transfer In progress File transfer Done admin system logs gt For information on configuring logging settings using the applet GUI see Logging Configuration on page 4 28 84 7 System Configuration Update Commands AP5131 gt admin system cfg update gt Description Displays the AP 5131 configuration update submenu Syntax default Restores the default AP 5131 configuration partial Restores a partial default AP 5131 configuration show Shows import export parameters set Sets import export AP 5131 configuration parameters export Exports AP 5131 configuration to a designated system import Imports configuration to the AP 5131 A Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to AP 5131 system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 161 8 162 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cfg update gt default Description Restores the full AP 5131 factory default configuration Syntax default Restores the AP 5131 to the original factory configuration Example admin system cfg update gt default Are you sure you want to default the configuration lt yes no gt For information on importing exporting AP 5131 configurations using the applet GUI
87. within the known AP table clear Clears all statistic counters to zero flash all leds Starts and stops the flashing of all AP 5131 LEDs echo Defines the parameters for pinging a designated station ping Iniates a ping test z Moves to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the current configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 175 8 176 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin stats gt show Description Displays AP 5131 system information Syntax show wan Displays stats for the AP 5131 WAN port lan Displays stats for the AP 5131 LAN port wlan Displays WLAN status and statistics summary s wlan Displays status and statistics for an individual WLAN radio Displays a radio statistics transmit and receive summary mu Displays all mobile unit MU status s mu Displays status and statistics for an individual MU known ap Displays a Known AP summary Example admin stats gt show wlan Index 1 Name Front Lobby Status Enabled Index 2 Name Ist Floor Status Disabled Index 23 Name Office Status Disabled admin stats gt show known ap For information on displaying LAN port statistics using the applet GUI see Viewing LAN Statistics on page 7 5 For information on displaying WAN port statistics using the applet GUI see Viewing WAN Statistics on page 7 2 For information on displaying Wireless statistics using the app
88. 1 Access Point Product Reference Guide System configuration topics include e Configuring System Settings e Configuring Data Access e Managing Certificate Authority CA Certificates e Configuring SNMP Settings e Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP e logging Configuration e mporting Exporting Configurations e Updating Device Firmware 4 1 Configuring System Settings Use the System Settings screen to specify the name and location of the AP 5131 assign an email address for the network administrator restore the AP s default configuration or restart the AP To configure System Settings for the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt System Settings from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol ma T ER Peteork Contigernnee System Settings Q pre tgar adar O Sritam Setnge AP S131 Oyster Setngs System Name Contesto Mgnt fretar Loc atan LS NMP Acce agar meal Attesa E ITP Sarre ioe Jur ec a3 AP 5131 Version 1 0 0 0 193N_2005_99_29 Gysiem Uptrne 0 days 15 hours 25 minmstes 37 seconds Is amp States Genel Number ODAOFETIACSE Factory Defauts Restan AP 5131 Bester Nerve AP 5337 System Configuration 4 3 2 Configure the AP 5131 System Settings field to assign a system name and location set the country of operation and view device version information System Name Specify a device name for the AP 5131 Symbol recommends selecting a name serving as a reminder of the
89. 1 to 59 characters loc lt loc gt Sets the AP 5131 system location to lt loc gt 1 to 59 characters email lt email gt Sets the AP 5131 admin email address to lt email gt 1 to 59 characters cc lt code gt Sets the AP 5131 country code using two letters lt code gt Example admin system gt show system name AP5131 system location San Jose Engineering admin email address SJSharkey symbol com system uptime 0 days 4 hours 33 minutes AP 5131 firmware version 1 0 0 0 xxx country code us For information on configuring System Settings using the applet GUI see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 Refer to Appendix A for information on the two character country codes Command Line Interface Reference 8 125 8 4 1 System Debug and Last Password Commands AP5131 gt admin system gt debug Description Accesses AP 5131 debug information This information is designed for field service use only and should not be used by unqualified personnel Example admin system gt debug Debug Password AP 5131 MAC Address is 00 A0 F8 71 6A 74 Last Password was symbol12 AP5131 gt admin system gt lastpw Description Displays the last debug password admin system gt lastpw AP 5131 MAC Address is 00 A0 F8 71 6A 74 Last Password was symbol12 Current password used 0 times valid 4 more time s 8 126 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 4 2 System Access Commands AP5131 gt admin system g
90. 192 168 2 1 LAN 1 admin network router gt list index destination netmask gateway interface metric 1 192 168 2 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 2 1 lan 1 For information on configuring the Router options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Router Settings on page 5 47 Command Line Interface Reference 8 119 AP5131 gt admin network router gt delete Description Deletes user defined routes Syntax delete lt idx gt Deletes the user defined route lt idx gt 1 20 from list all Deletes all user defined routes Example admin network router gt list index destination netmask gateway interface metric 1 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 2 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 3 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 admin network router gt delete 2 admin network router gt list 1 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 2 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 admin network router gt For information on configuring the Router options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Router Settings on page 5 47 8 120 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network router gt list Description Lists user defined routes Syntax list Displays a list of user defined routes Example admin network router gt list index destination netmask gateway interface metric 1 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 2 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0
91. 1a radio the actual range is country dependent Symbol devices like other Ethernet devices have unique hardware encoded Media Access Control WAC or IEEE addresses MAC addresses determine the device sending or receiving data A MAC address is a 48 bit number written as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons For example 00 A0 F8 24 9A C8 Also see the following sections e Cellular Coverage e Network Topology AP 5131 Introduction 1 15 e MAC Layer Bridging e Content Filtering e DHCP Support e Media Types e Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum e MU Association Process e Operating Modes e Management Access Options 1 2 1 Cellular Coverage An AP 5131 establishes an average communication range with MUs called a Basic Service Set BSS or cell When in a particular cell the MU associates and communicates with the AP 5131 supporting the radio coverage area of that cell Adding AP 5131 s to a single LAN establishes more cells to extend the range of the network Configuring the same ESSI D Extended Service Set Identifier on all AP 5131 s makes them part of the same Wireless LAN AP 5131 s with the same ESSID defines a coverage area A valid ESSID is an alphanumeric case sensitive identifier up to 32 characters An MU searches for an AP 5131 with a matching ESSID and synchronizes associates to establish communications This device association allows MUs within the coverage area to move about or roam As the MU roams from cell t
92. 2 11 installation wall mounting 0 2 13 J Java Based WEB Ul 0 2020020055 3 2 K RENGEIOS scuipat titer t terki eee ee Ree es 1 5 authentica lt 5 45 niii rs aaRS 1 6 MPEMEMA Oke araa a 1 5 Kerberos authentication 2 05 1 5 KRUG sdicasanieeiesisenacrnnes 1 5 1 7 6 17 L LAN SOM ccc ct cocandiawhtadmedabieeneohows age 1 3 LAN to WAN access 0 20 0000055 6 27 LAN configuring 0 0 0 cc cece eee eee eae 5 1 LAN StaUG ieee i aah ee er aed 7 5 LAN MOOI sc coc c 4 cde a codices seneeeeesownes 5 3 LED NUCA a0 contaseaakekioneeguracenes 1 14 LESS c1 cye erieeiarese ridai niner riri 1 14 2 20 logging configuration 00 eee 4 28 BAIN SOE EPES EEE EEE EE E EE 3 3 4 1 M MAC layer bridging 0 005 1 19 management options 00088 1 23 NAP od coh innate ed ians E EE 1 9 Media types 0 eee eee eee 1 20 rs tit td ah E EENI I T ANTT 3 2 ML ZA9IAIPNAZ DI o cones icces ese cuevetisessa 2 5 ML 2499 BYGA2 01 0 0 0 00000 2008 2 6 MIL 7499 FPAS O1 erort packers eapaeeeaaberden 2 5 MLsS299 WBPBAIAO1 cis cectivigserdaneeaqa xs 2 6 ML 5299 WPNAIOT crre picdned paca a aiaananaas 2 6 MONDING SISOS apes ccrncepagveermrangens 7 1 MOUMENGOMIONS ce scnceceoereenaontodedenaaes 1 3 mounting the AP 5131 05 2 11 MU CO ates EE PA EEA EEE 1 12 data decryption n nsaan aunan unnn 1 7 data encr
93. 3 Trap Support Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices SNMP uses Management Information Bases MIBs to manage the device configuration and monitor Internet devices in remote locations MIB information accessed via SNMP is defined by a set of managed objects called object identifiers O Ds An object identifier OID is used to uniquely identify each object variable of a MIB SNMP allows a network administrator to configure the AP 5131 manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth The AP 5131 supports SNMP management functions for gathering information from its network components The AP 5131 CDROM and the AP 5131 downloads site contains the following 2 MIB files e Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 standard Symbol MIB file e Symbol AP 5131 MIB AP 5131 specific MIB file The AP 5131 SNMP agent functions as a command responder and is a multilingual agent responding to SNMPv1 v2c and v3 managers command generators The factory default configuration maintains SNMPv1 2c support of the community names hence providing backward compatibility For information on configuring SNMP traps see Configuring SNMP Settings on page 4 11 1 1 13 Power over Ethernet Support When users purchase a Symbol WLAN solution they often need to place access points in obscure locations In the past a dedicated power source was required for each access
94. 31 AP Radar detection Generates a trap if an AP is detected using a form of radar detection 6 Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP Traps screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost 7 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on SNMP Traps screen to the last saved configuration 8 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 4 4 Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds Use the SNMP RF Trap Threshold screen as a means to track RF activity and the AP 5131 s radio and associated MU performance SNMP FF Traps are sent when PF traffic exceeds defined limits set in the RF Trap Thresholds field of the SNMP RF Traps screen Thresholds are displayed for the AP 5131 WLAN selected radio and the associated MU To configure specific SNMP RF Traps on the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt SNMP Access gt SNMP RF Trap Thresholds from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 SNMP Trap SNUP RF Trap Threshette NTF Servers Legging Corts C Cents imponis Dharwar pt dd Maus A ftat Gystem Name AST ae System Configuration 4 25 SNMP RF Trap Thresholds AF Trap Tereshelss Access Point WLAN B02 tibo B2Ita M Peters Qe wer Pan J Pos Taurosyapat ge sw par Mbps Average Bt Gpee
95. 31 requires modification see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 Monitoring Statistics 7 23 Voice MU Displays whether or not the mobile unit is a voice capable device Such devices include Netvision and Spectralink IP phones Traffic from voice MUs is handled differently than traffic from MUs without this capability MUs grouped to particular WLANs can be prioritized to transmit and receive voice traffic over data traffic For more information see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 Encryption Displays the encryption scheme deployed by the associated MU 5 Refer to the Traffic field to view individual MU RF throughput information Packets per second The Total column displays average total packets per second crossing the MU The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received on the MU The Tx column displays the average total packets per second sent on the MU The number in black represents Pkts per second for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents Pkts per second for the last hour Throughput The Total column displays the average total packets per second crossing the selected MU The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received on the MU The Tx column displays the average total packets per second sent on the MU The number in black represents throughput for the last 30 seconds the number in blue represents throughput for the last hour Avg Bit Speed T
96. 4 22 SNMP traps PILE IET PEART T 4 19 E A E E A T NA 4 20 SNMP v3 user definitions PTT EART 4 15 statistics AP 5131 A ENE REEE OPET 7 26 statistics LAN IERA ES TETIT EEATT ro SAGES WIN SEAE EE PEE EE 7 20 e Ae e EE TE 7 14 EEA A O E E E EN 7 2 Statistics WLAN 0 020 00000200 cee eee 7 8 suspended T Bar installations 2 15 Symbol support center 0 05 viii system configuration re eee piven anid 41 SUSIE MOBAUOM oooh os eee heeas des meek ee 4 3 system NAME eee eee 4 3 system settings n cece eee eee 4 2 system settings configuration 4 2 SSIS UPN eita a eeu ve ees 4 3 T ecinic SUDPON 1 25 405 catnrteeareenagaapakeade vill testing AP 5131 connectivity 3 11 TESTING CONNECIVITG 53 54 25a xdeeesncyioxses oad 3 11 theory of operations 0 0 00 eee eae 1 14 AEE S EE ETE A 1 7 transmit power control vere 1 12 type filter configuration 000 5 11 V VLAN SUpport se soccroinicssrsiieiiserisrineri 1 9 VLAN CONTIG 20 2 e cee eee eee eee sw eenes 5 3 VLAN configuring 0 0 cece eee ee eee 5 5 VLAN management tag 000005 5 8 VAN NOME 5 p4esenadikes whens eden deans 5 3 VLAN native tag SOPTIT SEVIA TIEAN 5 9 Voice prioritization SEEREN T 1 11 MT AE e STANT Speehatceesucsieedsken 1 8 MAN UMNE s
97. 5131 configuration applet using a Secure Sockets Layer SSL for encrypted HTTP sessions CLI TELNET port 23 Select the LAN and or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the AP 5131 CLI via the TELNET terminal emulation TCP IP protocol CLI SSH port 22 Select the LAN and or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the AP 5131 CLI using the SSH Secure Shell protocol SNMP port 161 Select the LAN and or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the AP 5131 configuration settings from an SNMP capable client Refer to the Applet Timeout field to set an HTTPS timeout interval HTTP S Timeout Disables access to the AP 5131 if no data activity is detected over Applet HTTPS port 443 after the user defined interval Default is 0 Mins Configure the Secure Shell field to set timeout values to reduce network inactivity Authentication Defines the maximum time 0 120 seconds allowed for SSH Timeout authentication to occur before executing a timeout The default is 120 seconds SSH Keepalive The SSH Keepalive Interval defines a period in minutes after Interval which if no data has been received from an client SSH sends a message through the encrypted channel to request a response from the client The default is 0 and no messages will be sent to the client until a non zero value is set Defining a Keepalive interval is important otherwise programs running on a server may never notice if the other end of a connection is rebooted Use the Admin Aut
98. 5131 uses different modulation schemes to encode more bits per chip at higher data rates The AP 5131 is capable of a maximum 54Mbps data transmission rate 802 11a radio but the coverage area is less than AP 5131 s operating at lower data rates since coverage area decreases as bandwidth increases 1 2 6 MU Association Process An AP 5131 recognizes MUs as they begin the association process with the AP 5131 An AP 5131 keeps a list of the MUs it services MUs associate with an AP 5131 based on the following conditions e signal strength between the AP 5131and MU e number of MUs currently associated with the AP 5131 e MUs encryption and authentication capabilities e MUs supported data rate MUs perform pre emptive roaming by intermittently scanning for AP 5131 s and associating with the best available AP 5131 Before roaming and associating MUs perform full or partial scans to collect AP 5131 statistics and determine the direct sequence channel used by the AP 5131 Scanning is a periodic process where the MU sends out probe messages on all channels defined by the country code The statistics enable an MU to reassociate by synchronizing its channel to the AP 5131 The MU continues communicating with that AP 5131 until it needs to switch cells or roam MUs perform partial scans at programmed intervals when missing expected beacons or after excessive transmission retries In a partial scan the MU scans AP 5131 s classified as proximate on the A
99. 8 72 20 DC Same as Radio MAC address BSSID 2 00 A0 F8 72 20 DD Radio MAC address 1 BSSID 3 00 A0 F8 72 20 DE Radio MAC address 2 BSSID 4 00 A0 F8 72 20 DF Radio MAC address 3 For information on strategically mapping BSSIDs to WLANs see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 1 1 7 Quality of Service QoS Support The AP 5131 QoS implementation provides applications running on different wireless devices a variety of priority levels to transmit data to and from the AP 5131 Equal data transmission priority is fine for data traffic from applications such as Web browsers file transfers or email but is inadequate for multimedia applications Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP video streaming and interactive gaming are highly sensitive to latency increases and throughput reductions These forms of higher priority data traffic can significantly benefit from the AP 5131 QoS implementation The WiFi Multimedia QOS Extensions WMM implementation used by the AP 5131 shortens the time between transmitting higher priority data traffic and is thus desirable for multimedia applications AP 5131 Introduction 1 5 WMM defines four access categories voice video best effort and background to prioritize traffic to provide enhanced multimedia support For information on configuring QoS support for the AP 5131 see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 1 1 8 Industry Leading Data Security The AP 5131 support
100. 86400 Reserved Clients Client MAC IP Address 3 Specify a lease period in seconds for available IP addresses using the DHCP Lease Time Seconds parameter An IP address is reserved for re connection for the length of time you specify The default interval is 86400 seconds 4 Click the Add button to create a new table entry within the Reserved Clients field Network Management 5 11 If a statically mapped IP address is within the IP address range in use by the DHCP server that IP address may still be assigned to another client To avoid this ensure all statically mapped IP addresses are outside of the IP address range assigned to the DHCP server If multiple entries exist within the Reserved Clients field use the scroll bar to the right of the window to navigate 5 Click the Del delete button to remove a selected table entry 6 Click OK to return to the LAN Configuration page where the updated settings within the Advanced DHCP Server screen can be saved by clicking the Apply button 7 Click Cancel to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed to the last saved configuration 5 1 3 Setting the Type Filter Configuration The AP 5131 can keep a list of frame types that it forwards or discards The Type Filtering feature prevents specific a potentially unneccesary frames from being processed by the AP 5131 in order to improve throughput These include certain broadcast frames from devices that consu
101. A 4 28 Importing Exporting Configurations 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee ee 4 30 Updating Device Firmware 5 2c4cccexscageivssedersgeaeiessoagrenses 4 34 Chapter 5 Network Management Configuring the LAN Interface sss crerreriersriered rin eR RRR 5 1 Configuring VLAN Suppo ss ssssssss ssis kor rrn SSA SATA ETARTE 5 5 Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings 005 5 10 Setting the Type Filter Configuration 0 00 0 eee eee 5 11 P A E a E 5 13 Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings 5 18 Configuring Port POrwardi eei ccacs deaveerver irriter irekia 5 20 Enabling Wireless LANs WLANS 2 020000 ccc eee cece eee 5 22 Creating Editing Individual WLANS 0 0 00 0 cece eee eee ees 5 24 Configuring WLAN Security Policies 0 0 000s 5 27 Configuring a WLAN Access Control List ACL 5 29 Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy 5 31 Setting the WLAN s Radio Configuration 0 000 8 5 36 Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio 005 5 38 Configuring Bandwidth Management Settings 005 5 45 Contiguring Router Seting io eirediidedrasreseei eee eberedreseeneees 5 47 Chapter 6 Configuring Access Point Security Coniiguring Security DOIONS oaks erika eedrwarioebeearkrnar bashes erie 6 2 SEN aU a A thd atapnraudds EE E T 6 3 Resetting the AP 5131 Password
102. A TKIP CCMP computes a Message Integrity Check MIC using the proven Cipher Block Message Authentication Code CBC MAC technique Changing just one bit in a message produces a totally different result WPA2 CCMP is based on the concept of a Robust Security Network RSN which defines a hierarchy of keys with a limited lifetime similar to TKIP Like TKIP the keys the administrator provides are used to derive other keys Messages are encrypted using a 128 bit secret key and a 128 bit block of data the end result is an encryption scheme as secure as any the AP 5131 provides For additional information on configuring WPA2 CCMP see Configuring WPA2 CCMP 802 11i on page 6 22 1 1 8 7 Firewall Security A firewall keeps personal data in and hackers out The AP 5131 firewall prevents suspicious Internet traffic from proliferating the AP 5131 managed network The AP 5131 performs network address translation NAT on packets passing to and from the WAN port This combination provides enhanced security by monitoring communication with the wired network For instructions on setting the AP 5131 firewall see Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6 25 1 1 8 8 VPN Tunnels Virtual Private Networks VPNs are IP based networks using encryption and tunneling providing users remote access to a secure LAN In essence the trust relationship is extended from one LAN across the public network to another LAN without sacrificing security A VPN behaves like a p
103. A2 CCMP 802 111 checkbox The WPA2 CCMIP Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen 4 Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy 5 Configure the Key Rotation Settings field as required to set Broadcast Key Rotation and 6 Maruah Pre ahared bey NO aPert aon waerberos 002 te EAP Enoypeen to Encrgien WEP 4 00 gt E bey WEP 128 104 Of key vevouerd WPNP e APAYCOVP 002 119 Jawa Acetat w cione the update interval Broadcast Key Rotation Update broadcast keys every 300 604800 seconds Configure the Key Settings area as needed to set an ASCII Passphrase and 128 bit key Configuring Access Point Security 6 23 Encryption WPANICCUP Gemegs key Ronan Settings Broad aat Fey Rotatoe Up sta breadcant bays every 400 380401800 seconds Key Semegs ASCH Passphrase 256 28 Key 1714151017 101014101 brew da 6757077 702A207C 10 E Enter 16 hex characters per foid WPAD COMP Mines Mose Fast Roaring 802 te onh Mine VPA TOP charts Select the Broadcast Key Rotation checkbox to enable or disable the broadcasting of encryption key changes to MUs Only broadcast key changes when required by associated MUs to reduce the transmissions of sensitive key information This option is disabled by default Specify a time period in seconds for broadcasting encryption key changes to MUs Set key bro
104. AIL control channel error FAIL data channel error FAIL channel closed unexpected FAIL establish data channel FAIL accept data channel FAIL user interrupted FAIL no valid interface found FAIL conflict ip address FAIL command exchange time out FAIL invalid subnet number Confirm the AP 5131 s configuration is the same as before the firmware update If they are not restore the settings Refer to mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 for instructions on exporting the configuration back to the AP 5131 Click Apply to save the filename and filepath information entered into the Firmware Update screen The Apply button does not execute the firmware only saves the update settings entered Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on Firmware Update screen to the last saved configuration Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed Configuring network management includes configuring network aspects in numerous areas See the following sections for more information on AP 5131 network management e Configuring the LAN Interface e Configuring WAN Settings e Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs e Configuring Router Settings 5 1 Configuring the LAN Interface The AP 5131 has one LAN port and thus must manage all data traffic over the LAN connection
105. AP 4131 models to 54Mbps access points AP 5131 models as the device placement requirements are significantly different 2 4 2 Antenna Options Both Radio 1 and Radio 2 require one antenna and can optimally use two antennae per radio 4 antennae total for dual radio models Two antennae per radio provides diversity that can improve performance and signal reception Symbol supports two antenna suites for the AP 5131 One antenna suite supporting the 2 4 GHz band and another antenna suite supporting the 5 2 GHz band Select an antenna model best suited to the intended operational environment of your AP 5131 NOTE Ona single radio AP 5131 Radio 1 can be configured to be either a 2 4 GHz or 5 2 GHz radio On a dual radio model Radio 1 refers to the AP 5131 s 2 4 GHz radio and Radio 2 refers to the AP 5131 5 2 GHz radio However there could be some cases where a dual radio AP 5131 is performing a Rogue AP detector function In this scenario the AP 5131 is receiving in either 2 4 GHz or 5 2 GHz over the Radio 1 or Radio 2 antennae depending on which radio is selected for the scan Antenna connectors for Radio 1 are located in a different location from the Radio 2 antenna connectors On single radio versions the R SMA connectors can support both bands and should be connected to a R SMA dual band antenna or an appropriate single band antenna If necessary a R SMA to R BNC adapter Part No 25 72178 01 can be purchased separately from Symb
106. AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide in RFC 1510 to authenticate users clients in a wireless network environment and to securely distribute the encryption keys used for both encrypting and decrypting A basic understanding of RFC 1510 Kerberos Network Authentication Service V5 is helpful in understanding how Kerberos functions By default WLAN devices operate in an open system network where any wireless device can associate with an AP without authorization Kerberos requires device authentication before access to the wired network is permitted For additional information on configuring Kerbeors see Configuring Kerberos Authentication on page 6 9 1 1 8 2 EAP Authentication The Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP feature provides access points and their associated MU s an additional measure of security for data transmitted over the wireless network Using EAP authentication between devices is achieved through the exchange and verification of certificates EAP can be used in mixed mode security with Kerberos and WEP EAP is a mutual authentication method whereby both the MU and AP are required to prove their identities Like Kerberos the user loses device authentication if the server cannot provide proof of device identification Using EAP a user requests connection to a WLAN through the AP 5131 The AP 5131 then requests the identity of the user and transmits that identity to an authentication server The server prompts the AP
107. AP 5131 NAT parameters for the specified NAT index Example admin network wan nat gt show 2 WAN IP Mode WAN IP Address NAT Type 1 to 1 Outbound Mappings Inbound Mappings unspecified port forwarding mode unspecified port fwd ip address admin network wan nat gt disable 157 235 91 2 1 to many 0 0 0 0 Port Forwarding enable 111 223 222 1 For an overview of the AP 5131 NAT options available using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings on page 5 18 Command Line Interface Reference 8 39 AP5131 gt admin network wan nat gt set Description Sets NAT inbound and outbound parameters Syntax set type lt index gt ip lt index gt mode lt index gt unspec ip lt index gt Example admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network WAN IP Mode WAN IP Address NAT Type lt type gt Sets the type of NAT translation for WAN address index lt idx gt 1 8 to lt type gt none 1 to 1 or 1 to many lt ip gt Sets NAT IP mapping associated with WAN address lt idx gt to the specified IP address lt ip gt enable disable Enable or disable the AP 5131 s Unspecified Port Forwarding mode for the designated NAT index lt ip gt Forward unspecified ports for the defined NAT index to the defined IP address wan nat gt set type 1 to 1 wan nat gt set ip 157 235 91 2 wan nat gt set mode 2 disable wan nat
108. AP Request frame to the client before it times out the authentication session The default is 2 retries Specify the time in seconds for the AP 5131 s retransmission of EAP Request packets to the server The default is 5 seconds If this time is exceeded the authetnication session is terminated Specify the maximum number of times for the AP 5131 to retransmit an EAP Request frame to the server before it times out the authentication session The default is 2 retries intervals and maximum retries Enable Reauthentication Period 30 9999 secs Max Retries 1 99 retries 8 Select the Radius Accounting tab as required to define a timeout period and retry interval Select the Enable Reauthentication checkbox to configure a wireless connection policy so MUs are forced to reauthenticate periodically Periodic repetition of the EAP process provides ongoing security for current authorized connections Set the EAP reauthentication period to a shorter time interval at least 30 seconds for tighter security on the WLAN s connections Set the EAP reauthentication period to a longer time interval at most 9999 seconds to relax security on wireless connections The reauthentication period setting does not affect wireless connection throughput The default is 3600 seconds Define the maximum number of MU retries to reauthenticate after failing to complete the EAP process Failure to reauthenticate in the specified number of retries resul
109. Blocks the request to retrieve files sent from the FIP server across the AP s WAN port to the client e Directory List Blocks requests to retrieve a directory listing sent from the client across the AP s WAN port to the FIP server e Create Directory Blocks requests to create directories sent from the client across the AP s WAN port to the FIP server e Change Directory Blocks requests to change directories sent from the client across the AP s WAN port to the FIP server e Passive Operation Blocks passive mode FIP requests sent from the client across the AP s WAN port to the FIP server 5 Click Apply to save any changes to the Content Filtering screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost 6 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Content Filtering screen to the last saved configuration 7 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 6 13 Configuring Rogue AP Detection It is possible that not all of the devices identified by the AP 5131 are operating legitimately within the AP 5131 s radio coverage area A rogue AP is a device located nearby an authorized Symbol AP 5131 but recognized as having properties rendering its operation illegal and threatening to the AP 5131 and the LAN Rogue AP detec
110. CP IP data carrier errors 5 Click the Clear WAN Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections The RX TX Packets and RX TX Bytes totals remain at their present values and are not cleared Do not clear the WAN stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 7 2 Viewing LAN Statistics Use the LAN Stats screen to monitor the activity of the AP 5131 LAN connection The Information field of the LAN Stats screen displays network traffic information as monitored over the AP 5131 LAN port The Received and Transmitted fields of the screen display statistics for the cumulative packets bytes and errors received and transmitted over the LAN port since it was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted The LAN Stats screen is view only with no user configurable data fields To view AP 5131 LAN connection stats 1 Select Status and Statistics gt LAN Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree 7 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP 5131 symbo tT a LAN Sits CR Cortera marieg romanon FE vivete rie at HO wu FO HW Address OD AD FET ACSF oh Al PAdhess 19219801 Ro erot Transmtos RX Emos t MW Emos 3 RX Packets 29158 RX Dropped TX Pochets 4844 TK Orop
111. Deletes connect directory command from the deny list pasv Deletes passive mode command from the deny list smtp helo Deletes helo SMTP command from the deny list mail Deletes mail SMTP command from the deny list rcpt Deletes rcpt SMTP command from the deny list data Deletes data SMTP command from the deny list quit Deletes quit SMTP command from the deny list send Deletes send SMTP command from the deny list saml Deletes saml SMTP command from the deny list reset Deletes reset SMTP command from the deny list vrfy Deletes vrfy SMTP command from the deny list expn Deletes expn SMTP command from the deny list For information on configuring Content Filtering using the applet GUI see Configuring Content Filtering Settings on page 6 48 AP5131 gt admin network wan app gt list Description Lists the app control records Syntax list web Lists Web HTTP app control settings ftp Lists FIP app control settings smtp Lists SMTP app control record Example admin network wan app gt list web HTTP Files Commands Web Proxy deny ActiveX deny filename admin network wan app gt list ftp FTP Commands Storing Files allow Retrieving Files allow Directory List allow Create Directory deny Change Directory deny Passive Operation deny admin network wan app gt list smtp SMTP Commands HELO deny MAIL allow RCPT allow DATA allow QUIT allow SEND allow SAML allow RESET allow VRFY
112. Dynamic checkbox is enabled only when a WLAN is having EAP security configured Otherwise the checkbox is disabled Click Apply to return to the VLAN Name screen Click OK to return to the LAN screen Once at the LAN screen click Apply to re apply your changes 5 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 5 1 2 Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings Use the Advanced DHCP Server screen to specify reserve static or fixed IP addresses for specific devices Every wireless 802 11x standard device has a unique Media Access Control MAC address This address is the device s hard coded hardware number shown on the bottom or back An example of a MAC address is 00 A0 F8 45 9B 07 The DHCP server can grant an IP address for as long as it remains in active use The lease time is the number of seconds that an IP address is reserved for re connection after its last use Using very short leases DHCP can dynamically reconfigure networks in which there are more computers than available IP addresses This is useful for example in education and customer environments where MU users change frequently Use longer leases if there are fewer users To generate a list of client MAC address to IP address mappings for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt LAN Configuration from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Click the Advanced DHCP Server button from within the LAN Configuration screen Advanced DHCP server DHCP Lease Time Seconds
113. Dyuvwx For information on configuring certificate management settings using the applet GUI see Managing Certificate Authority CA Certificates on page 4 8 Command Line Interface Reference 8 131 AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt delself Description Deletes a self certificate Syntax delself lt IDname gt Deletes the self certificate named lt IDname gt Example admin system cmgr gt delself MyCert2 For information on configuring self certificate settings using the applet GUI see Creating Self Certificates on page 4 9 8 132 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt loadself Description Loads a self certificate signed by the Certificate Authority Syntax loadself lt lDname gt Load the self certificate signed by the CA with name lt IDname gt For information on configuring self certificate settings using the applet GUI see Creating Self Certificates on page 4 9 Command Line Interface Reference 8 133 AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt listself Description Lists the loaded self certificates Syntax listself Lists all self certificates that are loaded For information on configuring self certificate settings using the applet GUI see Creating Self Certificates on page 4 9 8 134 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt loadca Description Loads a trusted certificate from the Certificate Authority Syntax loadca L
114. ED MACAUS 4 de cd i hase Sh apes AA 2 20 SOLE IS ne sek Oink dedi dr eens sree ees 2 22 Chapter 3 Getting Started NSN ERIS ES E E chose eed E A I E E T 3 1 Conlguation UNNOS sci vcs chance ni SERRE Ertur a deni ERED a Skea KE as 3 2 Basic Device Configuration serr eririsrerrerieri dt cence EEEE KESA 3 3 Configuring Device Settings nunnan nurane aare 3 4 Configuring WLAN Security Settings 00 0c ee 3 9 Testing COMMER 6cd a noe ieceuraee didean AEL TERRASS 3 11 Where to Go from Here 0 ccc nee eens 3 12 Chapter 4 System Configuration Configuring System SeMS pi an ceva da peed ok ieee eae dee ers aed oe eae 4 2 Conmigurng Data ADCOSS sb ncaeirsecawhenarehorareeudwaragreeoneediles 4 5 Managing Certificate Authority CA Certificates o anaana anaana 4 8 mp ringa CA Cernea aeeie se cuiedsud iui tnr iria Eana 4 8 Creating Self Certificates o 520c ceehaedeegansendeatewadeeaendenda 4 9 Configuring SNMP Settings 0 0 00 ccc cece eee eee eee es 4 11 Configuring SNMP Access Control nsss risrisrisesrrorirrerissrraa 4 17 vi AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Fis SMEAR ARG ss ii ontd dow E E teen eng 4 19 Configuring Specific SNMP Trap c ciscerescreensercradreseen ee ens 4 22 Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds 0 0000 ee eeu 4 24 Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP n on anaana 0 0 c cece eee eee 4 26 Logoing Configuration os cac abe c each ae it dirak A ANE
115. F band option is permissible in a single radio model If using a dual radio model enable either 802 114 5 GHz or 802 11b g 2 4 GHz from the RF band of operation field WLAN expecting the radio to be operating when you have forgotten it A CAUTION If a radio is disabled be careful not to accidentally configure a new was disabled 5 38 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 3 Click Apply to save any changes to the Radio Configuration screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost 4 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Radio Configuration screen to the last saved configuration 5 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed Once the target radio has been enabled from the Radio Configuration screen configure the radio s properties by selecting it from the AP 5131 menu tree For more information see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 5 3 2 1 Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio Configure an 802 1 1a or 802 11b g radio by selecting the radio s name as defined using the 802 11a or 802 11b g radio configuration screen described below as a sub menu item under the Radio Configuration menu item Use the radio configuration screen to set the radio s placement p
116. H provides authentication proving the packet sender really is the sender and the data really is the data sent AH can be used in transport mode providing security between two end points Also AH can be used in tunnel mode providing security like that of a Virtual Private Network VPN ESP Encapsulating Security Protocol is one of two key components of IP Security Protocol IPsec The other key component is Authentication Header AH ESP encrypts the packets and provides authentication services ESP can be used in transport mode providing security between two end points ESP can also be used in tunnel mode providing security like that of a Virtual Private Network VPN GRE General Routing Encapsulation supports VPNs across the Internet GRE is a mechanism for encapsulating network layer protocols over any other network layer protocol Such encapsulation allows routing of IP packets between private IP networks across an Internet using globally assigned IP addresses 6 10 2 Configuring Advanced LAN Access Use the Advanced LAN Access screen to configure complex access rules and filtering based on source port destination port and transport protocol To enable advanced subnet access the subnet Configuring Access Point Security 6 31 access rules must be overridden However the Advanced LAN Access screen allows you to import existing subnet access rules into the advanced subnet access rules To configure AP 5131 advanced LAN access
117. I string to the same hexadecimal number Non Symbol clients and devices need to enter WEP keys manually as hexadecimal numbers The AP 5131 and its target client s must use the same pass key to interoperate Getting Started 3 11 Keys 1 4 Use the Key 1 4 fields to specify key numbers The key can be either a hexidecimal or ASCII depending on which option is selected from the drop down menu For WEP 64 40 bit key the keys are 10 hexadecimal characters in length or 5 ASCII characters For WEP 128 104 bit key the keys are 26 hexadecimal characters in length or 13 ASCII characters Select one of these keys for activation by clicking its radio button The AP 5131 and its target client s must use the same key to interoperate 5 Click the Apply button to save the security policy and return to the AP 5131 Quick Setup screen At this point you can test the AP 5131 for MU interoperability 3 3 2 Testing Connectivity Verify the AP 5131 s link with an MU by sending Wireless Network Management Protocol WNMP ping packets to the associated MU Use the Echo Test screen to specify a target MU and configure the parameters of the test The WNMP ping test only works with Symbol MUs Only use a Symbol MU to test AP 5131 connectivity using WNMP To ping a specific MU to assess its connection with an AP 5131 NOTE Before testing for connectivity the target MU needs to be set to the same ESSID as the AP 5131 Since WEP 128 has been configured for
118. Known AP BB ast 30 seconds I last hour x Help Logout System Name AP 5131 a 2 Refer to the Information field to view the AP 5131 802 11a or 802 11b g radio s MAC address placement and transmission information HW Address The Media Access Control MAC address of the AP 5131 housing the 802 11a radio The MAC address is set at the factory and can be found on the bottom of the AP Radio Type Displays the radio type either 802 114 or 802 11b g Power The power level in milliwatts mW for RF signal strength To change the power setting for the radio see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Adopted by Lists the AP 5131 WLANs adopted by the 802 114 or 802 11b g radio Placement Current Channel Num Associated MUs Monitoring Statistics 7 17 Lists whether the AP 5131 radio is indoors or outdoors To change the placement setting see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Indicates the channel for communications between the AP 5131 radio and its associated MUs To change the channel setting see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Lists the number of mobile units MUs currently associated with the AP 5131 802 114 or 802 11b g radio Refer to the Traffic field to view performance and throughput information for the target AP 5131 802 114 or 802 11b g radio Pkts per second Throughput Avg Bit Speed Approximate RF Utilization Non unicast pk
119. N must be disabled Upload and Apply A Configuration File Download Configuration File System Configuration 4 33 Click the Upload and Apply A Configuration File button to upload a configuration file to this AP 5131 using HTTP Click the Download Configuration File button to download this AP 5131 s configuration file using HTTP Refer to the Status field to assess the completion of the import export operation Status After executing an operation by clicking any of the buttons in the window check the Status field for a progress indicator and messages about the success or errors in executing the Import Export operation Possible status messages include ambiguous input before marker line lt number gt unknown input before marker line lt number gt ignored input after marker line lt number gt additional input required after marker line lt number gt invalid input length line lt number gt error reading input line lt number gt mport file from incompatible hardware type line lt number gt 0 Import operation done 1 Export operation done 2 Import operation failed 3 Export operation failed 4 File transfer in progress 5 File transfer failed 6 File transfer done Auto cfg update Error in applying config Auto cfg update Error in getting config file Auto cfg update Aborting due to fw update failure The lt number gt value appearing at the end of some messages relates to the line of
120. N s network bandwidth priority levels Use the Bandwidth Management screen to control the network bandwidth allotted to WLANs Symbol recommends defining a weighed scheme as needed when WLAN traffic supporting a specific network segment becomes critical 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Bandwidth Management from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 p RR Petwo Corigurstosi Bandwidth Management A Dinah Share Mode Dandedn Dhare fer Lach YAAN WAM Mame Weight Weegtt Q05 Poty Adverts ed LAN clo Feot Lovty 76 08 Cea tat Floor Marketeg 7509 wres 2nd Froor Sates 26 08 Ootautt si fio 75 00 Pron L O oran peeo Js Floor HR 25 09 ores 2 Use the Bandwidth Share Mode drop down menu to define the order enabled WLANs receive AP 5131 services Select one of the following three options 5 46 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide First In First Out WLANs receive services from the AP 5131 on a first come first served basis This is the default setting Round Robin Each WLAN receives AP 5131 services in turn as long the AP 5131 has data traffic to forward Weighted Round If selected a weighting prioritization scheme configured within Robin the OoS Configuration screen is used to define which WLANs receive AP 5131 resources first 3 Configure the Bandwidth Share for Each WLAN field to set a raw weight for WLANs using the Weighted Round Robin option for each WLAN The weight changes as the we
121. OUN CORES c acucednecdariawiecncepaads 4 3 A 15 CUSOMENSUDDON 42 iccsducaserediseaeniweas viii B 1 D data access configuring 2 4 5 data decryption 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 1 7 data encryption n usann nunnan cece eee eee 1 5 data SECU eae ae eE 1 5 Desk Mounting 0 0 c cece eee eee 2 11 device firmware rere ETEEN 4 34 AVE SEMIS cocked rarr ridib niner k ttis 3 4 DACP SUPPO ac riisci datae paweedes ENEE 1 13 DHCP advanced settingS i cecensceeras ceees 5 10 direct sequence spread spectrum oe caved 1 20 document conventions 0 5 1 vii dual radio sku nnana eee eee 1 3 E EAP authentication 20 0020005 1 6 electrical characteristics A 2 VANE Ogm coe ald Ae eee eae 1 12 F HEWA cringed heanks laesereeeensaaneee bearee 1 8 firewall security Secon wade poe eats 1 8 firewall configuring 0 00e0e eee 6 25 firmware i Ave dinbenbbad taia E rA 1 10 NOU WHOUDGIE ccccecncaredopareoneeun ated 4 34 firmware updates were a eer aS 4 34 H hardware installation 0 05 2 1 l importing certificates 0 0 cece eee 4 8 importing exporting configurations 4 30 installation ceiling cc cee eee eee 2 17 installation ceiling T Bar 00 2 15 installation desk mounting
122. P 5131 table For each channel the MU tests for Clear Channel Assessment CCA The MU broadcasts a probe with the ESSID and broadcast BSS_ID when the channel is transmission free It sends an ACK to a directed probe response from the AP 5131 and updates the table An MU can roam within a coverage area by switching AP 5131s Roaming occurs when e Unassociated MU attempts to associate or reassociate with an available AP 5131 1 21 1 22 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Supported rate changes or the MU finds a better transmit rate with another AP 5131 RSSI received signal strength indicator of a potential AP 5131 exceeds the current AP 5131 Ratio of good transmitted packets to attempted transmitted packets falls below a threshold An MU selects the best available AP 5131 and adjusts itself to the AP 5131 direct sequence channel to begin association Once associated the AP 5131 begins forwarding frames addressed to the target MU Each frame contains fields for the current direct sequence channel The MU uses these fields to resynchronize to the AP 5131 The scanning and association process continues for active MUs This process allows the MUs to find new AP 5131 s and discard out of range or deactivated AP 5131 s By testing the airwaves the MUs can choose the best network connection available 1 2 7 Operating Modes The AP 5131 can operate in a couple of configurations Access Point As an Access Point the AP 5131 fun
123. P IP suite of protocols the foundation protocols for the Internet The HTTP protocol uses TCP port 80 e TELNET TELNET is the terminal emulation protocol of TCP IP TELNET uses TCP to achieve a virtual connection between server and client then negotiates options on both sides of the connection TELNET uses TCP port 23 e FTP File Transfer Protocol FTP is an application protocol using the Internet s TCP IP protocols FTP provides an efficient way to exchange files between computers on the Internet FTP uses TCP port 21 e SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a TCP IP protocol for sending and receiving email Due to its limited ability to queue messages at the receiving end SMTP is often used with POP3 or IMAP SMTP sends the email and POP3 or IMAP receives the email SMTP uses TCP port 25 e POP Post Office Protocol is a TCP IP protocol intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a maildrop ona server host A workstation uses POP3 to retrieve email that the server is holding for it e DNS Domain Name Service protocol searches for resources using a database distributed among different name servers Click Apply to save any changes to the LAN to WAN Access screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the LAN to WAN Access screen to th
124. P Servers screen to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 6 Logging Configuration The AP 5131 provides the capability for periodically logging system events that prove useful in assessing the throughput and performance of the AP 5131 or troubleshooting problems on the AP 5131 managed Local Area Network LAN Use the Logging Configuration screen to set the desired logging level standard syslog levels and view or save the current AP 5131 system log To configure event logging for the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt Logging Configuration from the AP 5131 menu tree System Configuration 4 29 AP 5131 pier Logging Configuration gt os Leg Optoes O by 3 Fag AP 4 vew Log ty pase Legging Levei t r om at H SNMP Trap r Eeste logging 2 a externa g server iay Gvsicg Gerner IP asesi r Losong Cosfigeraten L Contig impertexpor LAr A T Sistas amp System ame AP S131 2 Configure the Log Options field to save event logs set the log level and optionally port the AP 5131 s log to an external server View Log Click View to save a log of events retained on the AP 5131 The system displays a prompt requesting the administrator password before saving the log After the password has been entered click Get File to display a dialogue with buttons to Open or Save
125. PoE PPPoE PPPoE PPPoE or nA UF WD Mode User Name Password keepalive mode Idle Time Authentication Type admin network wan gt enable disable 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 disable disable disable disable disable disable disable enable JohnDoe KkkKKKKK enable 600 chap O O e O For an overview of the AP 5131 WAN configuration options available using the applet GUI see Configuring WAN Settings on page Jta 8 36 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan gt set Description Defines the configuration of the AP 5131 WAN port Syntax set wan dhcp ipadr mask dgw dns pppoe Example enable disable enable disable Enables or disables the AP 5131 WAN port Enables or disables WAN DHCP Client mode lt indx gt lt a b c d gt Sets up to 8 using lt indx gt from 1 to 8 IP addresses lt a b c d gt for the AP 5131 WAN interface lt a b c d gt Sets the subnet mask for the AP 5131 WAN interface lt a b c d gt Sets the default gateway IP address to lt a b c d gt lt indx gt lt a b c d gt Sets the IP address of one or two DNS servers where lt indx gt indicates either the primary 1 or secondary 2 server and lt a b c d gt is the IP address of the server mode enable disable Enables or disables PPPoE admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network
126. Product Reference Guide 6 9 Configuring WPA2 CCMP 802 11i WPAZ is a newer 802 11i standard that provides even stronger wireless security than Wi Fi Protected Access WPA and WEP CCMP is the security standard used by the Advanced Encryption Standard AES AES serves the same function TKIP does for WPA TKIP CCMP computes a Message Integrity Check MIC using the proven Cipher Block Chaining CBC technique Changing just one bit in a message produces a totally different result WPA2 CCMP is based on the concept of a Robust Security Network RSN which defines a hierarchy of keys with a limited lifetime similar to TKIP Like TKIP the keys the administrator provides are used to derive other keys Messages are encrypted using a 128 bit secret key and a 128 bit block of data The end result is an encryption scheme as secure as any the AP 5131 provides To configure WPA2 CCMP on the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu tree If security policies supporting WPA2 CCMP exist they appear within the Security Configuration screen These existing policies can be used as is or their properties edited by clicking the Edit button To configure a new security policy supporting WPA2 CCMP continue to step 2 2 Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting WPA2 CCMP The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encryption options selected 3 Select the WP
127. Radio Type Channel Setting Channel Antenna Diversity Power Level Basic Rates Supported Rates Beacon Interval DTIM Interval RTS Threshold indoor 00A0F8715920 802 1la user selection 1 full 5 dbm 4 mW 1 2 5 5 11 1 2 5 5 11 100 10 2341 Command Line Interface Reference 8 87 8 88 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide admin network wireless radio 802 1la gt show gos Access Category CWMin CWMax AIFSN TXOPs Background 15 1023 7 0 Best Effort 15 63 3 31 Video 7 15 1 94 Voice 3 7 1 47 For information on configuring Radio 2 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11a gt set Description Defines specific 802 11a radio parameters Syntax set placement ch mode channel antenna power rates beacon dtim rts qos Example admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless Defines the AP 5131 radio placement as indoors or outdoors Determines how the radio channel is selected Defines the actual channel used by the radio Sets the radio
128. Syntax add lt type gt Adds entered Ethernet Type to list of data types either allowed or denied AP 5131 processing permissions Example admin network lan type filter gt admin network wireless type filter gt add 2 8137 admin network wireless type filter gt add 3 0806 admin network wireless type filter gt add 4 0800 admin network wireless type filter gt add 5 8782 admin network wireless type filter gt show Ethernet Type Filter mode allow index ethernet type 1 8137 2 0806 3 0800 4 8782 For information on configuring the AP 5131 s type filter settings using the applet GUI see Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5 11 Command Line Interface Reference 8 33 AP5131 gt admin network lan type filter gt delete Description Removes an Ethernet Type Filter entry individually or the entire Type Filter list Syntax delete lt index gt Deletes the specified Ethernet Type index entry 1 through 16 all Deletes all Ethernet Type entries currently in list Example admin network lan type filter gt delete 1 admin network lan type filter gt show Ethernet Type Filter mode allow index ethernet type 0806 0800 3 8782 admin network lan type filter gt delete all admin network lan type filter gt show Ethernet Type Filter mode allow For information on configuring the AP 5131 s type filter settings using the applet GUI see Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5
129. Use the Config Import Export screen to configure an import or export operation for AP 5131 configuration settings NOTE Use the System Settings screen as necessary to restore an AP 5131 default configuration For more information on restoring configurations see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 To create an importable exportable AP 5131 configuration file 1 Select System Configuration gt Config Import Export from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol Te m RE pemon Contgurationy Config importfExport gt tarr tif jutater a TE f gt Ourck Seh FTP and TFTP inpovExport rene 9 r tvare R ars G ertticate morr FTPITFTP Server P Address tig er E pepati spon ah Laas ort Me NMP RI Tras Theeetod Urenare HO NTP Save Pasteord f 203 Corfu arer H Corto mponfsot oer Caraguns e rabeen L Firmware Lindate al HTTP impernErpon t tya ad 1 8 Glates ange System ama APS 31 2 Configure the FTP and TFTP Import Export field to import export configuration settings 4 32 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Filename Specify the name of the configuration file to be written to the FIP or TFIP server Server IP Enter the numerical non DNS name IP address of the destination FIP or TFTP server where the configuration file is imported or exported Filepath optional Defines the optional path name used to import export the target configuration file FIP Select the FTP radio button if usi
130. WPA2 CCMP Select the WPA2 CCIVIP 802 11 button to display the WPA2 802 111 CCMP Settings field within the New Security Policy screen For detailed information on configuring WPA2 CCMP see Configuring WPA2 CCMP 802 111 on page 6 22 6 Click Apply to keep changes made within the New Security Policy screen if any Configure encryption or authentication supported security policies by referring to the following AP 5131_authentication e To create a security policy supporting Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos Authentication on page 6 9 e To define a security policy supporting 802 1x EAP see Configuring 802 1x EAP Authentication on page 6 11 AP 5131_encryption e To create a security policy supporting WEP see Configuring WEP Encryption on page 6 15 e To define a security policy supporting KeyGuard see Configuring KeyGuard Encryption on page 6 17 e Toconfigure a security policy supporting WPA TKIP see Configuring WPA Using TKIP on page 6 19 e To create a security policy supporting WPA2 CCMP see Configuring WPA2 CCMP 802 111 on page 6 22 Configuring Access Point Security 6 9 7 Click Cancel to return to the target WLAN screen without keeping any of the changes made within the New Security Policy screen 6 4 Configuring Kerberos Authentication Kerberos designed and developed by MIT provides strong authentication for client server applications using secret key cryptography Using Kerberos a client must prove its
131. abieeatRareesinedeehesaerns 1 16 MAC Layer DICONO ict sourced be dopaele a nani pemeebetermenacs 1 19 AE EAE e ohis4 cede pdr Onesie get eae de cree Mek bie awe ae creda 1 20 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum 0 cee eee ee 1 20 MU PSSOC AON FOCO S oi koa eke redrioeneedeedernehemneenkenes 1 21 GSA MUMMIES 25 occcrordorddasee de gagedasiecdosedeeiacances 1 22 Management Access Options o n annuun aaaeeeaa eeraa 1 23 Available Product Configurations cscs scree acgacvacuesaerazeceeenes 2 2 ROCUIMICN TS a siecrbbeiuodudas raa R aapa rana 2 4 PIECE Ger lin dk puddin ee Reda den ee PRA LEDER aE ERS 2 4 Sty SURES 65th haar EE ade eee E 2 5 Aen NOM on caccrasnaheasoduorcesueoeeeeuadedeoasadabsa 2 5 Power QPUONS 4 0 esoedasthveas Goddeqeaneeasiaedaaadsedsdidadendeeee 2 7 Symbol Power Injector System 0 oneness 2 7 Installing the Power Injector 0 0 0 ccc cece ees 2 9 Preparing for Site Installation 0 0 cece cee eee 2 9 Cabling the Power Injector n 2 0 0 cece eee eee 2 9 Power Injector LED Indicators 0 200000 00055 2 10 Pouring the APB ccc iercceceiasdosnaretaseeeanenedoeseuneiuese 2 11 Desk Mounted Installations 0 2 00200 c eee eee 2 11 Wall Mounted Installations 0 0 00 c cece eee eee 2 13 Suspended Ceiling T Bar Installations 0 00 00 cece 2 15 Above the Ceiling Plenum Installations 0 0 00 00 00 0c en 2 17 L
132. ack represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour 7 18 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 4 Refer to the RF Status field to view the following MU signal noise and performance information for the target AP 5131 802 11a or 802 11b g radio 7 Avg MU Signal Avg MU Noise Avg MU SNR Displays the average RF signal strength in dBm for all MUs associated with the radio The number in black represents the average signal for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents the average signal for the last hour If the signal is low consider mapping the MU to a different WLAN if a better functional grouping of MUs can be determined Displays the average RF noise for all MUs associated with the AP 5131 radio The number in black represents MU noise for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents MU noise for the last hour If MU noise is excessive consider moving the MU closer to the AP 5131 or in area with less conflicting network traffic Displays the average Signal to Noise Ratio SNA for all MUs associated with the AP 5131 radio The Signal to Noise Ratio is an indication of overall RF performance on your wireless network Refer to the Errors field to reference retry information as well as data transmissions the target AP 5131 802 11a or 802 11 b g radio either gave up on could not decrypt Avg Num of Retries Dropped Packets of Undecryptable
133. adcasts to a shorter interval at least 30 seconds for tighter security on the WLAN s wireless connections Set key broadcasts to a longer interval to extend the key times for wireless connections Default is 86 400 seconds 6 24 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide ASCII Passphrase 256 bit Key To use an ASCII passphrase and not a hexadecimal value select the checkbox enter an alphanumeric string of 8 to 63 characters The string allows character spaces The AP 5131 converts the string to a numeric value This passphrase saves the administrator from entering the 256 bit key each time keys are generated To use a hexadecimal value and not an ASCII passphrase select the checkbox and enter 16 hexadecimal characters into each of the four fields displayed Default hexadecimal 256 bit keys for WP2A CCMP include 1011121314151617 18191A1B1C1D1E1F 2021222324252627 28292A2B2C2D2E2F 7 Configure the WPA2 CCIVIP Mixed Mode field as needed to allow TKIP and WPA2 client interoperation Allow WPA TKIP clients WPA2 CCMP Mixed Mode enables WPA2 CCMP and WPA TKIP clients to operate together on the network Enabling this option allows backwards compatibility for clients that support WPA TKIP but do not support WPA2 CCMP Symbol recommends enabling this feature if WPA TKIP supported MUs operate within a WLAN populated by WPA2 CCMP enabled clients 8 Configure the Fast Roaming 802 1x only field as required to enable add
134. address range assigned to the DHCP server Click the Advanced DHCP Server button to display a screen used for generating a list of static MAC to IP address mappings for reserved clients For more information see Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5 10 The network assigned numerical non DNS name IP address of the AP 5131 Network Mask Default Gateway Domain Name Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server WINS Server Network Management 5 5 The first two sets of numbers specify the network domain the next set specifies the subset of hosts within a larger network These values help divide a network into subnetworks and simplify routing and data transmission The subnet mask defines the size of the subnet The Default Gateway parameter defines the numerical non DNS name IP address of a router the AP 5131 uses on the Ethernet as its default gateway Enter the name assigned to the primary DNS server Enter the Primary DNS numerical non DNS name IP address Symbol recommends entering the numerical IP address of an additional DNS server if available used if the primary DNS server goes down A maximum of two DNS servers can be used Enter the numerical non DNS name IP address of the WINS server WINS is a Microsoft NetBIOS name server Using a WINS server eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations 4 Click Apply to save
135. adio statistics siento URNE ENIA Seance 7 14 restore default configuration 4 4 rogue AP detection ccc eee ee eae 6 51 rogue AP detection allowed APs 6 54 rogue AP detall 2c02 lt c2ec0 pda dee ee yee eedae 6 57 S Some WPA att ae eed re eiir ian 6 19 SOUND AARE E E NE ATA AE TT 1 6 decryption EKSENA EGETI eee 1 7 security content filtering 0 00 00 6 48 security firewall EEEE TTET EET 6 25 SPOUT KEGU crschacriw rs peresati Es E ese 6 17 security rogue AP detection EERROR 6 51 SOCUUNG VIN eedit aeea 6 33 security WLAN lt cc icarssiciansiisisossciseans 3 9 security WPA2 CCMP 0 5 6 22 self certifi ateS ejsepie dation deadeaadasdebeded 4 9 sendal MINOR ce datie EER 4 4 service information n nnna anuni naran viii setting up MUs PERIT ET MENPERIN speaks 2 22 SINGIO SEY g caonsenadicedasiegais ERETTE T 1 2 site SUrVeyS nnou o annann ee eee shen ih 2 5 SAMP eisses sasadan sesaka 1 10 SNMP Access MPE a T Meeri 4 14 SNMP access control E EEEE 4 17 SNMP settings no oceerrrecsroercsocronsieisa 4 11 SNMP VIZ cick tees erees deed weeweraneend 4 15 SNMP v1 v2 v3 trap support 1 10 NMPI te eek e tt ua eee ede et 4 15 SNMP access control 0 0200005 4 17 SNMP RF trap thresholds 4 24 SNMP specific traps a reas
136. adio Histogram screen is available for each AP 5131 radio regardless of single or dual radio model AP 5131 symbol BE ereak Contgeranony Radio2 902 11a Retry Histogram y L Revy rertagrarr Radoljt0 11a Gtates L Ryty sartogam g m v Kniemen ay Gestern Marne aP 5131 The table s first column shows 0 under Retries The value under the Packets column directly to the right shows the number of packets transmitted by this AP 5131 radio that required 0 retries delivered on the first attempt As you go down the table you can see the number of packets requiring 1 retry 2 retries etc Use this information to assess whether an abundance of retries warrants reconfiguring the AP 5131 radio to achieve better performance 7 20 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 2 Click Apply to save any changes to the Radio Histogram screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in changes to the screens being lost 3 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made to the screen Undo Changes reverts the settings to the last saved configuration 4 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 7 5 Viewing MU Statistics Summary Use the MU Stats Summary screen to display overview statistics for mobile units MUs associated with the AP 5131 The MU List field displays basic inform
137. admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network wan gt wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set wan gt set dhcp disable ipadr 157 169 22 5 dgw 157 169 22 1 dns 1 157 169 22 2 mask 255 255 255 000 pppoe mode enable pppoe type chap pppoe user JohnDoe pppoe passwd goodpassword pppoe ka enable pppoe idle 600 For an overview of the AP 5131 WAN configuration options available using the applet GUI see Configuring WAN Settings on page Command Line Interface Reference 8 37 8 3 2 1 Network WAN NAT Commands AP5131 gt admin network wan nat gt Description Displays the NAT submenu The items available under this command are shown below show Displays the AP 5131 s current NAT parameters for the specified index set Defines the AP 5131 NAT settings add Adds NAT entries delete Deletes NAT entries list Lists NAT entries 5 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI For an overview of the AP 5131 NAT configuration options available using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings on page 5 18 8 38 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan nat gt show Description Displays AP 5131 NAT parameters Syntax show lt idx gt Displays
138. age 7 24 AP5131 gt admin stats ping gt list Description Lists ping test parameters and results Syntax list Lists ping test parameters and results Example admin stats ping gt list Station Address 00A0F8213434 Number of Pings 10 Packet Length 10 Packet Data in HEX 55 Number of AP Responses 2 admin stats ping gt For information on Known AP tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 Command Line Interface Reference 8 185 8 186 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin stats ping gt set Description Defines the parameters of the ping test Syntax set station request length data Example admin stats admin stats admin stats admin stats admin stats Defines the AP target MAC address Sets number of ping packets to transmit 1 539 Determines ping packet length in bytes 1 539 Defines the particular packet data ping gt set ping gt set ping gt set ping gt set ping gt station OOAOF843AABB request 10 length 100 data 1 For information on Known AP tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 Command Line Interface Reference 8 187 AP5131 gt admin stats echo gt start Description Initiates the ping test Syntax start Initiates the ping test Example admin stats ping gt start admin stats ping gt list Station Address OOAOF843AABB Number of
139. al 15 minutes For information on configuring NTP using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP on page 4 26 8 154 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system ntp gt set Description Sets NTP parameters for AP 5131 clock synchronization Syntax set mode lt ntp mode gt Enables or disables NTP server lt idx gt lt ip gt Sets the NTP sever IP address port lt idx gt lt port gt Defines the port number intrvl lt period gt Defines the clock synchronization interval used between the AP 5131 and the NTP server in minutes 15 65535 Example admin system ntp gt set mode enable admin system ntp gt set server 203 21 37 18 admin system ntp gt set port 1 123 admin system ntp gt set intrvl 15 For information on configuring NTP using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP on page 4 26 Command Line Interface Reference 8 155 8 4 6 System Log Commands AP5131 gt admin system gt logs Description Displays the AP 5131 log submenu Logging options include Syntax show Shows logging options set Sets log options and parameters view Views system log delete Deletes the system log send Sends log to the designated FIP Server i Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 156 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system logs gt show Des
140. al Authentication password lt pass1 gt 8 to 31 chars The following parameters must be specified if lt sec gt is set to auth priv Privacy algorithm set to des or aes Privacy password lt pass2 gt 8 to 31 chars For information on configuring SNMP access settings using the applet GUI see Configuring SNMP Access Control on page 4 17 8 144 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system snmp access gt delete Description Deletes SNMP access entries for specific v1v2 and v3 user definitions Syntax delete acl lt idx gt Deletes entry lt idx gt from the access control list all Deletes all entries from the access control list viv2c lt idx gt Deletes entry lt idx gt from the v1 v2 configuration list all Deletes all entries from the v1 v2 configuration list v3 lt idx gt Deletes entry lt idx gt from the v3 user definition list all Deletes all entries from the v3 user definition list Example admin system snmp access gt list acl index start ip end ip 1 209 236 24 1 209 236 24 46 admin system snmp access gt delete acl all admin system snmp access gt list acl index start ip end ip For information on configuring SNMP access settings using the applet GUI see Configuring SNMP Access Control on page 4 17 AP5131 gt admin system snmp access gt list Description Lists SNMP access entries Command Line Interface Reference 8 145 Syntax list acl Lists SNMP access con
141. al Security Gateway 209 239 160 55 AH Algorithm None Encryption Type ESP Encryption Algorithm DES ESP Inbound SPI 0x00000100 ESP Outbound SPI 0x00000100 For information on displaying VPN information using the applet GUI see Viewing VPN Status on page 6 46 Command Line Interface Reference 8 49 AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt reset Description Resets all of the AP 5131 s VPN tunnels Syntax reset Resets all VPN tunnels Example admin network wan vpn gt reset VPN tunnels reset admin network wan vpn gt For information on configuring VPN using the applet GUI see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 8 50 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt stats Description Lists statistics for all active tunnels Syntax stats Display statistics for all VPN tunnels Example admin network wan vpn gt stats Eng2EngAnnex Not Active SJSharkey Not Active For information on displaying VPN information using the applet GUI see Viewing VPN Status on page 6 46 Command Line Interface Reference 8 51 AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt ikestate Description Displays statistics for all active tunnels using Internet Key Exchange IKE Syntax ikestate Displays status about Internet Key Exchange IKE for all tunnels In particular the table indicates whether IKE is connected for any of the tunnels it provides the destination IP address and
142. algorithm with 192 bit 48 character hexadecimal keys e AES 256 bit Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 256 bit 64 character hexadecimal keys e Inbound ESP Encryption Key Enter a key for inbound traffic The length of the key is determined by the selected encryption algorithm The key must match the outbound key at the remote gateway Define a key for outbound traffic The length of the key is determined by the selected encryption algorithm The key must match the inbound key at the remote gateway Select the authentication algorithm to use with ESP This option is available only when ESP with Authentication was selected for the ESP type Options include e MbDb5 Enables the Message Digest 5 algorithm which requires 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e SHA1 Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1 which requires 160 bit 40 character hexadecimal keys Define a key for computing the integrity check on the inbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm The key must be 32 40 hexadecimal 0 9 A E characters in length The key must match the corresponding outbound key on the remote security gateway Enter a key for computing the integrity check on outbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm The key must be 32 40 hexadecimal 0 9 A E characters in length The key must match the corresponding inbound key on the remote security gateway 6 40 AP 5131 Access Point Product Referenc
143. always recommended before updating device firmware If this function is disabled the firmware update is required to be done manually If this option is enabled the AP 5131 initiates an update any time the AP 5131 reboots If the files located on the DHCP server are different from the existing files on the AP 5131 the files are updated The default setting is enabled on the AP 5131 WAN port Select this checkbox to allow an automatic configuration file update each time the configuration file versions are found to be different between the AP 5131 and the selected LAN or WAN interface If this function is disabled the configuration file update is required to be done manually If this function is disabled the firmware update is required to be done manually If this option is enabled the AP 5131 initiates an update any time the AP 5131 reboots If the files located on the DHCP server are different from the existing files on the AP 5131 the files are updated The default setting is enabled on the AP 5131 WAN port System Configuration 4 37 Interface Use the Interface drop down menu to select the WAN or LAN interface to be monitored by the AP 5131 for version updates if the Enable Automatic Firmware Update and or Enable Automatic Configuration Update checkboxes are selected Configure the Update Firmware field as required to set a filename and target firmware file upload location for manual firmware updates Specify the name of the target fir
144. ame shared secret Apply the qualifications of a well chosen password to the generation of a shared secret Generate a random case sensitive string using letters numbers and symbols The default is symbol Update the Administrator Access field to change the administrative password used to access the AP 5131 configuration settings Change Admin Click the Change Admin Password button to display a screen Password for updating the AP administrator password Enter and confirm a new administrator password as required Click Apply to save any changes to the AP 5131 Access screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the AP 5131 Access screen to the last saved configuration Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 4 3 Managing Certificate Authority CA Certificates Certificate management includes the following sections e Importing a CA Certificate e Creating Self Certificates 4 3 1 Importing a CA Certificate A certificate authority CA is a network authority that issues and manages security credentials and public keys for message encryption The CA signs all digital certificates that it issues with its own pr
145. amo Subert Spry Grete Name AP 51 J1 2 Copy the content of the CA Certificate message using a text editor such as notepad and then click on Paste from Clipboard The content of the certificate displays in the Import a root CA Certificate field 3 Click the Import root CA Certificate button to import it into the CA Certificate list 4 Once in the list select the certificate ID within the View Imported root CA Certificates field to view the certificate issuer name subject and certificate expiration data 5 To delete a certificate select the Id from the drop down menu and click the Del button 4 3 2 Creating Self Certificates The AP 5131 requires two kinds of certificates for accessing the VPN CA certificates and self certificates Self certificates are certificate requests you create send to a Certificate Authority CA to be signed then import the signed certificate into the management system To create a self certificate 1 Select System Configuration gt Certificate Mgmt gt Self Certificates from the AP 5131 menu tree 4 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP 5131 Self Certificates Jererate CSR and import Signed Cerite ates AO Der View Signed Certif ates 0 stuer Name Setups Sanal Nemee ime Syetees Name AP 51 J1 2 Click on the Add button to create the certificate request The Certificate Request screen displays 3 Complete the request form with
146. an existing ACL entry Click Delete to remove a selected ACL entry for one or more SNMP users System Configuration 4 19 OK Click Ok to return to the SNMP Access screen Click Apply within the SNMP Access screen to save any changes made on the SNMP Access Control screen Cancel Click Cancel to undo any changes made on the SNMP Access Control screen This reverts all settings for this screen to the last saved configuration 4 4 2 Enabling SNMP Traps SNMP provides the ability to send traps to notify the administrator that trap conditions are met Traps are network packets containing data relating to network devices or SNMP agents that send the traps SNMP management applications can receive and interpret these packets and optionally can perform responsive actions SNMP trap generation is programmable on a trap by trap basis Use the SNIVIP Traps Configuration screen to enable traps and to configure appropriate settings for reporting this information Trap configuration depends on the network machine that receives the generated traps SNMP v1 v2c and v3 trap configurations function independently In a mixed SNMP environment generated traps can be sent using configurations for both SNMP v1 v2c and v3 To configure SNMP traps on the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt SNMP Access gt SNMP Trap Configuration from the AP 5131 menu tree 4 20 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide BE joer joy ooa O Sritem Ge
147. an vlan gt create Description Creates a VLAN for the AP 5131 Syntax create vlan id lt i gt Defines the VLAN ID 1 4095 vlan name lt name gt Specifies the name of the VLAN 1 31 characters in length Example admin network lan vlan gt admin network lan vlan gt create 5 VLAN 5 For information on creating VLANs using the applet GUI see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 Command Line Interface Reference 8 19 8 20 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan vlan gt edit Description Modifies a VLAN s name and ID Syntax edit name lt name gt Modifies an exisiting VLAN name 1 31 characters in length id lt dd gt Modifies an existing VLAN ID 1 4095 characters in length For information on editing VLANs using the applet GUI see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 Command Line Interface Reference 8 21 AP5131 gt admin network lan vlan gt delete Description Deletes a specific VLAN or all VLANs Syntax delete lt VLANid gt Deletes a specific VLAN ID 1 16 all Deletes all defined VLANs For information on deleting VLANs using the applet GUI see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 8 22 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan vlan gt mapping Description Maps an AP 5131 VLAN to a WLAN Syntax wlan lt wlan name gt lt vlan name gt Maps an AP 5131 WLAN to an exisiting VLAN name and maps an AP 5131 VLAN to a
148. antenna power Defines the radio antenna power transmit level Sets the supported radio transmit rates Sets the beacon interval used by the radio Defines the DTIM interval used by the radio Defines the RTS Threshold value for the radio Defines the cwmin cwmax aifsn and txops levels for the QoS policy used for the radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio 802 11a gt 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set 802 11a gt set Command Line Interface Reference 8 89 placement indoor ch mode user channel 1 antenna full power 4 rates beacon 100 dtim 10 rts qos qos qos qos 2341 cwmin cwmax aifsn txops 125 255 For information on configuring the Radio 2 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 8 90 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11a advanced gt Description Displays the advanced submenu for the 802 11a radio The items available under this command include Syntax show Displays advanced radio settings for the 802 1 1a radio set Defines advanced parameters for the 802 1 1a radio s Goes to the paren
149. appropriate IKE authentication mode Pre Shared Key PSK Specify an authenticating algorithm and passcode used during authentication RSA Certificates Select this option to use RSA certificates for authentication purposes See the CA Certificates and Self certificates screens to create and import certificates into the system Digital Signature Standard DSS Select DDS to use DSS certificates as the authentication mode IKE Authentication Algorithm IKE Authentication Passphrase IKE Encryption Algorithm Key Lifetime Configuring Access Point Security 6 45 IKE provides data authentication and anti replay services for the VPN tunnel Select an authentication methods from the drop down menu e MD5 Enables the Message Digest 5 algorithm requiring 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e SHA1 Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1 requiring 160 bit 40 character hexadecimal keys If you selected Pre Shared Key as the authentication mode you must provide a key If MD5 is the selected authentication algorithm provide a 32 character hexadecimal key If SHA1 is the selected algorithm provide a 40 character hexadecimal key Select the encryption and authentication algorithms for the VPN tunnel from the drop down menu e DES Uses the DES encryption algorithm requiring 64 bit 16 character hexadecimal keys e 3DES Enables the 3DES encryption algorithm requiring 192 bit 64 character hexadecimal keys e AES 128 bit Uses
150. aracters Re Type New Password 0 11 characters Cancel Help Enter the current password and a new admin password in fields provided and click Apply Once the admin password has been updated a warning message displays stating the AP 5131 must be set to a country NOTE Though the AP 5131 can have its basic settings defined using a number of different screens Symbol recommends using the AP 5131 Quick Setup screen to set the correct country of operation and define its minimum required configuration from one convenient location 3 3 1 Configuring Device Settings Configure a set of minimum required device settings within the AP 5131 Quick Setup screen The values defined within the Quick Setup screen are also configurable in numerous other locations within the AP 5131 menu tree When you change the settings in the Quick Setup screen the values also change within the screen where these parameters also exist Additionally if the values are updated in these other screens the values initially set within the Quick Setup screen will be updated To define a basic AP 5131 configuration 1 Select System Configuration gt Quick Setup from the AP 5131 menu tree if the Quick Setup screen is not already displayed Getting Started 3 5 AP 5131 symbol it n uy Contgeranen 1 AP5131 Quick Setup w a an ar Oyster Name Enable RF bond of epersten AP 5 3 System Seng Rato Contgersten Seite County United Stat
151. ard Encryption 0 00 cece eee eee e ees 1 7 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Using TKIP Encryption 1 7 WPA2 CCMP 802 11i Encryption 0 ese e eee 1 8 PW SACU ys cameras tie Sr heRee denies E EE N 1 8 PGE boc vee EEEE E E E E eee aeu ey 1 8 COTS PILCNNGS 64 cin deans eee eee nes pea E dees 1 9 MLPD SUDO 600 Add SaGudbeteebesieiedsusdndhd TTET 1 9 Multiple Management Accessibility Options 05 1 9 Updatable FIMWA E cc scccncreacsaceteseeseaseeecaaeeeauesedos 1 10 Programmable SNMP v1 v2 v3 Trap Support o oo anaana aana 1 10 Power over Ethernet Support 2 2 4 s 2 G4sekbetekdvidssekdedeess 1 10 MU MU Transmission Disallow o on nanana anaana 1 11 Voice Pronta i eeen hee pee ere ee dene a MEE 1 11 Support Tor GAM and PSP MUS ios is ack es xia eda daa cva been eeu 1 12 Dla MGI D ercer iriiria piri p ria 1 12 Transmit Power Control occ sk ccae kk oak ean akoa chap eaneteanecnawne 1 12 Advanced Event Logging Capability 00 0 ccc eee eee 1 12 Configuration File Import Export Functionality 05 1 13 Default Configuration Restoration 0 0 0 cece eee cee ee 1 13 DLP SUOHON Ms bo huduyeceeulodeue hares EEES 1 13 Mult Function LEDS 2sscsesacessacaadeandeesergsed rude nadenss 1 14 WEG OF UGCBNDIS ous dons dcansieidecereedesansnneorvenregaseanlaes 1 14 Cellular Coverage 6 cence tent n ne ntenees 1 15 NEEND IGRNGH 4 cihkeneatade sie
152. art Initiates scan immediately by the MU show Displays all APs located by the MU scan J Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 105 AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap mu scan gt start Description Initiates an MU scan from a user provided MAC address Syntax start lt mu mac gt Initiates MU scan from user provided MAC address For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 8 106 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap mu scan gt show Description Displays the results of an MU scan Syntax show Initiates MU scan from user provided MAC address For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 Command Line Interface Reference 8 107 AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap allowed list gt Description Displays the Rogue AP allowed list submenu show Displays the rogue AP allowed list add Adds an AP MAC address and ESSID to the allowed list delete Deletes an entry or all entries from the allowed list s Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 108 AP 5131 Acc
153. arted File transfer In progress File transfer Done Import operation Done For information on importing exporting AP 5131 configurations using the applet GUI see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 8 168 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 4 8 Firmware Update Commands AP5131 gt admin system gt fw update Description Displays the firmware update submenu The items available under this command are shown below show Displays the current AP 5131 firmware update settings set Defines the AP 5131 firmware update parameters update Executes the firmware update z Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the current configuration to the AP 5131 system flash quit Quits the CLI and exits the current session Command Line Interface Reference 8 169 AP5131 gt admin system fw update gt show Description Displays the current AP 5131 firmware update settings Syntax show Shows the current system firmware update settings for the AP 5131 Example admin system fw update gt show automatic firmware upgrade enable automatic config upgrade LAN firmware filename APFW bin firmware path tftpboot ftp tftp server ip address 168 197 2 2 ftp user name pkeegan ftp password z kkkkkkk For information on updating AP 5131 device firmware using the applet GUI see Updating Device Firmware on page 4 34 8 170 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Gu
154. ation Use the Access pull down list to specify read only R access or read write RW access for the community Read only access allows a remote device to retrieve AP 5131 information while read write access allows a remote device to modify AP 5131 settings Configure the SNMP v3 User Definitions field if SNMP v3 is used to add and configure SNMP v3 user definitions SNMP v3 user definitions allow read only or read write access to management information as appropriate Add Delete Username Security Level Click Add to create a new entry for an SNMP v3 user Select Delete to remove an entry for an SNMP v3 user Specify a username by typing an alphanumeric string of up to 31 characters Use the Security Level area to specify a security level of noAuth no authorization AuthNoPriv authorization without privacy or AuthPriv authorization with privacy The NoAuth setting specifies no login authorization or encryption for the user The AuthNoPriv setting requires login authorization but no encryption The AuthPriv setting requires login authorization and uses the Data Encryption Standard DES protocol 4 16 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide OID Passwords Access Use the OID Object Identifier area to specify a setting of All or enter a Custom OID Select All to assign the user access to all OIDs in the MIB The OID field uses numbers expressed in dot notation Select Passwords to display the
155. ation such as IP Address and total throughput for each associated MU The MU Stats screen is view only with no user configurable data fields However individual MUs can be selected from within the MU Stats Summary screen to either ping to assess interoperability or display authentication statistics To view AP 5131 overview statistics for all of the MUs associated to the AP 5131 1 Select Status and Statistics gt MU Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol vO mf L Ban MU Stats Summary WU Wet ee eo J Systern Name AP S837 Monitoring Statistics 7 21 2 Refer to the MU List field to reference associated MU address throughput and retry information IP Address Displays the IP address of each of the associated MU MAC Address Displays the MAC address of each of the associated MU WLAN Displays the WLAN name each MU is interoperating with Radio Displays the name of the 802 11a or 802 11b g radio each MU is associated with F put Displays the total throughput in Megabits per second Mbps for each associated MU ABS Displays the Average Bit Speed ABS in Megabits per second Mbps for each associated MU Retries Displays the average number of retries per packet A high number retries could indicate possible network or hardware problems 3 Click the Refresh button to update the data collections displayed without resetting the data collections to zero 4 Click the Echo Test b
156. available AP 5131 security options to protect the AP 5131 LAN from wireless vulnerabilities and safeguard the transmission of RF packets between the AP 5131 and its associated MUs WLAN security can be configured on an ESS by ESS basis on the AP 5131 Sixteen separate ESSIDs WLANs can be supported on an AP 5131 and must be managed if necessary between the 802 11a and 802 11b g radio The user has the capability of configuring separate security policies for each WLAN Each security policy can be configured based on the authentication Kerberos 802 1x EAP or encryption WEP KeyGuard WPA TKIP or WPA2 CCMP scheme best suited to the coverage area that security policy supports The AP 5131 can also create VPN tunnels to securely route traffic through a IPSEC tunnel and block transmissions with devices interpreted as Rogue AP s 6 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide NOTE Security for the AP 5131 can be configured in various locations throughout the AP 5131 menu structure This chapter outlines the security options available to the AP 5131 and the menu locations and steps required to configure specific security measures 6 1 Configuring Security Options To configure the data protection options available on the AP 5131 refer to the following To set an administrative password for secure AP 5131 logins see Setting Passwords on page 6 3 Refer to Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page 6 5 to displa
157. ax show radio Displays specific 802 11b g radio settings qos Displays specific 802 11b g radio WMM QoS settings Example admin network wireless radio radiol gt show radio Radio Setting Information Placement indoor MAC Address 00A0F8715920 Radio Type 802 11b g Channel Setting Channel Antenna Diversity Power Level 802 11b g mode Basic Rates Supported Rates Beacon Interval DTIM Interval short preamble RTS Threshold user selection 1 full 5 dbm 4 mW B Only 1 2 5 5 11 1 2 5 5 11 100 10 disable 2341 Command Line Interface Reference 8 81 admin network wireless radio radiol gt show qos Access Category CWMin CWMax AIFSN TXOPs Background 15 1023 7 0 Best Effort 15 63 3 31 Video 7 15 1 94 Voice 3 7 1 47 For information on configuring the Radio 1 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 8 82 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11bg gt set Description Defines specific 802 11b g radio parameters Syntax set placement ch mode channel antenna power bg mode rates beacon dtim preamble rts gos Exampl Defines the RTS Threshold value for the radio e admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin network admin
158. ay Enter an eight character hexadecimal value to identify the inbound security association created by the AH algorithm The value must match the corresponding outbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway Provide an eight character hexadecimal value to identify the outbound security association created by the AH algorithm The value must match the corresponding inbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway ESP provides packet encryption optional data authentication and anti replay services for the VPN tunnel Use the drop down menu to select the ESP type Options include e None Disables ESP The rest of the fields are not be active e ESP Enables ESP for the tunnel e ESP with Authentication Enables ESP with authentication ESP Encryption Algorithm Inbound ESP Encryption Key Outbound ESP Encryption Key ESP Authentication Algorithm Inbound ESP Authentication Key Outbound ESP Authentication Key Configuring Access Point Security 6 39 Select the encryption and authentication algorithms for the VPN tunnel using the drop down menu e DES Uses the DES encryption algorithm requiring 64 bit 16 character hexadecimal keys e 3DES Uses the 3DES encryption algorithm requiring 192 bit 64 character hexadecimal keys e AES 128 bit Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e AES 192 bit Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard
159. be taken not to damage the finished surface of the ceiling tile when creating the light pipe hole and installing the light pipe 7 8 Remove the light pipe s rubber stopper before installing the light pipe Connect the light pipe to the bottom of the AP 5131 Align the tabs and rotate approximately 90 degrees Do not over tighten Hardware Installation 2 19 oo T f Light Pipe ii _ Ceiling Tile Decal lt Badge 9 Snap the clips of the light pipe into the bottom of the AP 5131 10 Fit the light pipe into hole in the tile from its unfinished side 11 Place the decal on the back of the badge and slide the badge onto the light pipe from the finished side of the tile 12 Attach the radio antennae to their correct connectors antenna connectors On the Dual Radio AP 5131 a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for both Radio 1 2 4 GHz and Radio 2 5 2 GHz Two dots designate the secondary antenna for both Radio 1 and Radio 2 On Single Radio models a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for Radio 1 and two dots designate the secondary antenna for Radio 1 CAUTION Both the Dual and Single Radio model AP 5131s use RSMA type 13 Attach safety wire if used to the AP 5131 safety wire tie point or security cable if used to the AP 5131 s lock port 14 Align the ceiling tile into its f
160. beros must be on the same Management VLAN Additionally DHCP and BOOTP servers must be on the same Management VLAN as well Define a Native VLAN Tag A trunk port configured with 802 10 tagging can receive both tagged and untagged traffic By default the AP 5131 forwards untagged traffic with the native VLAN configured for the port The Native VLAN is VLAN 1 by default Symbol suggests leaving the Native VLAN set to 1 as other layer 2 devices also have their Native VLAN set to 1 Use the checkboxes under the name of each VLAN to map specific VLANs to AP 5131 WLANs listed on the left hand side of the screen Symbol recommends mapping VLANs strategically in order to keep VLANs tied to the discipline they most closely match For example If WLAN2 is comprised of MUs supporting the engineering area then WLAN2 should be mapped to the engineering VLAN if one has been created Select the Dynamic checkbox to configure the VLAN mapping as a dynamic VLAN Using Dynamic VLAN assignments a VMPS VLAN Management Policy Server dynamically assigns VLAN ports The AP 5131 uses a separate server as a VMPS server When a frame arrives on the AP 5131 it queries the VMPS for the VLAN assignment based on the source MAC address of the arriving frame If statically mapping VLANs leave the Dynamic checkbox specific to the target WLAN and its intended VLAN unselected The administrator is then required to configure VLAN memberships manually The
161. bousd GPI Hex 10 UOP Tee cor iy ESP Escngton Aigontom AES 256 00 gt Geter GA Hexadecimal characters teboued EIP Leareptian bey FPOFSESEAFEESIEIESETEIRITTETEILIOTISEILIVTESEIED inbourd SPI He 10 Outbound SPI Hed ox Came Hep Javea Appie Window 3 Configure the Manual Key Settings screen to modify the following AH Authentication AH provides data authentication and anti replay services for the VPN tunnel Select the required authentication method from the drop down menu e None Disables AH authentication The rest of the fields are not active e MD5 Enables the Message Digest 5 algorithm requiring 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e SHA Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1 requiring 160 bit 40 character hexadecimal keys 6 38 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Inbound AH Authentication Key Outbound AH Authentication Key Inbound SPI Hex Outbound SPI Hex ESP Type Configure a key for computing the integrity check on inbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm The key must be 32 40 hexadecimal 0 9 A E characters in length The key value must match the corresponding outbound key on the remote security gateway Configure a key for computing the integrity check on outbound traffic with the selected authentication algorithm The key must be 32 40 hexadecimal 0 9 A E characters in length The key value must match the corresponding inbound key on the remote security gatew
162. button to configure mappings between individual WLANs and VLANs If enabled the AP 5131 is required to be connected to a trunked port VLAN Name Click the VLAN Name button to launch the VLAN Name screen to create VLANs and assign them VLAN IDs For more information see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 VLAN Config Click the VLAN Config button to launch the VLAN Configuration screen to map WLANs to VLANs up to 16 mappings are possible per AP 5131 For more information see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 802 1x Port The AP 5131 only supports 802 1x authentication over its LAN Authentication port The AP 5131 behaves as an 802 1x supplicant to authenticate to a server on the network If using 802 1x authentication enter the authentication server user name and password The default password is symbol For information on enabling and configuring authentication schemes on the AP 5131 see Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page 6 5 3 Configure the DHCP field to define the type of LAN interface used NOTE Symbol recommends that the WAN and LAN ports should not both be configured as DHCP clients This interface is a DHCP Client This interface is a BOOTP Client This interface uses static IP Address This interface is a DHCP Server Address Assignment Range Advanced DHCP Server IP Address 5 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Select this button to enable DHCP to set
163. carefully as either a DHCP client BOOTP client DHCP server or using neither DHCP or BOOTP The AP 5131 LAN port has its own MAC address The LAN port MAC address is always the value of the AP 5131 WAN port MAC address plus 1 The LAN and WAN port MAC addresses can be located within the LAN and WAN Stats screens For information on locating the AP 5131 MAC addresses see Viewing WAN Statistics on page 7 2 and Viewing LAN Statistics on page 7 5 5 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The AP 5131 can use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to obtain a leased IP address and configuration information from a remote server DHCP is based on the BOOTP protocol and can coexist or interoperate with BOOTP Use the LAN Configuration screen to define the LAN interface and assign a timeout value to disable the LAN connection if no data traffic is detected within a defined interval The LAN Configuration screen is also used to define advanced DHCP server settings to generate a list of static MAC to IP mappings for reserved clients and optionally configure VLAN mappings to individual WLANs up to 16 WLANs available per AP 5131 The LAN Configuration screen also contains a Type Filter submenu item used to prevent specific an potentially unneccesary frames from being processed by the AP 5131 in order to improve throughput To configure the AP 5131 LAN interface 1 Select Network Configuration gt LAN Configuration from the AP 5131 menu tree
164. choices are ALL TCP UDP ICMP AH ESP and GRE Enter the port or ports used by the port forwarding service To specify a single port enter the port number in the Start Port area To specify a range of ports use both the Start Port and End Port options to enter the port numbers For example enter 110 in the Start Port field and 115 in the End Port field Enter the numerical non DNS name IP address to which the specified service is forwarded This address must be within the specified NAT range for the associated WAN IP address Specify the port number used to translate data for the service being forwarded 5 21 5 22 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Forward all Use the Forward all unspecified ports to checkbox to enable unspecified ports to port forwarding for incoming packets with unspecified ports In the adjacent area enter a target forwarding IP address for incoming packets This number must be within the specified NAT range for the associated WAN IP address 4 Click Ok to return to the NAT screen Within the NAT screen click Apply to save any changes made on the Port Forwarding screen 5 Click Cancel to undo any changes made on Port Forwarding screen This reverts all settings for the Port Forwarding screen to the last saved configuration 5 3 Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs A Wireless Local Area Network WLAN is a data communications system that flexibly extends the functionalities of a wired LAN A WLAN doe
165. cific MIB file NOTE The Symbol AP 5131 MIB contains the majority of the information contained within the Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 file This feature rich information has been validated with the Symbol WS2000 and proven reliable The remaining portion of the Symbol AP 5131 MIB contains supplemental information unique to the AP 5131 feature set If using the Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 and or Symbol AP 5131 MIB to configure the AP 5131 use the table below to locate the MIB where the feature can be configured Feature MIB Feature MIB LAN Configuration Symbol AP 5131 MIB Subnet Configuration Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 VLAN Configuration Symbol AP 5131 MIB DHCP Server Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Configuration 802 1x Port Symbol AP 5131 MIB Advanced DHCP Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Authentication Server configuration Ethernet Type Filter Symbol AP 5131 MIB WAN IP Configuration Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Configuration Wireless Symbol AP 5131 MIB PPP Over Ethernet Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Configuration Security Configuration Symbol AP 5131 MIB NAT Address Mapping Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 MU ACL Configuration Symbol AP 5131 MIB VPN Tunnel Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Configuration QOS Configuration Symbol AP 5131 MIB VPN Tunnel status Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Radio Configuration Symbol AP 5131 MIB Content Filtering Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Bandwidth Symbol AP 5131 MIB Rogue AP Detection Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Managem
166. ck NOTE The AP 5131 is Plenum rated to UL2043 and NEC1999 to support above the ceiling installations 2 18 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide suspended ceiling tile with a thickness less than 12 7mm 0 5in or a A CAUTION Symbol does not recommend mounting the AP 5131 directly to any suspended ceiling tile with an unsupported span greater than 660mm 26in Symbol strongly recommends fitting the AP 5131 with a safety wire suitable for supporting the weight of the device The safety wire should be a standard ceiling suspension cable or equivalent steel wire between 1 59mm 062in and 2 5mm 10in in diameter The mounting hardware required to install the AP 5131 above a ceiling consists of Light pipe Badge for light pipe Decal for badge Safety wire strongly recommended Security cable optional To install the AP 5131 above a ceiling or On 0 If possible remove the adjacent ceiling tile from its frame and place it aside Install a safety wire between 1 5mm 06in and 2 5mm 10in in diameter in the ceiling space If required install and attach a security cable to the AP 5131 s lock port Mark a point on the finished side of the tile where the light pipe is to be located Create a light pipe path hole in the target position on the ceiling tile Use a drill to make a hole in the tile the approximate size of the AP 5131 LED light pipe A CAUTION Symbol recommends care
167. configure WMM policies that can improve the user experience for audio video and voice applications by shortening the time between packet transmissions for higher priority multimedia traffic Use the Quality of Service Configuration screen to define the QoS policies for advanced network traffic management and multimedia applications support If the existing QoS policies are insufficient 5 32 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide a new policy can be created or an existing policy can be modified using the New QoS Policy or Edit QoS Policy screens Once new policies are defined they are available for use within the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screens to assign to specific WLANs based on MU interoperability requirements Symbol recommends using the New QoS Policy and Edit QoS Policy screens strategically to name and configure QoS policies meeting the requirements of the particular WLANs they may map to However be careful not to name policies after specific WLANs as individual QoS policies can be used by more than one WLAN For detailed information on assigning QoS policies to specific WLANs see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 To configure QoS policies 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt QoS from the AP 5131 menu tree The Quality of Service Configuration screen displays with existing QoS policies and their current WLAN if mapped to a WLAN NOTE When the AP 5131 is first launched a single QoS policy
168. creen being lost 8 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Active APs screen to the last saved configuration 9 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 6 13 1 1 Displaying Rogue AP Details Before moving a rogue AP into the list of allowed APs within the Active APs screen the device address and rogue detection information for that AP should be evaluated To evaluate the properties of a rogue AP 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Rogue AP Detection gt Active APs from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Highlight a target rogue AP from within Rogue APs table and click the Details button 3 Configuring Access Point Security 6 57 The Detail screen displays for the rogue AP Detail Rogue AP Detail BSSIDIMAC 00 30 AB 27 E4 15 ESSID symbol RSSI 14 Rogue Detector Detail Finders MAC 00 AD F8 71 59 20 Detection Method Detector AP First Heard days hrs min 00 00 00 Last Heard days hrs min 00 00 00 Channel 1 OK Cancel Help Refer to the Rogue AP Detail field for the following information BSSID MAC Displays the MAC address of the rogue AP This information could be useful if the MAC address is determined to be a Symbol MAC address and the device is interpreted as non hostile and the device should be defined as an allowed AP
169. cription Displays the current AP 5131 logging settings Syntax show Displays the logging options Example admin system logs gt show log level L6 Info syslog server logging enable syslog server ip address 192 168 0 102 ftp tftp server address 192 168 0 101 ftp user name tealtown ftp password 7 kekk kkkk For information on configuring logging settings using the applet GUI see Logging Configuration on page 4 28 Command Line Interface Reference 8 157 AP5131 gt admin system logs gt set Description Sets log options and parameters Syntax set level lt level gt Sets the level of the events that will be logged All events with a level at or above lt level gt LO L7 will be saved to the system log LO Emergency L1 Alert L2 Critical L3 Errors L4 Warning Lb Notice L6 Info default setting L7 Debug mode lt mode gt Enables or disables syslog server logging ipadr lt ip gt Sets the external syslog server IP address to lt ip gt a b c d server lt a b c d gt Sets the FIP server IP address user lt username gt Sets the FIP user name 1 39 characters passwd lt password gt Sets the FIP password 1 39 characters For information on configuring logging settings using the applet GUI see Logging Configuration on page 4 28 8 158 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system logs gt view Description Displays the AP 5131 system log file Syntax view Displays
170. ction and create a list of device MAC addresses and ESSID s approved for interoperability with the AP 5131 Authorize Any AP Having Symbol Select this checkbox to enable all access points with a Symbol MAC address to interoperate with the AP 5131 conducting a scan Defined MAC Address for rogue devices Add Del Delete Delete All Any MAC Click Add to display a single set of editable MAC address and ESS address values Click the Delete button to remove the highlighted line from the Rule Management field The MAC and ESS address information previously defined is no longer applicable unless the previous configuration is restored Click the Delete All button to remove all entries from the Rule Management field All MAC and ESS address information previously defined is no longer applicable unless the previous configuration is restored Select the Any MAC checkbox to prevent a device s MAC address whether it is a known device MAC address or not from being considered a rogue device 6 54 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide MAC Address Click Add and enter the device MAC address to be excluded from classification as a rogue device Any ESSid Select the Any ESSid checkbox to prevent a device s ESSid whether it is a known device ESSid or not from being considered a rogue device ESSID Click Add and enter the name of a device ESSid to be excluded from classification as a rogue device 4 Click Apply to save a
171. ctions as a layer 2 bridge similar to Symbol s existing AP 4131 access point The wired uplink can operate as a trunk and support multiple VLANs Up to 16 WLANs can be defined and mapped to AP 5131 WLANs Each WLAN can be configured to be broadcast by one or both AP 5131 radios unlike the AP 4131 The AP 5131 can operate in both an Access Point mode and Wireless Gateway Router mode simultaneously The network architecture and AP 5131 configuration define how the Access Point and Wireless Gateway Router mode are negotiated Wireless Gateway Router If operating as a Wireless Gateway Router the AP 5131 functions as a router between two layer 2 networks the WAN uplink the ethernet port and the Wireless side A number of options are available providing a solution for single cell deployment e PPPoE The WAN interface can terminate a PPPoE connection thus enabling the AP 5131 to operate in conjunction with a DSL or Cable modem to provide WAN connectivity e NAT Network Address Translation on the Wireless interface Using NAT the AP 5131 router is able to manage a private IP scheme NAT allows translation of private addresses to the WAN IP address e DHCP On the Wireless side the AP 5131 can assign private IP addresses e Firewall In between the WAN and Wireless interfaces a Firewall protects against a number of known attacks AP 5131 Introduction 1 23 1 2 8 Management Access Options Managing the AP 5131 includes viewing netwo
172. cy lt index gt Displays the requested MU ACL index policy Example admin network wireless acl gt show summary ACL Policy Name Associated WLANs 1 Default Front Lobby 2 Admin Administration 3 Demo Room Customers admin network wireless acl gt show policy 1 Policy Name Front Lobby Policy Mode allow index start mac end mac 1 00A0F8348787 00A0F8348798 For information on configuring the ACL options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring a WLAN Access Control List ACL on page 5 29 Command Line Interface Reference 8 73 AP5131 gt admin network wireless acl gt create Description Creates an MU ACL policy Syntax create show lt acl name gt Displays the parameters of a new ACL policy set acl name lt index gt Sets the MU ACL policy name mode lt acl mode gt Sets the ACL mode for the defined index 1 16 Allowed MUs can access the AP 5131 managed LAN Options are deny and allow add addr lt mac1 gt or Adds specified MAC address to list of ACL MAC addresses lt mac1 gt lt mac2 gt delete lt index gt lt all gt Removes either a specified ACL index or all ACL entries Completes the policy creation and exits the CLI add policy Example admin network wireless Policy Name Policy Mode Cancels the creation of the ACL and exits the CLI acl create gt show Front Lobby allow start mac end mac OOA0F8334455 OOA0OF8334455 OOAOF8400000 OOAOF8402001 admin
173. d WEP is designed to provide a WLAN with a level of security and privacy comparable to that of a wired LAN WEP may be all that a small business user needs for the simple encryption of wireless data However networks that require more security are at risk from a WEP flaw The existing 802 11 standard alone offers administrators no effective method to update keys To configure WEP on the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu tree If security policies supporting WEP exist they appear within the Security Configuration screen These existing policies can be used as is or their properties edited by clicking the Edit button To configure a new security policy supporting WEP continue to step 2 2 Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting WEP The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encryption options selected 3 Select either the WEP 64 40 bit key or WEP 128 104 bit key radio button 6 16 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The WEP 64 Settings or WEP 128 Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen 4 Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy Name ep Amera aton Encryhon VAP 128 Seegi Marran Pre onmred hey No aufvert stor heterns TLE Enter 32 characters Pass Key trredthiepet enema Eecrptos Ertet 28 Sexetocinal characters o
174. d protect and restrict AP 5131 device access 1 Connect a wired computer to the AP 5131 LAN port using a standard CAT 5 cable 2 Setup the computer for TCP IP DHCP network addressing and make sure the DNS settings are not hardcoded 3 Start up Internet Explorer with Sun Micro Systems Java Runtime Environment JRE 1 5 or higher installed and type in the default IP address in the address field 192 168 0 1 If the default IP address has been changed ensure the correct IP address is entered NOTE For optimum compatibility use Sun Microsystems JRE 1 5 or higher available from Sun s Web site and be sure to disable Microsoft s Java Virtual Machine if it is installed NOTE DNS names are not supported as a valid IP address for the AP 5131 The user is required to enter a numerical IP address The AP 5131 Login screen displays ACCESS POINT 6 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 4 5 Log in using the admin as the default User ID and symbol as the default Password If the default login is successful the Change Admin Password window displays Change the default login and password to significantly decrease the likelihood of hacking Change Admin Password Enter ADMINISTRATOR Password Enter New Password 0 11 characters Re Type New Password 0 11 characters Apply Cancel Help Enter the previous password and the new admin password in the two fields pr
175. data transfers over the AP 5131 Activity 802 1 1b g radio The LEDs on the rear of the AP 5131 are viewed using a single customer installed extended lightpipe adjusted as required to suit above the ceiling installations The LEDs displayed using the lightpipe have the following color display and functionality 2 22 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Boot and Power Status Solid white indicates the AP 5131 is adequately powered Error Conditions Solid red indicates the AP 5131 is experiencing a problem condition requiring immediate attention Power and Error Blinking red indicates the AP 5131 Rogue AP Detection feature has located a Conditions rogue device 2 9 Setting Up MUs For a discussion of how to initially test the AP 5131 to ensure it can interoperate with the MUs intended for its operational environment see Basic Device Configuration on page 3 3 and specifically Testing Connectivity on page 3 11 Refer to the LA 5030 amp LA 5033 Wireless Networker PC Card and PCI Adapter Users Guide available from the Symbol Web site for installing drivers and client software if operating in an 802 11a g network environment Refer to the Spectrum24 LA 4121 PC Card LA 4123 PCI Adapter amp LA 4137 Wireless Networker User Guide available from the Symbol Web site for installing drivers and client software if operating in an 802 11b network environment Use the default values for the ESSID and other configuration parameters until
176. ddress range assigned to the DHCP server For additional AP 5131 LAN port configuration options see Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5 1 8 Enable the radio s using the Radio Enable checkbox es If using a single radio AP 5131 enable the radio then select either 2 4 GHz or 5 2 GHz from the RF Band of Operation field Only one RF band option at a time is permissible in a single radio AP 5131 If using a dual radio AP 5131 the user can enable both RF bands For additional AP 5131 radio configuration options see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 9 Select the WLAN 1 tab WLANs 1 4 are available within the Quick Setup screen to define its ESSID and security scheme for basic operation NOTE A maximum of 16 WLANs are configurable within the AP 5131 Wireless Configuration screen The limitation of 16 WLANs exists regardless of whether the AP 5131 is a single or dual radio model a Enter the Extended Services Set Identification ESS D and name associated with the WLAN For additional information on creating and editing up to 16 WLANs per AP 5131 see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 Getting Started 3 9 b Use the Available On checkboxes to define whether the target WLAN is operating over the 802 1 1a or 802 11b g radio Ensure the radio selected has been enabled see step 8 c Even an AP 5131 configured with minimal values must protect its data against theft and corruption A
177. decimal value OK Cancel Help Packet types supported for the type filtering function include 16 bit DIX Ethernet types as well as Symbol proprietary types Select an Ethernet type from the drop down menu or enter the Ethernet type s hexadecimal value Consult with your System Administrator if unsure of the implication of adding or omitting a type from the list Network Management 5 13 4 To optionally delete a type filtering selection from the list highlight the packet type and click the Delete button 5 Click Apply to save any changes to the Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost 6 Click Cancel to securely exit the Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen without saving your changes 7 Click Logout within the Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 5 2 Configuring WAN Settings A Wide Area Network WAN is a widely dispersed telecommunications network The AP 5131 includes one WAN port The AP 5131 WAN port has its own MAC address In a corporate environment the WAN port might connect to a larger corporate network For a small business the WAN port might connect to a DSL or cable modem to access the Internet Use the WAN screen to set the WAN IP configuration and Point to Point Protocol over
178. delivery of host specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host Some of these parameters are IP address network mask and gateway If DHCP client mode is enabled the other WAN IP configuration parameters are grayed out Specify a numerical non DNS name IP address for the AP 5131 s WAN connection This address defines the AP s presence on a larger network or on the Internet Obtain a static dedicated IP address from the ISP or network administrator An IP address uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation for example 190 188 12 1 Specify a subnet mask for the AP 5131 s WAN connection This number is available from the ISP for a DSL or cable modem connection or from an administrator if the AP 5131 connects to a larger network A subnet mask uses a series of four numbers expressed in dot notation similar to an IP address For example 255 255 255 0 is a valid subnet mask Specify the gateway address for the AP 5131 s WAN connection The ISP or a network administrator provides this address Specify the address of a primary Domain Name System DNS server The ISP or a network administrator provides this address A DNS server translates a domain name for example www symboltech com into an IP address that networks can use Specify the address of a secondary DNS server if one is used A secondary address is recommended if the primary DNS server goes down 5 16 AP 5131 Access Point Product Refere
179. deny EXPN allow Command Line Interface Reference 8 55 For information on configuring Content Filtering using the applet GUI see Configuring Content Filtering Settings on page 6 48 8 56 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 3 Network Wireless Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless Description Displays the AP 5131 wireless submenu The items available under this command include wlan Displays the WLAN submenu used to create and configure up to 16 WLANs per AP 5131 security Displays the security submenu used to create encryption and authentication based security policies for use with AP 5131 WLANs acl Displays to the Access Control List ACL submenu to restrict or allow MU access to AP 5131 WLANs radio Displays the radio configuration submenu used to specify how the 802 11a or 802 11b g radio is used with specific WLANs qos Displays the Quality of Service QoS submenu to prioritize specific kinds of data traffic within a WLAN bandwidth Displays the Bandwidth Management submenu used to configure the order data is processed by an AP 5131 radio rogue ap Displays the Rogue AP submenu to configure devices located by the AP 5131 as friendly or threatening for interoperablity 3 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 57 8 3 3 1 Network WLAN Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless wlan
180. der a new connection to the device RX overruns are buffer overruns on the AP 5131 LAN port RX overruns occur when packets are received faster than the LAN connection can handle them If RX overruns are excessive consider reducing the data rate for more information see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 The RX Frame field displays the number of TCP IP data frame errors received Refer to the Transmitted field to view statistics transmitted over the AP 5131 LAN port TX Packets TX Bytes TX Errors TX Dropped TX Overruns TX Carrier TX packets are data packets sent over the AP 5131 LAN port The displayed number is a cumulative total since the LAN connection was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted To begin a new data collection see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 TX bytes are bytes of information sent over the LAN port The displayed number is a cumulative total since the LAN Connection was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted To begin a new data collection see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 TX errors include dropped data packets buffer overruns and carrier errors on outbound traffic The displayed number of TX errors is a total of TX Dropped TX Overruns and TX Carrier errors Use this information to re assess AP location and transmit speed The TX Dropped field displays the number of data packets that fail to get sent from the AP 5131 LAN port TX ov
181. detected after the specified interval Refer to the Configurable Firewall Filters field to set the following firewall filters SYN Flood Attack Check Source Routing Check Winnuke Attack Check FIP Bounce Attack Check IP Unaligned Timestamp Check Sequence Number Prediction Check Mime Flood Attack Check A SYN flood attack requests a connection and then fails to promptly acknowledge a destination host s response leaving the destination host vulnerable to a flood of connection requests A source routing attack specifies an exact route for a packet s travel through a network while exploiting the use of an intermediate host to gain access to a private host A Win nuking attack uses the IP address of a destination host to send junk packets to its receiving port An FIP bounce attack uses the PORT command in FTP mode to gain access to arbitrary ports on machines other than the originating client An IP unaligned timestamp attack uses a frame with the IP timestamp option where the timestamp is not aligned on a 32 bit boundary A sequence number prediction attack establishes a three way TCP connection with a forged source address The attacker guesses the sequence number of the destination host response A MIME flood attack uses an improperly formatted MIME header in sendmail to cause a buffer overflow on the destination host Configuring Access Point Security 6 27 Max Header Length Use the Max Header Length f
182. disabled admin system test gt 8 174 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system test gt set Description Defines the parameters of an AP 5131 system test These commands are recommended for qualified technicians only Syntax set flow lt mode gt enable disable Enables or disables flow control for the AP 5131 hbt lt mode gt enable disable Enables or disables heartbeat mode for the AP 5131 wd lt mode gt enable disable Enables or disables the wireless disable val option for the AP 5131 pmd lt mode gt enable disable Defines a fix psp more data enable val settings as enabled or disabled rs lt mode gt enable disable Enables or disables the AP 5131 rate scale test setting intl lt value gt Defines integer 1 For example 0x1234 int2 lt value gt Defines integer 2 For example 0x1234 int3 lt value gt Defines integer 3 For example 0x1234 int lt value gt Defines integer 4 For example 0x1234 str1 lt value gt String is 1 through 39 characters in length str2 lt value gt String is 1 through 39 characters in length str3 lt value gt String is 1 through 39 characters in length str4 lt value gt String is 1 through 39 characters in length 8 5 Statistics Commands AP5131 gt admin stats Description Displays the AP 5131 statistics submenu The items available under this command are show Displays AP 5131 WLAN MU LAN and WAN statistics send cfg Sends a config file to all AP 5131 s
183. e Signal to Noise Ratio is an indication of overall RF performance on your wireless network 7 Refer to the Errors field to view MU retry information and statistics on packets not transmitted Avg Num of Retries Displays the average number of retries for the MU The number in black represents average retries for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents average retries for the last hour Dropped Packets Displays the percentage of packets the AP gave up as not received on for the selected MU The number in black represents the percentage of packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents the percentage of packets for the last hour of Undecryptable Displays the percentage of undecryptable packets for the MU The Pkts number in black represents the percentage of undecryptable packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents the percentage of undecryptable packets for the last hour 8 Click OK to exit the screen 7 5 2 Pinging Individual MUs The AP 5131 can verify its link with an MU by sending WNMP ping packets to the associated MU Use the Echo Test screen to specify a target MU and configure the parameters of the ping test NOTE Anecho test initiated from the AP 5131 MU Stats Summary screen uses WNMP pings Therefore target clients that are not Symbol MUs are unable to respond to the echo test Monitoring Statistics 7 25 To ping a specific MU to assess its connection w
184. e Guide Inbound SPI Hex Define an eight character hexadecimal value identify the inbound security association created by the encryption algorithm The value must match the corresponding outbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway Outbound SPI Hex Enter an eight character hexadecimal value to identify the outbound security association created by the encryption algorithm The value must match the corresponding inbound SPI value configured on the remote security gateway The Inbound and Outbound SPI settings are required to be interpolated to function correctly For example AP1 Inbound SPI 800 AP1 Outbound SPI 801 AP2 Inbound SPI 801 AP2 Outbound SPI 800 4 Click Ok to return to the VPN screen Click Apply to retain the settings made on the Manual Key Settings screen 5 Click Cancel to return to the VPN screen without retaining the changes made to the Manual Key Settings screen 6 11 2 Configuring Auto Key Settings The AP 5131 s Network Management System can automatically set encryption and authentication keys for VPN access Use the Auto Key Settings screen to specify the type of encryption and authentication without specifying the keys To manually specify keys cancel out of the Auto Key Settings screen select the Manual Key Exchange radio button and set the keys within the Manual Key Setting screen To configure auto key settings for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt
185. e PAP protocol because the username and password are sent as clear text that a hacker can read CHAP uses secret information and mathematical algorithms to send a derived numeric value for login The login server knows the secret information and performs the same mathematical operations to derive a numeric value If the results match server access is authorized After login one of the numbers in the mathematical operation is changed to secure the connection This prevents any intruder from trying to copy a valid authentication session and replaying it later to log in 4 Click Apply to save any changes to the WAN screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost 5 18 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the WAN screen to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 5 2 1 Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings Network Address Translation NAT converts an IP address in one network to a different IP address or set of IP addresses in another network The AP 5131 router maps its local inside network addresses to WAN outside IP addresses and translates the WAN IP addresses on incoming packets to local IP addresse
186. e displays 6 Quickly press lt ESC gt esc key to run boot firmware message displays the AP 5131 will A CAUTION If the lt ESC gt key is not pressed within three seconds after the Press continue to boot If the lt ESC gt key is pressed within three seconds a boot gt prompt displays 7 Type the following at the boot prompt passwd default 8 Reset the AP 5131 by typing the following at the boot prompt reset system When the AP 5131 re boots again the password will return to its default value of symbol You can now access the AP 5131 6 3 Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes To complement the built in firewall filters on the WAN side of the AP 5131 the WLAN side of the AP 5131 supports authentication and encryption schemes Authentication is a challenge response procedure for validating user credentials such as username password and sometimes secret key information The AP 5131 provides two schemes for authenticating users 802 1x EAP and Kerberos Encryption applies a specific algorithm to alter its appearance and prevent unauthorized reading Decryption applies the algorithm in reverse to restore the data to its original form Sender and receiver must employ the same encryption decryption method to interoperate Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is available in two encryption modes 40 bit also called WEP 64 and 104 bit also called WEP 128 The 104 bit encryption mode provides a longer algorithm
187. e last saved configuration Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 6 30 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 6 10 1 1 Available Protocols Protocols that are not pre configured can be specified using the drop down list within the Transport column within the LAN to WAN Access and Advanced Subnet Access screens They include ALL Enables all of the protocol options displayed in the drop down menu as described below TCP Transmission Control Protocol is a set of rules for sending data as message units over the Internet TCP manages individual data packets Messages are divided into packets for efficient routing through the Internet UDP User Datagram Protocol is used for broadcasting data over the Internet Like TCP UDP runs on top of Internet Protocol IP networks Unlike TCP IP UDP IP provides few error recovery services UDP offers a way to directly connect and then send and receive datagrams over an IP network ICMP nternet Control Message Protocol is tightly integrated with IP ICMP messages are used for out of band messages related to network operation ICMP packet delivery is unreliable Hosts cannot count on receiving ICMP packets for a network problem AH Authentication Header is one of the two key components of IP Security Protocol IPsec The other key component is Encapsulating Security Protocol ESP A
188. e the VPN Tunnels field to add or delete a tunnel to the list of available tunnels list tunnel network address information and display key exchange information for each tunnel Add Del Tunnel Name Remote Subnet Remote Gateway Click Add to add a VPN tunnel to the list To configure a specific tunnel select it from the list and use the parameters within the VPN Tunnel Config field to set its properties Click Del to delete a highlighted VPN tunnel There is no confirmation before deleting the tunnel The Tunne Name column lists the name of each VPN tunnel on the AP 5131 The Remote Subnet column lists the remote subnet mask for each tunnel The remote subnet mask is the subnet setting for the remote network the tunnel connects to The Remote Gateways column lists a remote gateway IP address for each tunnel The numeric remote gateway is the gateway IP address on the remote network the VPN tunnel connects to Ensure the address is the same as the WAN port address of the target gateway AP or switch Configuring Access Point Security 6 35 Key Exchange Type The Key Exchange Type column lists the key exchange type for passing keys between both ends of a VPN tunnel If Manual Key Exchange is selected this column displays Manual If Auto IKE Key Exchange is selected the field displays Automatic If a VPN tunnel has been added to the list of available AP 5131 tunnels use the VPN Tunnel Config field to optionally modify the t
189. e up to date For more information see Updating Device Firmware on page 4 34 System Uptime Displays the current uptime of the AP 5131 defined in the System Name field System Uptime is the cumulative time since the AP 5131 was last rebooted or lost power 4 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 3 Serial Number Displays the AP 5131 Media Access Control MAC address The AP 5131 MAC address is hard coded at the factory and cannot be modified The LAN and WAN port MAC addresses can be located within the LAN and WAN Stats screens For information on locating the AP 5131 MAC addresses see Viewing WAN Statistics on page 7 2 and Viewing LAN Statistics on page 7 5 Refer to the Factory Defaults field to restore either a full or partial default configuration Restore Default Configuration Restore Partial Default Configuration Select the Restore Default Configuration button to reset the AP s configuration to factory default settings If selected a message displays warning the user the current configuration will be lost if the default configuration is restored Before using this feature Symbol recommends using the Config Import Export screen to export the current configuration for safekeeping see Importing Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 Select the Restore Partial Default Configuration button to restore a default configuration with the exception of the current LAN WAN SNMP settings and IP address used to launch
190. e using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings on page 5 18 Command Line Interface Reference 8 41 AP5131 gt admin network wan nat gt delete Description Deletes NAT entries Syntax delete lt idx gt lt entry gt Deletes a specified NAT index entry lt entry gt associated with the WAN lt idx gt all Deletes all NAT entries associated with the WAN Example admin network wan nat gt list 1 index name prot start port end port internal ip translation port 1 special tcp 20 21 192 168 42 16 21 admin network wan nat gt delete all a admin network wan nat gt list 1 index name prot start port end port internal ip translation port Related Commands add Adds entries to the list of inbound NAT entries list Displays the list of inbound NAT entries For an overview of the AP 5131 NAT options available using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings on page 5 18 8 42 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan nat gt list Description Lists AP 5131 NAT entries for the specified index Syntax list lt idx gt Lists the inbound NAT entries associated with WAN port Example admin network wan nat gt list 1 index name prot start port end port internal ip translation port 1 special tcp 20 21 192 168 42 16 21 Related Commands delete Deletes inbound NAT entries from the list add Adds entries to t
191. ecified Defines Minimum Contention Window CW Min for specified access categoiry and index Defines Maximum Contention Window CW Max for specified access categoiry and index Sets Arbitrary Inter Frame Space Number AIFSN for specified access categoiry and index Configures Opportunity to Transmit Time TXOPs Time for specified access categoiry and index Defines CWMIN CWMAX AIFSN and TXOPs default values Completes the policy edit and exits the session Cancels the changes and exits Command Line Interface Reference 8 97 AP5131 gt admin network wireless qos gt delete Description Removes a QoS policy Syntax delete lt qos name gt Deletes the specified QoS polciy index or all of the policies lt all gt For information on configuring the WLAN QoS options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 8 98 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 3 6 Network Bandwith Management Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless bandwidth gt Description Displays the AP 5131 Bandwidth Management submenu The items available under this command include show Displays Bandwidth Management information for how data is processed by the AP 5131 set Defines Bandwidth Management parameters for the AP 5131 i Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Inte
192. ect an RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the power injector Data In connector Connect an RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the power injector Data amp Power Out connector and the Symbol AP 5131 LAN port AP 5131 non operational Only use a AP PSBIAS T 1P AF model CAUTION Cabling the power injector to the AP 5131 s WAN port renders the power injector with the AP 5131 s LAN port 2 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source host to the power injector and AP 5131 does not exceed 100 meters 333 ft aon aby Va Main Data amp Power Out Data In TEEE802 3af Compliant The power injector has no On Off power switch The power injector receives power and is ready for AP 5131 device connection and operation as soon as AC power is applied 2 6 1 3 Power Injector LED Indicators The power injector demonstrates the following LED behavior under normal and or problematic operating conditions LED AC Main Port Green Steady Power injector is receiving power from AC Indicates a device is connected to the outlet power injector s outgoing Data amp Power cable Green Blinking Output voltage source is out of range The power injector is overloaded or has a short circuit Hardware Installation 2 11 For more information and device specificati
193. ectly form a Symbol 48V AC DC power supply Part No 50 24000 050 or via an Ethernet cable connected to the LAN port using the 802 3af standard When users purchase a Symbol WLAN solution they often need to place access points in obscure locations In the past a dedicated power source was required for each access point in addition to the Ethernet infrastructure This often required an electrical contractor to install power drops at each access point location An approved power injector solution merges power and Ethernet into one cable reducing the burden of installation and allows optimal AP 5131 placement in respect to the intended radio coverage area The Symbol Power Injector is included in certain AP 5131 kits The Symbol Power Injector Part No AP PSBIAS I 1P AF is an integrated AC DC converter and 802 3af power injector which requires 110 220V AC power to combine low voltage DC with Ethernet data in a single cable 2 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide connecting to the AP 5131 The AP 5131 can only use a Power Injector when connected to the LAN port The Symbol AP 5131 Power Supply Part No 50 24000 050 is not included in the kit and is orderable separately as an accessory source including non Symbo power sources However using the wrong solution including a POE system used on a legacy Symbol access point could severely damage the AP 5131 and void the product warranty A CAUTION The AP 5131 supports an
194. ector to combine Ethernet and power in one cable to the AP 5131 see Symbol Power Injector System on page 2 7 To verify the behavior of the AP 5131 LEDs once installed see LED Indicators on page 2 20 3 2 Configuration Options Once installed and powered the AP 5131 can be configured using one of several connection techniques Managing the AP 5131 includes viewing network statistics and setting configuration options The AP 5131 requires one of the following connection methods to manage the network Secure Java Based WEB Ul use Sun Microsystems JRE 1 5 or higher available from Sun s Web site Disable Microsoft s Java Virtual Machine if installed For information on using the Web UI to set AP 5131 default configuration values see Basic Device Configuration on page 3 3 or chapters 4 through 7 of this guide Command Line Interface CLI via Serial Telnet and SSH The AP 5131 CLI is accessed through the AP 5131 RS232 port via Telnet or SSH The CLI follows the same configuration conventions as the device user interface with a few documented exceptions For details on using the CLI to manage the AP 5131 see Command Line Interface Reference on page 8 1 Config file Readable text file Importable Exportable via FTP TFTP and HTTP Configuration settings for an AP 5131 can be downloaded from the current configuration of another AP 5131 meeting the import export requirements For information on importing or exporting configuration files see mp
195. ed by colons For example 00 A0 F8 24 9A C8 The Radio Type parameter simply displays the radio type as 802 114 or 802 11b g This field is read only and always displays the radio type selected from the AP 5131 menu tree under the Radio Configuration item 3 Configure the Radio Setting field to assign a channel antenna diversity setting radio transmit power level and data rate 5 40 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Channel Setting Antenna Diversity Power Level 802 11 b g mode Set Rates The following channel setting options exist User Selection If selected use the drop down menu to specify the legal channel for the intended country of operation The drop down menu is not available if this option is not selected Automatic Selection Enables the AP 5131 to auto select the channel of operation For example if three AP 5131 s are operating on 802 11b g each AP 5131 would be set to a non overlapping channel 1 6 and 11 If using the AP 5131 s 802 11a radio a Uniform Spreading option is available and is the default setting for the 802 114 radio To comply with Dynamic Frequency Selection DFS requirements in the European Union the 802 11a radio uses a randomly selected channel each time the AP 5131 is powered on Specifies the antenna selection for the 802 114 radio Options include Primary Only Secondary Only and Full Diversity The default setting is Primary However Diversity can improve performance
196. en to display the status of the tunnels configured on the AP 5131 as well as their lifetime transmit and receive statistics The VPN Status screen is read only with no configurable parameters To configure a VPN tunnel use the VPN configuration screen in the WAN section of the AP 5131 menu tree To view VPN status or the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt VPN gt VPN Status from the AP 5131 menu tree Configuring Access Point Security 6 47 AP 5131 symbol f RE pietwos Coretgueaton i VPN Status uai e Secutty Astoousens E b nat eg YPN VPN States LO tora F eneg H I vesie H vees LA NA ad AN Qnn m kid Stat KE Bemmary Syatom Mara AP 31 J1 2 Reference the Security Associations field to view the following Tunnel Name The Tunnel Name column lists the names of all the tunnels configured on the AP 5131 Clicking the Tunnel Name title bar enables you to sort by tunnel name For information on configuring a tunnel see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 Status The Status column lists the status of each configured tunnel When the tunnel is not in use the status reads NOT ACTIVE When the tunnel is connected the status reads ACTIVE Outb SPI The Outb SP column displays the outbound Security Parameter Index SPI for each tunnel The SPI is used locally by the AP 5131 to identify a security association There are unique outbound and inbound SPls Inb SPI The Inb SPI column displays the
197. enna best suited to the radio transmission requirements of your coverage area For an overview of the Radio 1 2 4 GHz and Radio 2 5 2 GHz antennas supported on the AP 5131 s Reverse SMA RSMA connectors see Technical Specifications on page A 1 1 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 1 5 Sixteen Configurable WLANs A Wireless Local Area Network WLAN is a data communications system that flexibly extends the functionalities of a wired LAN A WLAN does not require lining up devices for line of sight transmission and are thus desirable for wireless networking Roaming users can be handed off from one AP 5131 to another like a cellular phone system WLANs can therefore be configured around the needs of specific groups of users even when they are not in physical proximity Sixteen WLANs are configurable on each AP 5131 To enable and configure WLANs on an AP 5131 radio see Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs on page 5 22 1 1 6 Support for 4 BSSIDs per Radio The AP 5131 supports four BSSIDs per radio Each BSSID has a corresponding MAC address The first MAC address corresponds to BSSID 1 The MAC addresses for the other three BSSIDs BSSIDs 2 3 4 are derived by adding 1 2 3 respectively to the radio MAC address If the radio MAC address displayed on the Radio Settings screen is 00 A0 F8 72 20 DC then the BSSIDs for that radio will have the following MAC addresses BSSID MAC Address Hexadecimal Addition BSSID 1 00 A0 F
198. ent SNMP Trap Selection Symbol AP 5131 MIB Firewall Configuration Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 SNMP FF Trap Thresholds Feature Config Import Export MU Authentication Stats WNMP Ping Configuration Known AP Stats Flash LEDs Symbol AP 5131 MIB MIB Symbol AP 5131 MIB Symbol AP 5131 MIB Symbol AP 5131 MIB Symbol AP 5131 MIB Symbol AP 5131 MIB System Configuration 4 13 LAN to WAN Access Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Feature MIB AdvancedLANAccess Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Router Configuration Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 System Settings Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 AP 5131 Access Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Certificate Mgt Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 SNMP Access Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Configuration SNMP Trap Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Configuration NTP Server Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Configuration Logging Configuration Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Firmware Update Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Wireless Stats Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 Radio Stats Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 MU Stats Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 SNMP allows a network administrator to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth The AP 5131 supports SNMP management functions for gathering information from its network components communicating that information to specified users and configuring the AP 5131 All the fields available within the AP 5131 are also configurable within the MIB The AP 5131 SNMP agent fu
199. ere lt IDname gt The private key ID Name up to 7 chars lt Subject gt Subject Name up to 49 chars ou lt OrgUnit gt Organization Unit up to 49 chars on lt OrgName gt Organization Name up to 49 chars en lt City gt City Name of Organization up to 49 chars st lt State gt State Name up to 49 chars p lt PostCode gt Postal code 9 digits cc lt CCode gt Country code 2 chars e lt Email gt E mail Address up to 49 chars d lt Domain gt Domain Name up to 49 chars i lt IP gt IP Address a b c d sa lt SAlgo gt Signature Algorithm one of MD5 RSA SHA1 RSA or SHA1 DSS k lt KSize gt Key size in bits one of 512 1024 or 2048 Note The parameters in square brackets are optional Check with the CA to determine what fields are necessary For example most CAs require an email address and an IP address but not the address of the organization Example admin system cmgr gt genreq MyCert2 MySubject ou MyDept on MyCompany Please wait It may take some time Generating the certificate request Retreiving the certificate request The certificate request is MIHZMIGeAgEAMDkxE jJAQBGNVBAoTCU15Q02 9t cGFueTEPMAOGA1UECxMGTX1EZXBO MRIWEAYDVQQDEw1NeVN1 Ymp1Y3QwXDANBgkqhkiG9w0OBAQEFAANLADBIAkKEAtKcX plKFCFAJymTFX71lyuxY1 f dS7UEhKjJBsH7pdqnJUnsASK6Z0GAger jpKScWV1mzyYn4 1q2 mgGnCvaZU1Io7wIDAQABoAAwDOYJKoZIhvcNAQEEBQADQOCC1O5LHdbG C1f Bj8AszttSo bA4dcX3vHvhhJcmuuW09LHS2imPA3xhx d6 Q1SMbs tG4RPO1RSr iW
200. erruns are buffer overruns on the LAN port TX overruns occur when packets are sent faster than the LAN connection can handle If TX overruns are excessive consider reducing the data rate for more information see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 The TX Carrier field displays the number of TCP IP data carrier errors 7 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 5 Click the Clear LAN Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections The RX TX Packets and RX TX Bytes totals remain at their present values and are not cleared 6 Click the Logout button to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet There will be a prompt confirming logout before the applet is closed 7 3 Viewing Wireless Statistics Use the WLAN Stats Summary screen to view overview statistics for active enabled WLANs on the AP 5131 The WLAN Summary field displays basic information such as number of Mobile Units MUs and total throughput for each of the active WLANs The Total RF Traffic section displays basic throughput information for all RF activity on the AP 5131 The WLAN Stats Summary screen is view only with no user configurable data fields If a WLAN is not displayed within the Wireless Stats Summary screen see Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs on page 5 22 to enable the WLAN For information on configuring the properties of individual WLANs see Creating Editing Individ
201. ess Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap allowed list gt show Description Displays the Rogue AP allowed List Syntax show Displays the rogue AP allowed list Example admin network wireless rogue ap allowed list gt show index ap essid 00 A0 F8 71 59 20 00 A0 F8 33 44 55 101 3 00 A0 F8 40 20 01 Marketing For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 Command Line Interface Reference 8 109 AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap allowed list gt add Description Adds an AP MAC address and ESSID to existing allowed list Syntax add lt mac addr gt Adds an AP MAC address and ESSID to existing allowed list Use a for any lt ess id gt ESSID Example admin network wireless admin network wireless rogue ap allowed list gt add OOAOF83161BB 103 rogue ap allowed list gt show index ap 1 00 A0 F8 2 00 A0 F8 3 00 A0 F8 4 00 A0 F8 71 33 40 31 59 20 44 55 20 01 61 BB 101 Marketing 103 For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 8 110 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap allowed list gt delete Description Deletes an AP MAC address and ESSID to existing allowed lis
202. ess for the AP 5131 or to view other default settings 3 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 4 Optionally enter the IP address of the server used to provide system time to the AP 5131 within the Time Server field NOTE DNS names are not supported as a valid IP address The user is required to enter a numerical IP address Once the IP address is entered the AP 5131 s Network Time Protocol NTP functionality is engaged automatically Refer to the AP 5131 Product Reference Guide for information on defining alternate time servers and setting a synchronization interval for the AP 5131 to adjust its displayed time Refer to Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP on page 4 26 if necessary for information on setting alternate time servers and setting a synchronization interval for the AP 5131 to adjust its displayed time 5 Click the WAN tab to set a minimum set of parameters for using the WAN interface a Select the Enable WAN Interface checkbox to enable a connection between the AP 5131 and a larger network or outside world through the WAN port Disable this option to effectively isolate the AP 5131 s WAN connection No connections to a larger network or the Internet will be possible MUs cannot communicate beyond the configured subnets Select the This Interface is a DHCP Client checkbox to enable DHCP for the AP 5131 WAN connection This is useful if the larger corporate network or nternet Service Provider
203. etwork Security Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless security gt Description Displays the AP 5131 wireless security submenu The items available under this command include show Displays the AP 5131 s current security configuration create Defines the parameters of a security policy edit Edits the properties of an existing security policy delete Removes a specific security policy 7 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI For information the security configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Security Options on page 6 2 Command Line Interface Reference 8 63 AP5131 gt admin network wireless security gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 s current security configuration Syntax show summary Displays list of existing security policies 1 16 policy lt id gt Displays the specified security policy lt id gt Example admin network wireless security gt show summary Secu Policy Name Authen Encryption Associated WLANs 1 Default Manual no encrypt Lobby 2 WEP Demo Manual WEP 64 2nd Floor 3 Open Manual no encrypt lst Floor admin network wireless security gt show policy 1 Security Policy 1 Policy Name Default Authentication Manual Pre shared key No Authentication Encryption type no encryption Related Commands create Defines security parameters for the specified WLAN
204. ey information This value is disabled by default Specify a time period in seconds for broadcasting encryption key changes to MUs Set key broadcasts to a shorter time interval at least 30 seconds for tighter security on the WLAN s wireless connections Set key broadcasts to a longer time interval at most 80000 seconds to extend the key times for wireless connections Default is 86 400 seconds Configure the Key Settings area as needed to set an ASCII Passphrase and key values ASCII Passphrase 256 bit Key To use an ASCII passphrase and not a hexadecimal value select the checkbox and enter an alphanumeric string of 8 to 63 characters The alphanumeric string allows character spaces The AP 5131 converts the string to a numeric value This passphrase saves the administrator from entering the 256 bit key each time keys are generated To use a hexadecimal value and not an ASCII passphrase select the checkbox and enter 16 hexadecimal characters into each of the four fields displayed Default hexadecimal 256 bit keys for WPA TKIP include 1011121314151617 18191A1B1C1D1E1F 2021222324252627 28292A2B2C2D2E2F Click the Apply button to save any changes made within the WPA TKIP Settings field of the New Security Policy screen Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the WPA TKIP Settings field and return to the WLAN screen This reverts all settings to the last saved configuration 6 22 AP 5131 Access Point
205. ey prior to installing A N the AP 5131 A site survey is an excellent method of documenting areas of radio interference and providing a tool for AP 5131 placement 2 1 Precautions Before installing the AP 5131 verify the following e Do not install in wet or dusty areas without additional protection Contact a Symbol representative for more information e Verify the environment has a continuous temperature range between 20 C to 50 C 2 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 2 2 Package Contents Check package contents for the correct model AP 5131 and applicable AP 5131 accessories Each available configuration at a minimum contains the following e AP 5131 two models available e Single 802 11a g radio external antenna Part No AP 5131 4002X WW e Dual 802 11a g radios external antenna Part No AP 5131 1304X WW e Software and Documentation CD ROM e AP 5131 Install Guide Part No 72 70931 01 e Accessories Bag 4 rubber feet for desk mounting and a LED light pipe badge and label for above the ceiling installations 2 2 1 Available Product Configurations An AP 5131 can be ordered in the following access point and accessory combinations Symbol Part Description AP 5131 13040 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Dual Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Software and Documentation CD ROM Accessories Bag AP 5131 13041 WW AP 5131 802 11a g Dual Radio Access Point AP 5131 Install Guide Power Injector Part
206. f characters that can be used for the name is 31 Available On Use the Available On checkboxes to define which AP 5131 radio 802 11a or 802 11b g the target WLAN will reside 5 26 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Max MUs Use the Max MUs field to define the number of MUs permitted to interoperate within the new or revised WLAN The maximum and default is 127 Select a number that is appropriate with the intended radio traffic of that WLAN s radio coverage area NOTE If 802 114 is selected as the radio used for the WLAN the WLAN cannot use a Kerberos supported security policy 4 Configure the Security field as required to set the data protection requirements for the WLAN Security Policy Use the scroll down Security Policies menu to select the security scheme best suited for the new or revised WLAN Click the Create button to jump to the New Security Policy screen where a new policy can be created to suit the needs of the WLAN For more information see Configuring WLAN Security Policies on page 5 27 MU Access Control Select an ACL policy suiting the WLAN s MU introperability requirements from the drop down menu If the existing ACL policies do not satisfy the requirements of the WLAN anew ACL policy can be created by pressing the Create button For more information see Configuring a WLAN Access Control List ACL on page 5 29 Kerberos User Name Displays the read only Kerboros User Name used to assoc
207. ference Guide Symbol Technologies provides its customers with prompt and accurate customer support Use the Symbol Support Center as the primary contact for any technical problem question or support issue involving Symbol products If the Symbol Customer Support specialists cannot solve a problem access to all technical disciplines within Symbol becomes available for further assistance and support Symbol Customer Support responds to calls by email telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in individual contractual agreements When contacting Symbol Customer Support please provide the following information e serial number of unit e model number or product name e software type and version number B 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide North American Contacts Inside North America Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 Telephone 1 631 738 2400 1 800 SCAN 234 Fax 1 631 738 5990 Symbol Support Center for warranty and service information telephone 1 800 653 5350 fax 631 738 5410 Email support symbol com International Contacts Outside North America Symbol Technologies Symbol Place Winnersh Triangle Berkshire RG41 5TP United Kingdom 0800 328 2424 Inside UK 44 118 945 7529 Outside UK Customer Support B 3 Web Support Sites MySymbolCare http www symbol com services msc Symbol Services Homepage http symbol com services Symbol Software Updates
208. figuring certificate settings using the applet GUI see Creating Self Certificates on page 4 9 Command Line Interface Reference 8 139 AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt listprivkey Description Lists the names of private keys Syntax listprivkey Lists all private keys For information on configuring certificate settings using the applet GUI see mporting a CA Certificate on page 4 8 8 140 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 4 4 System SNMP Commands AP5131 gt admin system gt snmp Description Displays the SNMP submenu The items available under this command are shown below access Goes to the SNMP access submenu traps Goes to the SNMP traps submenu x Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 141 8 4 4 1 System SNMP Access Commands AP5131 gt admin system snmp access Description Displays the SNMP Access menu The items available under this command are shown below show Shows SNMP v3 engine ID add Adds SNMP access entries delete Deletes SNMP access entries list Lists SNMP access entries vs Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 142 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system snmp access gt show Description Shows the SNMP v3 engine ID Syntax show eid Show
209. fined Default is 120 seconds Inactivity interval resulting in the AP terminating its connection Default is 120 minutes Sets SNMP interface values through the WAN port Sets SNMP interface values through the LAN port Designates a Radius server is used in the authentication verification Specifies the IP address the Remote Dial In User Service RADIUS server Specifies the port on which the RADIUS server is listening Default is 1812 Defines the shared secret password for RADIUS server authentication For information on configuring AP 5131 access settings using the applet GUI see Configuring Data Access on page 4 5 8 128 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system access gt show Description Displays the current AP 5131 access permissions and timeout values Syntax show Shows all of the current system access settings for the AP 5131 Example admin system access gt show applet http access from lan enable applet http access from wan enable applet https access from lan enable applet https access from wan enable http s timeout 100 cli telnet access from lan enable cli telnet access from wan enable cli ssh access from lan enable cli ssh access from wan enable ssh server authentication timeout 120 ssh server inactive timeout 120 snmp access from lan enable snmp access from wan enable admin authentication mode local Related Commands set Defines the AP 5131
210. g KeyGuard negotiation takes place between the access point and MU upon association The access point can use KeyGuard with Symbol MUs KeyGuard is only supported on Symbol MUs making it a Symbol proprietary security mechanism For additional information on configuring KeyGuard on the AP 5131 see Configuring KeyGuard Encryption on page 6 17 1 1 8 5 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Using TKIP Encryption Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a security standard for systems operating with a Wi Fi wireless connection WEP s lack of user authentication mechanisms is addressed by WPA Compared to WEP WPA provides superior data encryption and user authentication WPA addresses the weaknesses of WEP by including e a per packet key mixing function e amessage integrity check e an extended initialization vector with sequencing rules 1 7 1 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide e are keying mechanism WPA uses an encryption method called Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP WPA employs 802 1X and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP For additional information con configuring WPA see Configuring WPA Using TKIP on page 6 19 1 1 8 6 WPA2 CCMP 802 111 Encryption WPAZ is a newer 802 111 standard that provides even stronger wireless security than Wi Fi Protected Access WPA and WEP Counter mode CBC MAC Protocol CCMP is the security standard used by the Advanced Encryption Standard AES AES serves the same function TKIP does for WP
211. g area and mark points on the midline for the screws 3 At each point drill a hole in the wall insert an anchor screw into the anchor the wall mounting screw and stop when there is 1mm between the screw head and the wall If pre drilling a hole the recommended hole size is 2 8mm 0 11in if the screws are going directly into the wall and 6mm 0 23in if wall anchors are being used 4 f required install and attach a security cable to the AP 5131 lock port 5 Place the large corner of each of the mount slots over the screw heads 6 Slide the AP 5131 down along the mounting surface to hang the mount slots on the screw heads 7 Attach the radio antennae to their correct connectors 2 14 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide A CAUTION Both the Dual and Single Radio model AP 5131s use RSMA type antenna connectors On the Dual Radio AP 5131 a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for both Radio 1 2 4 GHz and Radio 2 5 2 GHz Two dots designate the secondary antenna for both Radio 1 and Radio 2 On Single Radio models a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for Radio 1 and two dots designate the secondary antenna for Radio 1 8 Cable the AP 5131 using either the Symbol power injector solution or an approved line cord and power supply NOTE The AP 5131 must be mounted with the RJ45 cable connector oriented upwards to ensure proper operation
212. g bess Han Mora T NonUncast geste pan Average Sore less Tran aim Average Fevies grease Par t Res Droppet gre ae fa Urdecrptetee greater Pan 4 z Asoocisted MUs g e aa Par Minimum FP ac hots Mirim number of pachets requres for a trap to See 2 Configure the RF Trap Thresholds field to define device threshold values for SNMP traps NOTE Average Bit Speed of Non Unicast Average Signal Average Retries Dropped and Undecryptable are not AP 5131 statistics Pkts s Throughput Average Bit Speed Non Unicast Average Signal Enter a maximum threshold for the total throughput in Pps Packets per second Set a maximum threshold for the total throughput in Mbps Megabits per second Enter a minimum threshold for the average bit speed in Mbps Megabits per second Set a maximum threshold for the total percentage of packets that are non unicast for each device Non unicast packets include broadcast and multi cast traffic Enter a minimum threshold for the average signal strength in dBm for each device 4 26 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Average Retries Set a maximum threshold for the average number of retries for each device Dropped Enter a maximum threshold for the total percentage of packets dropped for each device Dropped packets can be caused by poor RF signal or interference on the channel Undecryptable Define a maximum threshold for the total percentage of packets
213. ge 6 33 Command Line Interface Reference 8 47 AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt delete Description Deletes VPN tunnel entries Syntax delete Deletes all VPN entries lt name gt Deletes VPN entries lt name gt Example admin network wan vpn gt list Tunnel Name Type Remote IP Mask Remote Gateway Local WAN IP Eng2EngAnnex Manual 192 168 32 2 24 192 168 33 1 192 168 24 198 SJSharkey Manual 206 107 22 45 27 206 107 22 2 209 235 12 55 admin network wan vpn gt delete Eng2EngAnnex admin network wan vpn gt list SJSharkey Manual 206 107 22 45 27 206 107 22 2 209 235 12 55 admin network wan vpn gt For information on configuring VPN using the applet GUI see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 8 48 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt list Description Lists VPN tunnel entries Syntax list lt c gt Lists all tunnel entries lt name gt Lists detailed information about tunnel named lt name gt Note that the lt name gt must match case with the name of the VPN tunnel entry Example admin network wan vpn gt list Eng2EngAnnex Manual 192 168 32 2 24 192 168 33 1 192 168 24 198 SJSharkey Manual 206 107 22 45 27 206 107 22 2 209 235 12 55 admin network wan vpn gt list SJSharkey Name SJSharkey Local Subnet 1 Tunnel Type Manual Remote IP 206 107 22 45 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 224 Remote Security Gateway 206 107 22 2 Loc
214. gout before the applet is closed 6 11 1 Configuring Manual Key Settings A transform set is a combination of security protocols and algorithms applied to IPSec protected traffic During security association SA negotiation both gateways agree to use a particular transform set to protect data flow A transform set specifies one or two IPSec security protocols either AH ESP or both and specifies the algorithms to use for the selected security protocol If you specify an ESP protocol in a transform set specify just an ESP encryption transform or both an ESP encryption transform and an ESP authentication transform When the particular transform set is used during negotiations for IPSec SAs the entire transform set the combination of protocols algorithms and other settings must match a transform set at the remote end of the gateway Use the Manual Key Settings screen to specify the transform sets used for VPN access Configuring Access Point Security 6 37 To configure manual key settings for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt VPN from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Refer to the VPN Tunnel Config field select the Manual Key Exchange checkbox and click the Manual Key Settings button Manual Key Settings AH pstenbeanen MDS Patar 22 Hexadecimal characters Inbound AM ALONE BED Many FRPP EFEREESEEEEEREEOEEEEEESES ESS Ouebound At ALES IBON KEY FEET EEETESERTESE TES ESET ESETTEEE tadbouad SPI tex to Ov
215. grams delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Symbol products Symbol Spectrum One and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies Inc Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www symbol com ntent About This Guide iv AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Ae Ee a E ET T EE ESE E AEAEE NEEE TET E e ee E E E E E T T Kerberos SUM BNMGAT ON ssas irrid on ie rE EET EE 1 5 EAP STEUER e e a eet EE 1 6 WEF ENDON so ocencsnieeiriinitri kan eiA EEN ENEA SE 1 6 KeyGu
216. gt lt authtype gt lt authalgo gt lt phrase gt lt encalgo gt lt lifetime gt lt group gt Defines the name of the tunnnel lt name gt the Security Association Life Time lt 300 65535 gt applies to in seconds Sets the Operation Mode of IKE for lt name gt to Main or Aggriessive Sets the Local ID type for IKE authentication for lt name gt 1 to 13 characters to lt idtype gt IP FQDN or UFODN Sets the Remote ID type for IKE authentication for lt name gt 1 to 13 characters to lt idtype gt IP FQDN or UFODN Sets the Local ID data for IKE authentication for lt name gt to lt idtype gt This value is not required when the ID type is set to IP Sets the Local ID data for IKE authentication for lt name gt to lt idtype gt This value is not required when the ID type is set to IP Sets the IKE Authentication type for lt name gt to lt authtype gt one of PSK RSA or DSS Sets the IKE Authentication Algorithm for lt name gt to MD5 or SHAT Sets the IKE Authentication passphrase for lt name gt to lt phrase gt Sets the IKE Encryption Algorithm for lt name gt to lt encalgo gt one of DES 3DES AES128 AES192 or AES256 Sets the IKE Key life time in seconds for lt name gt to lt lifetime gt Sets the IKE Diffie Hellman Group for lt name gt to either G768 or G1024 For information on configuring VPN using the applet GUI see Configuring VPN Tunnels on pa
217. h Aphciaaabonwdcceek BONO System Log Commands 00 00 ccc cece cece eee neces 8 155 System Configuration Update Commands 0 00 00s 8 161 Firmware Update Commands an no anaona ainainen 8 168 System Test Commands ee ee tee rn ee SUSHES COMMANIS E N leaiiastaeweoen sdcddenveadaaia Melee Appendix A Technical Specifications aoo e e e 6 okt cine onde seed eases bedeeeedabieetedeeced A 1 Electrical Characteristics nnna cece cece nee A 2 E e EE E E E E E EE A 3 Antenna SpecificatiOnS sess donexncvacedegeceevexrsindagdewatcuaendages A 3 PA Ghz Antemna MaK eeissieririsfirtsrierirririd rreri riria A 4 ML 2499 1IPNAZ oui eeccnardapactapanedanae wena ARRENA A 4 MALS BRNO ihe rh beheaded re ir Ee MASE oriri reot A 5 PA PAE BENE ON cicg ae otk apuneu trad epsa r aai ae A 5 Pal PAO O BGA OT cxd guages eese Seg ceerw ar geenwncntaweewes A 6 SZOK AMMA MANK 2 iced ocdeeiedaeedered bedrest hanere iset A 6 PAL SEP APATIT rers eeweceneanacndaeeweeadwoews ortega A 7 ME OS HP AIO oie Paeeiakips r irer eriak te srice A 9 NAL 208 VPINAL O1 yo ioc cv eer douneds sige nied eae wre deeb ena A 12 Additional Antenna Components 00 00 e cece eee ees A 14 Antenna Accessory Connectors Cable Type andLength A 15 County GOUES lt 5 occa dca siosio drt anan REAREA ded Pre bn aes E A 15 Appendix B Customer Support x AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide About This Gui Introd
218. he Total column displays the average bit speed in Mbps for a given time period on the MU This includes all packets sent and received The number in black represents average bit speed for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents average bit speed for the last hour Consider increasing the data rate of the AP if the current bit speed does not meet network requirements For more information see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 The associated MU must also be set to the higher rate to interoperate with the AP 5131 at that data rate of Non unicast pkts Displays the percentage of the total packets for the selected mobile unit that are non unicast Non unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour 6 Refer to the RF Status field to view MU signal and signal disturbance information 7 24 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Avg MU Signal Displays RF signal strength in dBm for the target MU The number in black represents signal information for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents signal information for the last hour Avg MU Noise Displays RF noise for the target MU The number in black represents noise for the last 30 seconds the number in blue represents noise for the last hour Avg MU SNR Displays the Signal to Noise Ratio SNR for the target MU Th
219. he list of inbound NAT entries For an overview of the AP 5131 NAT options available using the applet GUI see Configuring Network Address Translation NAT Settings on page 5 18 Command Line Interface Reference 8 43 8 3 2 2 Network WAN VLAN Commands AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt Description Displays the VPN submenu The items available under this command include add Adds VPN tunnel entries set Sets key exchange parameters delete Deletes VPN tunnel entries list Lists VPN tunnel entries reset Resets all VPN tunnels stats Lists security association status for the VPN tunnels ikestate Displays an Internet Key Exchange IKE summary Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI For an overview of the AP 5131 VPN options available using the applet GUI see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 8 44 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wan vpn gt add Description Adds a VPN tunnel entry Syntax add lt name gt lt LWanlP gt lt RSubnetIP gt lt RSubnetMask lt RGatewaylP gt Creates a tunnel lt name gt 1 to 13 characters to gain access through local WAN IP lt LWanIP gt from the remote subnet with address lt RSubnet P gt and subnet mask lt RSubnetMask gt using the remote gateway lt RGateway P gt Example admin network wan vpn gt add SJSharkey 209 235 44 31 206 107 22 46 255 255 255
220. he manufacturer A maximum of 200 MU MAC addresses can be added to the New Edit MU ACL Policy screen Access for the listed Use the drop down list to select Allow or Deny This rule applies Mobile Units to the MUs listed in the table For example if the adoption rule is to Allow access is granted for all MUs except those listed in the table Add Click the Add button to create a new entry using only the Start MAC column to specify a MAC address or uses both the Start MAC and End MAC columns to specify a range of MAC addresses Delete Click the Delete button to remove a selected list entry 5 Click Apply to save any changes to the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screen and return to the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost 6 Click Cancel to securely exit the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screen and return to the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen 7 Click Logout within the Mobile Unit Access Control List Configuration screen to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 5 3 1 3 Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy The AP 5131 can keep a list of QoS policies that can be used from the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screens to map to individual WLANs Use the Quality of Service Configuration screen to
221. hentication buttons to specify the authentication server connection method Local The AP 5131 verifies the authentication connection 10 System Configuration 4 7 Radius Designates that a Radius server is used in the authentication credential verification If using this option the connected PC is required to have its Radius credentials verified with an external Radius server Additionally the Radius Server s Active Directory should have a valid user configured and have a PAP based Remote Access Policy configured for Radius Admin Authentication to work Use the Radius Server if a Radius server has been selected as the authentication server enter the required network address information Radius Server IP Specify the numerical non DNS name IP address of the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service Radius server Radius is a client server protocol and software enabling remote access servers to communicate with a server used to authenticate users and authorize access to the requested system or service Port Specify the port on which the server is listening The Radius server typically listens on ports 1812 default port Shared Secret Define a shared secret for authentication on the server The shared secret is required to be the same as the shared secret defined on the Radius server Use shared secrets to verify Radius messages with the exception of the Access Request message sent by a Radius enabled device configured with the s
222. ian gt show Description Displays current VLAN parameter settings the AP 5131 These parameters are defined with the set command Syntax show name Displays the existing list of AP 5131 VLAN names config Shows the target VLAN configuration wlan Displays the WLAN summary list Example admin network lan vlan gt show name Index VLAN ID VLAN Name 1 1 VLAN_1 2 2 VLAN_2 3 3 VLAN_3 4 4 VLAN_4 admin network lan vlan gt show config Management VLAN Tag v1 Native VLAN Tag 72 WLAN Lobby mapped to VLAN VLAN 2 VLAN Mode static admin network lan vlan gt show wlan Lobby 101 lla 2 Open Voice For information on displaying the AP 5131 VLAN screens using the applet GUI see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 8 18 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan vlan gt set Description Sets VLAN parameters for the AP 5131 Syntax set mgmt tag lt id gt Defines the Management VLAN tag 1 4095 native tag lt id gt Sets the Native VLAN tag 1 4095 mode Sets WLAN VLAN mode WLAN 1 16 to either dynamic or static Example admin network lan vlan gt set mgmt tag 1 admin network lan vlan gt set native tag 1 admin network lan vlan gt show config Management VLAN Tag I Native VLAN Tag 72 WLAN Lobby mapped to VLAN 22 VLAN Mode static For information on configuring VLANs using the applet GUI see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 AP5131 gt admin network l
223. iate the wireless client This value is the ESSID of the AP 5131 Kerberos Password Enter a Kerberos password if Kerberos has been selected as the security scheme from within the Security Policies field The field is grayed out if Kerberos has not been selected for the WLAN For information on configuring Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos Authentication on page 6 9 5 Configure the Advanced field as required to set MU interoperability permissions secure beacon transmissions broadcast ESSID acceptance and Quality of Service QoS policies Network Management 5 27 Disallow MU to MU The AP 5131 s MU MU Disallow feature prohibits MUs from Communication communicating with each other even if they are on different WLANs assuming one of the WLANs is configured to disallow MU MU communication Therefore if an MU s WLAN is configured for MU MU disallow it will not be able to communicate with any other MUs connected to this AP 5131 Use Secure Beacon Select the Use Secure Beacon checkbox to not transmit the AP 5131 s ESSID If a hacker tries to find an ESSID via an MU the AP 5131 s ESSID does not display since the ESSID is not in the beacon Symbol recommends keeping the option enabled to reduce the likelihood of hacking into the WLAN Accept Broadcast Select the Accept Broadcast ESSID checkbox to associate an ESSID MU that has a blank ESSID regardless of which ESSID the AP 5131 is currently using Sites with heightened security requi
224. iates with an AP 5131 it notifies the AP 5131 of its activity status The AP 5131 responds by buffering packets received for the MU PSP mode is used to extend an MU s battery life by enabling the MU to sleep during periods of inactivity 1 1 17 Statistical Displays The AP 5131 can display robust transmit and receive statistics for the WAN and LAN ports WLAN stats can be displayed collectively and individually for enabled WLANs Transmit and receive statistics are available for the AP 5131 s 802 11a and 802 11b g radios An advanced radio statistics page is also available to display retry histograms for specific data packet retry information Associated MU stats can be displayed collectively and individually for specific MUs An echo ping test is also available to ping specific MUs to assess association strength Finally the AP 5131 can detect and display the properties of other APs detected within the AP 5131 s radio coverage area The type of AP detected can be displayed as well as the properties of individual APs For information on available AP 5131 statistical displays and the values they represent see Monitoring Statistics on page 7 1 1 1 18 Transmit Power Control The AP 5131 has a configurable power level for each radio This enables the network administrator to define the antenna s transmission power level in respect to the AP 5131 s placement or network requirements as defined in the AP 5131 site survey For detailed instr
225. ic IP address The AP 5131 can only use a Power over Ethernet device when connected to the LAN port For more information on configuring the AP 5131 LAN port see Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5 1 A Wide Area Network WAN is a widely dispersed telecommunications network In a corporate environment the WAN port might connect to a larger corporate network For a small business the WAN port might connect to a DSL or cable modem to access the Internet Regardless network address information must be configured for the AP 5131 s intended mode of operation For information on configuring the AP 5131 s WAN port see Configuring WAN Settings on page 5 13 The LAN and WAN port MAC addresses can be located within the LAN and WAN Stats screens For information on locating the AP 5131 MAC addresses see Viewing WAN Statistics on page 7 2 and Viewing LAN Statistics on page 7 5 1 1 3 Multiple Mounting Options The AP 5131 rests on a flat surface attaches to a wall mounts under a ceiling or above a ceiling attic Choose a mounting option based on the physical environment of the coverage area Do not mount the AP 5131 in a location that has not been approved in an AP 5131 radio coverage site survey For detailed information on the mounting options available for the AP 5131 see Mounting the AP 5131 on page 2 11 1 1 4 Antenna Support for 2 4 GHz and 5 2 GHz Radios The AP 5131 supports several 802 11a and 802 11b g radio antennas Select the ant
226. ice Prioritization Each AP 5131 WLAN has the capability of having its QoS policy configured to prioritize the network traffic requirements for associated MUs A WLAN QoS page is available for each enabled WLAN on either the AP 5131 802 11a or 802 11b g radio Use the QoS page to enable voice prioritization for devices to receive the transmission priority they may not normally receive over other data traffic Voice prioritization allows the AP 5131 to assign priority to voice traffic over data traffic and if necessary assign legacy voice supported devices non WMM supported voice devices additional priority For information on configuring voice prioritization over other voice enabled devices see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 1 11 1 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 1 16 Support for CAM and PSP MUs The AP 5131 supports both CAM and PSP powered MUs CAM Continuously Aware Mode MUs leave their radios on continuously to hear every beacon and message transmitted These systems operate without any adjustments by the AP 5131 A beacon is a uniframe system packet broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized A beacon includes the ESSID AP 5131 MAC address Broadcast destination addresses a time stamp a DTIM Delivery Traffic Indication Message and the TIM Traffic Indication Map PSP Power Save Polling MUs power off their radios for short periods When a Symbol MU in PSP mode assoc
227. ide AP5131 gt admin system fw update gt set Description Defines AP 5131 firmware update settings and user permissions Syntax set fw auto cfg auto iface file path server user passwd lt mode gt lt mode gt lt wan lan gt lt name gt lt path gt lt ip gt lt name gt lt password gt When enabled updates device firmware each time the firmware versions are found to be different between the AP 5131 and the specified firmware on the remote system When enabled updates device configuration file each time the confif file versions are found to be different between the AP 5131 and the specified LAN or WAN interface Defines the target interface for version updates if the fw auto and or cfg auto options are enabled Defines the firmware file name Specifies a path for the file The IP address for the FIP TFIP server used for the firmware and or config file update Specifies a username for FIP server login Specifies a password for FTP server login Default is symbol For information on updating AP 5131 device firmware using the applet GUI see Updating Device Firmware on page 4 34 Command Line Interface Reference 8 171 AP5131 gt admin system fw update gt update Description Executes the AP 5131 firmware update over the WAN or LAN port using either ftp or tftp Syntax update lt mode gt lt iface gt Defines the ftp ot tftp mode used to conduct the firmware update Specifies whether the update is e
228. idual MU from within the Scan Result field and click the Add to Allowed AP List button to move the AP into the Allowed APs table within the Active APs screen Additionally if necessary click the Add All to Allowed APs List button to move every device within the Scan Result table into the Allowed APs table within the Active APs screen Only use this option if you are sure all of the devices detected and displayed within the Scan Results table are non hostile APs Highlight a different MU from the Rogue AP enabled MUs field as needed to scan for additional rogue APs 6 60 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 6 Click Logout to return to the Rogue AP Detection screen The AP 5131 has functionality to display robust transmit and receive statistics for its WAN and LAN port Wireless Local Area Network WLAN stats can also be displayed collectively for each enabled WLAN as well as individually for up to 16 specific WLANs Transmit and receive statistics can also be displayed for the AP 5131 s 802 11a and 802 11b g radios An advanced radio statistics page is also available to display retry histograms for specific data packet retry information Associated MU stats can be displayed collectively for associated MUs and individually for specific Mus An echo ping test is also available to ping specific MUs to assess the strength of the AP association Finally the AP 5131 can detect and display the properties of other APs detected with
229. ield A new window displays for entering the IP address and range Transport Select a protocol from the drop down list For a detailed description of the protocols available see Available Protocols on page 6 30 Configuring Access Point Security 6 33 Src Ports Source The source port range determines which ports the firewall rule Ports applies to on the source IP address Click on the field to configure the source port range A new window displays to enter the starting and ending port ranges For rules where only a single port is necessary enter the same port in the start and end port fields Dst Ports Destination The destination port range determines which ports the firewall rule Ports applies to on the destination IP address Click on the field to configure the source port range A new window displays to enter the starting and ending ports in the range For rules where only a single port is necessary enter the same port in the start and end port fields 4 Click Apply to save any changes to the Advanced LAN Access screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Advanced LAN Access screen to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is clo
230. ield to set the maximum allowable header length at least 256 bytes Max Headers Use the Max Headers field to set the maximum number of headers allowed 12 5 Click Apply to save any changes to the Firewall screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost 6 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Firewall screen to the last saved configuration 7 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 6 10 1 Configuring LAN to WAN Access The AP 5131 LAN can be configured to communicate with the WAN side of the AP 5131 Use the LAN to WAN Access screen to allow deny access to the AP 5131 WAN protocols specify names and properties for existing protocols and enable pre configured protocols FTP TFP Telnet ect To configure AP 5131 subnet access 1 Select Network Configuration gt Firewall gt LAN to WAN Access from the AP 5131 menu tree 6 28 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide TEX b un van TA verve as n O Serer uF MUA gA TY vy Rad ragu st G lagomt Vara E Rogut AP Detector D s LAN be WAN Actone anced LAN Atte CO Rou i iune tuat AP 5131 symbol LAN to WAN Access v ai pretecot eerept DNS TCP 5 5 hange 2 C
231. ifier WLAN Name 802 11a Radio 802 11b g Radio Maximum MUs Security Policy MU Access Control Kerberos User Name Kerberos Password Disallow MU to MU Communication Use Secure Beacon Accept Broadcast ESSID QoS Policy 101 WLAN1 available not available 127 Default Default Default KKKKKKKK disable disable disable Default 8 60 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide admin network wireless wlan create gt show security Secu Policy Name Authen Encryption Associated WLANs 1 Default Manual no encrypt Front Lobby 2 WEP Demo Manual WEP 64 2nd Floor 3 Open Manual no encrypt Ist Floor admin network wireless wlan create gt show acl ACL Policy Name Associated WLANs 1 Default Front Lobby 2 Admin 3rd Floor 3 Demo Room 5th Floor admin network wireless wlan create gt show gos QOS Policy Name Associated WLANs 1 Default Front Lobby 2 Voice Audio Dept 3 Video Video Dept For information on creating a WLAN using the applet GUI see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 Command Line Interface Reference 8 61 AP5131 gt admin network wireless wlan gt edit Description Edits the properties of an existing WLAN policy Syntax edit lt index gt Edits the properties of an existing WLAN policy For information on editing a WLAN using the applet GUI see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 8 62 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 3 2 N
232. ight is entered If a WLAN has not been enabled from the Wireless screen it is not configurable using the Bandwidth Management screen To enable a specific WLAN see Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs on page 5 22 WLAN Name Displays the name of the WLAN This field is read only To change the name of the WLAN see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 Weight This column is not available unless Weighted Round Robin is selected Assign a weight to each WLAN This percentage equals the AP 5131 bandwidth share for that WLAN when network traffic is detected Weight This column is automatically updated with the appropriate WLAN bandwidth share when the Weight is modified QoS Policy Displays the name of the QoS policy defined for each WLAN within the Quality of Service for WLAN screen If no policy has been set the WLAN uses the default policy For information on assigning QoS policies for specific WLANs see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 4 Click Apply to save any changes to the Bandwidth Management screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Bandwidth Management screen to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout bef
233. ignated NTP server Time synchronization is recommended for the AP s network operations For sites using Kerberos authentication time synchronization is required Use the NTP Servers screen to enable NTP and specify the IP addresses and ports of available NTP Servers System Configuration 4 27 NOTE The current time is not set accurately when initially connecting to the AP 5131 Until a server is defined to provide the AP 5131 the correct time the AP 5131 displays 1970 01 01 00 00 00 as the default time To manage clock synchronization on the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt NTP Servers from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 mi 1970 01 01 1547 49 Servet Comfgeraaen Trap NIP Servers 2 TC a A re Enetee 1 Brn P Adsrevs Post tetas 127 ibd aris A States First Aternete Time Serer Oynctrostcasen interes Mias COLE Ensure the Current Time field reflects the appropriate time for the AP 5131 Time Displays the current time based on the AP 5131 system clock If NTP is disabled or if there are no servers available the system time displays the AP 5131 uptime starting at 1970 01 01 00 00 00 with the time and date advancing The displayed time auto updates every 5 seconds Refresh Click the Refresh button to update the displayed date and time Configure the Server Configuration field to define server network address information 3 required to acquire the AP 5131 networ
234. ilter enable max mime header length 8192 max mime headers 16 For information on configuring the Firewall options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6 25 Command Line Interface Reference 8 113 AP5131 gt admin network firewall gt set Description Defines the AP 5131 firewall parameters Syntax set mode lt mode gt nat timeout lt interval gt override lt mode gt syn lt mode gt src lt mode gt win lt mode gt ftp lt mode gt ip lt mode gt seq lt mode gt mime filter len lt length gt hdr lt count gt Example Enables or disables the firewall Defines the NAT interval Enables or disables subnet access override Enables or disables SYN flood attack check Enables or disables source routing check Enables or disables Winnuke attack check Enables or disables FIP bounce attack check Enables or disables IP unaligned timestamp check Enables or disables sequence number prediction check Enables or disables MIME flood attack check Sets the max header length in bytes as specified by lt length gt with value in range 256 34464 Sets the max number of headers as specified in lt count gt with value in range 12 34463 admin network firewall gt set mode enable admin network firewall gt set override enable admin network firewall gt set ftp enable admin network firewall gt set ip enable admin network firewall gt set seq
235. improperly can possibly void the warranty If the original shipping container was not kept contact Symbol to have another sent to you AP 5131 Introduction The Symbol AP 5131 Access Point AP provides a bridge between Ethernet wired LANs or WANs and wireless networks It provides connectivity between Ethernet wired networks and radio equipped mobile units MUs MUs include the full line of Symbol terminals bar code scanners adapters PC cards Compact Flash cards and PCI adapters and other devices The AP 5131 provides a maximum 54Mbps data transfer rate via each radio It monitors Ethernet traffic and forwards appropriate Ethernet messages to MUs over the network It also monitors MU radio traffic and forwards MU packets to the Ethernet LAN The AP 5131 is available in two models e A single radio version Part No AP 5131 4002X WW that can be configured as either an 802 11a access point or an 802 11b g access point e A dual radio version Part No AP 5131 1304X WW allowing both the 802 114 radio and the 802 11b g radio to function simultaneously If you are new to using an access point for managing your network refer to Theory of Operations on page 1 14 for an overview on wireless networking fundamentals 1 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 1 Feature Overview The Symbol AP 5131 has the following features e Single or Dual Mode Radio Options e Separate LAN and WAN Ports e Multiple Mounting Options e A
236. in the AP 5131 radio coverage area The type of AP detected can be displayed as well as the properties of individual APs See the following sections for more details on viewing statistics for the AP 5131 e Viewing WAN Statistics 7 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide e Viewing LAN Statistics e Viewing Wireless Statistics e Viewing Radio Statistics Summary e Viewing MU Statistics Summary e Viewing Known Access Point Statistics 7 1 Viewing WAN Statistics Use the AP 5131 WAN Stats screen to view real time statistics for monitoring the AP 5131 activity through its Wide Area Network WAN port The Information field of the WAN Stats screen displays basic WAN information generated from settings on the WAN screen The Received and Transmitted fields display statistics for the cumulative packets bytes and errors received and transmitted through the WAN interface since it was last enabled or the AP was last rebooted The AP 5131 WAN Stats screen is view only with no configurable data fields To view AP 5131 WAN Statistics 1 Select Status and Statistics gt WAN Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symboj Se oy WAN Stats L Cons 1 3 TAr b FI vee r HO MUAC Status Enatees i amp 56 HW Address ODADFETIACSE R J PAbhess 15723592177 L 19002 1 thy Mesh 2552552550 ita U Us Speed 100 Mops Recevet Traseenited Referers 1 Eros 0 Ft Pachets 876052 Ke Dropped 0 x Packets 3650 TX Cropped 0 Bees 13531179 RX Ove
237. in the AP 5131 Router Table is dynamically generated from settings applied on the WAN screen The destination for each subnet is its IP address The subnet mask or network mask and gateway settings are those belonging to each subnet Displayed interfaces are those associated with destination IP addresses To change any of the network address information within the WAN screen see Configuring WAN Settings on page 5 13 3 Use the User Defined Routes field to add or delete static routes The User Defined Routes field allows the administrator to view add or delete internal static dedicated routes Internal static routes are dedicated routes for data that travels from the WAN through the AP 5131 and to a specified location a Click the Add button to create a new table entry b Highlight an entry and click the Del delete button to remove an entry c Specify the destination IP address subnet mask and gateway information for the internal static route d Select an enabled subnet from the Interface s column s drop down menu to complete the table entry Information in the Metric column is a user defined value from 1 to 65535 used by router protocols to determine the best hop routes Click the Apply button to save the changes Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed Security measures for the AP 5131 and its WLANs are critical Use the
238. ing it Select the Advanced Settings tab to strategically map BSSIDs to WLANs in order to define R fo20902 1ta Settings Advanced Settings WLAN SSS DCM Cyber Status Message them as primary WLANs AP 5131 t Rg pumos kouwi P 3 venie b TB Sec ps in Front Lobtry Open J Cordguraton is Or Phan sigaro Ind Floor Sales wert 28 Pal Configuratos is Or F Mas 1th Ind Floor HA WEP ES cs Configuration is O Mate 29e2 Ita gt Minse Managernere Peg Das 5 44 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Defining Primary WLANs allows an administrator to dedicate BSSIDs 4 BSSIDs are available for mapping to WLANs From that initial BSSID assignment Primary WLANs can be defined from within the WLANs assigned to BSSID groups 1 through 4 Each BSSID beacons only on the primary WLAN The user should assign each WLAN to its own BSSID In cases where more than four WLANs are required WLANs should be grouped according to their security policies so all of the WLANs on a BSSID have the same security policy It is generally a bad idea to have WLANs with different security policies on the same BSSID as this will result in warning or error messages NOTE If using a single radio AP 5131 there are 4 BSSIDs available If using a dual radio AP 5131 4 BSSIDs for the 802 11b g radio and 4 BSSIDs for the 802 11a radio are available WLAN Lists the WLAN names available to the 802 1 1a or 802 11b g radio tha
239. io 802 11bg advanced gt set Description Defines advanced parameters for the target 802 11b g radio Syntax set wlan lt wlan name gt lt bssid gt Defines advanced WLAN to BSSID mapping for the target radio bss lt bss id gt lt wlan name gt Sets the BSSID to primary WLAN definition Example admin network wireless radio 802 11bg advanced gt set wlan demoroom 1 admin network wireless radio 802 11bg advanced gt set bss 1 demoroom For information on configuring Radio 1 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 8 86 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11a gt Description Displays a specific 802 11a radio submenu The items available under this command include Syntax show Displays 802 11a radio settings set Defines specific 802 11a radio parameters advanced Displays the Advanced radio settings submenu amp Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11a gt show Description Displays specific 802 114 radio settings Syntax show radio Displays specific 802 11a radio settings qos Displays specific 802 11a radio WMM QoS settings Example admin network wireless radio 802 11a gt show radio Radio Setting Information Placement MAC Address
240. ion server on the wired side of the AP 5131 All other packet types are blocked until the authentication server typically a RADIUS server verifies the MU s identity To configure 802 1x EAP authentication on the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu tree If security policies supporting 802 1x EAP exist they appear within the Security Configuration screen These existing policies can be used as is or their properties edited 6 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide by clicking the Edit button To configure a new security policy supporting 802 1x EAP continue to step 2 2 Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting 802 1x EAP The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encryption options selected 3 Select the 802 1x EAP radio button The 802 1x EAP Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen 4 Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy Name 0 802 1x EAP Setiegs Sena Settings Advanced Settings Manevi Pre eared bey No mmhendcaton Server Seangs beter Paman Secentary 5 OQ tEr Radus SererAddrese 157 204 12 10 Radus Pert a 1812 Ercrstor Radus Samed Gout murcapse werner fut Reathanicstion Ratus Accourting 64 40 Dt bay zic Reastest anen WEP 178 104 bt key Vayeart w Enatee Rewstherte aon YeATKIF Posos o0 OSOON
241. ions include None ESP or ESP AUTH Sets the ESP encryption algorithm Options include DES 3DES AES128 AES192 or AES256 Sets the Manual Encryption Key in ASCII for tunnel lt name gt and direction IN or OUT to the key lt esc key gt The size of the key depends on the encryption algorithm 16 hex characters for DES 48 hex characters for 3DES 32 hex characters for AES128 48 hex characters for AES192 64 hex characters for AES256 Sets the ESP authentication algorithm Options include IVID5 or SHA1 Sets ESP Authentication key lt name gt either for IN or OUT direction to lt auth key gt an ASCII string of hex characters If authalgo is set to IVID5 the provide 32 hex characters If authalgo is set to SHA provide 40 hex characters Sets N bound or QUT bound for AUTH Manual Authentication or ESP for lt name gt to lt spi gt a hex value more than OxFF lt value gt Enables or disables Perfect Forward Secrecy for lt name gt 8 46 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide salife lt name gt ike opmode myidtype remidtype myiddata remiddata authtype authalgo phrase encalgo lifetime group lt lifetime gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt name gt lt opmode gt lt idtype gt lt idtype gt lt idtype gt lt idtype
242. it Quits the CLI 8 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin gt Description Displays admin configuration options Syntax admin Accesses admin configuration Admin configuration requires an administration login Example admin gt admin Admin Password AP5131 gt admin gt help Description Displays general CLI user interface help Command Line Interface Reference 8 5 Syntax help Displays command line help using combinations of function keys for navigation Example admin gt help Restriction of lt ctrl q gt lt ctrl p gt Note admin gt display command help Eg show s 2 after a function argument is treated as an argument Eg admin lt network lan gt set lan enable Here is an invalid extra argument because it is after the argument enable go backwards in command history go forwards in command history 1 commands can be incomplete Eg sh sho show 2 introduces a comment and gets no resposne from CLI 8 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin gt passwd Description Changes the password for the admin login Syntax passwd Changes the admin password for AP 5131 access This requires typing the old admin password and entering a new password and confirming it Passwords can be up to 11 characters The AP 5131 CLI treats the following as invalid characters amp
243. ith an AP 5131 1 2 3 Select Status and Statistics gt MU Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree Select the Echo Test button from within the MU Stats Summary screen Specify the following ping test parameters Station Address The IP address of the target MU Refer to the MU Stats Summary screen for associated MU IP address information Number of ping Specify the number of ping packets to transmit to the target MU The default is 100 Packet Length Specify the length of each data packet transmitted to the target MU during the ping test The default is 100 bytes Packet Data Defines the data to be transmitted as part of the test Click the Ping button to begin transmitting ping packets to the station address specified Refer to the Number of Responses parameter to assess the number of responses from the target MU versus the number of pings transmitted by the AP 5131 Use the ratio of packets sent versus packets received to assess the link quality between MU and the AP 5131 Click the Ok button to exit the Echo Test screen and return to the MU Stats Summary screen 7 5 3 MU Authentication Statistics The AP 5131 can access and display authentication statistics for individual MUs To view AP 5131 authentication statistics for a specific MU 1 2 3 Select Status and Statistics gt MU Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree Highlight a target MU from within the MU List field Click the MU Authentication Statistics button Use the displa
244. itional AP 5131 roaming and key caching options This feature is applicable only when using 802 1x EAP authentication with WPA2 CCMP Pre Authentication Selecting this option enables an associated MU to carry out an 802 1x authentication with another AP 5131 before it roams to it The AP 5131 caches the keying information of the client until it roams to the other AP 5131 This enables the roaming client to start sending and receiving data sooner by not having to do 802 1x authentication after it roams This feature is only supported when 802 1x EAP authentication is enabled 9 Click the Apply button to save any changes made within the WPA2 CCMP Settings field of the New Security Policy screen Configuring Access Point Security 6 25 10 Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the WPA2 CCMP Settings field and return to the WLAN screen This reverts all settings to the last saved configuration 6 10 Configuring Firewall Settings The AP 5131 s firewall is a set of related programs located in the gateway on the WAN side of the AP 5131 The firewall uses a collection of filters to screen information packets for known types of system attacks Some of the AP 5131 s filters are continuously enabled others are configurable Use the AP 5131 s Firewall screen to enable or disable the configurable firewall filters Enable each filter for maximum security Disable a filter if the corresponding attack does not seem a threat in order to
245. ity of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 Command Line Interface Reference 8 95 AP5131 gt admin network wireless qos create gt Description Defines an AP 5131 QoS policy Syntax show Displays new QoS policy parameters set Sets QoS policy parameters add policy Completes the policy creation and exits the CLI session Cancels the QoS policy creation and exits the CLI session For information on configuring the WLAN QoS options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 8 96 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless qos edit gt Descripton Edits the properties of an existing QoS policy Syntax show set qos name lt index gt vop lt index gt mcast lt mac gt wmm qos lt index gt cwmin lt access category gt cwmax lt access category gt aifsn lt access category gt txops lt access category gt default change For information on configuring the WLAN QoS options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Setting the WLAN lt index gt lt index gt lt index gt lt index gt lt index gt Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 Displays QoS policy parameters Sets the QoS name for the specified index entry Enables or disables support by index for legacy VOIP devices Defines primary and secondary Multicast MAC address Enables or disables the QoS policy index sp
246. ivate key The corresponding public key is contained within the certificate and is called a CA certificate A browser must contain this CA certificate in its Trusted Root Library so that it can trust certificates signed by the CA s private key Depending on the public key infrastructure the digital certificate includes the owner s public key the certificate expiration date the owner s name and other public key owner information The AP 5131 can import and maintain a set of CA certificates to use as an authentication option for Virtual Private Network VPN access To use the certificate for a VPN tunnel define a tunnel and select the IKE settings to use either RSA or DES certificates For additional information on configuring VPN tunnels see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 Refer to your AP 5131 network administrator to obtain a CA certificate to import into the AP 5131 NOTE Verify the AP 5131 device time is synchronized with an NTP server before importing a certificate to avoid issues with conflicting date time stamps For more information see Configuring Network Time Protocol NTP on page 4 26 To import a CA certificate 1 Select System Configuration gt Certificate Mgmt gt CA Certificates from the AP 5131 menu tree System Configuration 4 9 AP 5131 CA Certificates aNgot a root CA Carticate Paste bom Capbears import root CA Covtticate View teeported rost CA Coticates 0 hd Ow miun n
247. k the Edit button to modify an existing WLAN New WLAN Edit WLAN Configuration ESSID ladmin area Name admin area Configuration ESSID demo room Name demo room v 802 11a Radio Avaitable On 7 802 113 Radio 802 11 big Radio Available On 802 11big Radio Maximum MUs 127 Maximum MUs 127 Security Security Security Policy Defaut v Create Security Policy Defaut Create MU Access Control Defaut Create MU Access Control Detauit create Kerberos UserName demo room Kerberos UserName admin area Kerberos Password Kerberos Password Advanced Advanced Disallow MU To MU Commmunication Disallow MU To MU Commmunication Use Secure Beacon Use Secure Beacon C Accept Broadcast ESSID _ Accept Broadcast ESSID Quality Of Service Policy Defaut gt Create Quality Of Service Policy Defaut Create Apply Cancel Heip Apply Cancel Help Java Anelet Window Either the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screen displays 3 Set the parameters in the Configuration field as required for the WLAN ESSID Enter the Extended Services Set Identification ESS D associated with the WLAN The WLAN name is auto generated using the ESSID until changed by the user The maximum number of characters that can be used for the ESSID is 32 Name Define or revise the name for the WLAN The name should be logical representation of WLAN coverage area engineering marketing etc The maximum number o
248. k time 4 28 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Enable NTP on AP 5131 Preferred Time Server First Alternate Time Server Second Alternate Time Server Synchronization Interval 4 Click Apply to save any changes to the NTP Servers screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the Select the Enable NTP on AP 5131 checkbox to allow a connection between the AP 5131 and one or more specified NTP servers Disable this option uncheck the checkbox if Kerberos is not in use and time synchronization is not necessary Specify the numerical non DNS name IP address and port of the primary NTP server The default port is 123 Optionally specify the numerical non DNS name IP address and port of an alternative NTP server to use for time synchronization if the primary NTP server goes down Optionally specify the numerical non DNS name and port of yet another NTP server for the greatest assurance of uninterrupted time synchronization Define an interval in minutes the AP 5131 uses to synchronize its system time with the NTP server A synchronization interval value from 15 minutes to 65535 minutes can be specified For implementations using Kerberos a synchronization interval of 15 minutes default interval or sooner is recommended settings displayed on NT
249. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Unsaved configuration changes will be lost when the AP 5131 is reset Please be sure to save changes before resetting kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Are you sure you want to restart the AP 5131 yes no AP 5131 Boot Firmware Version 1 0 0 0 xxx Copyright c Symbol Technologies Inc 2005 All rights reserved Press escape key to run boot firmware Power On Self Test testing ram pass testing nor flash pass testing nand flash pass testing ethernet pass For information on restarting the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 Command Line Interface Reference 8 123 AP5131 gt admin system gt show Description Displays high level AP 5131 system information Syntax show Displays AP 5131 system information Example admin system gt show system name BldgC system location Atlanta Field Office admin email address johndoe mycompany com system uptime 0 days 4 hours 41 minutes AP 5131 firmware version 1 0 0 0 xxx country code us admin system gt For information on displaying System Settings using the applet GUI see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 8 124 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system gt set Description Sets AP 5131 system parameters Syntax set name lt name gt Sets the AP 5131 system name to lt name gt
250. lable unless mu scan is enabled on channel lt mode gt Enables or disables on channel detection detector scan lt mode gt Enables or disables AP detector scan dual radio model only symbol ap lt mode gt Enables or disables the Authorize Any AP with a Symbol MAC address option applst ageout lt minutes gt Sets the approved AP age out time roglst ageout lt minutes gt Sets the rogue AP age out time Example admin network wireless rogue ap gt admin network wireless rogue ap gt set mu scan enable admin network wireless rogue ap gt set interval 10 admin network wireless rogue ap gt set on channel disable admin network wireless rogue ap gt set detector scan disable admin network wireless rogue ap gt set symbol ap enable admin network wireless rogue ap gt set applst ageout 10 admin network wireless rogue ap gt set roglst ageout 10 admin network wireless rogue ap gt show MU Scan enable MU Scan Interval 10 minutes On Channel disable Detector Radio Scan disable Detector Radio Band none Auto Authorize Symbol APs enable Approved AP age out 10 Rogue AP age out 10 For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 8 104 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap mu scan gt Description Displays the Rogue AP mu scan submenu Syntax st
251. let GUI see Viewing Wireless Statistics on page 7 8 For information on displaying individual WLAN statistics using the applet GUI see Viewing WLAN Statistics on page 7 10 Command Line Interface Reference 8 177 AP5131 gt admin stats gt send cfg Description Copies the AP 5131 s configuration to the AP 5131s within the known AP table Syntax send cfg Copies the AP 5131 s configuration to the AP 5131s within the known AP table Example admin stats gt send cfg admin stats gt For information on copying the AP 5131 config to another AP 5131 with the same ESSID using the applet GUI see Viewing Known Access Point Statistics on page 7 26 8 178 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin stats gt clear Description Clears the specified statistics counters to zero to begin new data calculations Syntax clear wan lan rf all wlan wlan all radio radio1 radio2 mu known ap Clears WAN statistics counters Clears LAN statistics counters Clears all RF data Clears all WLAN summary information Clears individual WLAN statistic counters Clears AP 5131 radio summary information Clears statistics counters specific to radio1 Clears statistics counters specific to radio2 Clears all MU statistic counters Clears Known AP statistic counters Command Line Interface Reference 8 179 AP5131 gt admin stats gt flash all leds Description Starts and stops the illumination of a s
252. list set Defines Ethernet Type Filter parameters add Adds an Ethernet Type Filter entry delete Removes an Ethernet Type Filter entry io Goes to the parent menu i Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 29 8 30 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan type filter gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 s current Ethernet Type Filter configuration Syntax show Displays the existing AP 5131 Type Filter configuration Example admin network lan type filter gt show Ethernet Type Filter mode allow index ethernet type 1 8137 For information on displaying the AP 5131 s type filter configuration using the applet GUI see Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5 11 Command Line Interface Reference 8 31 AP5131 gt admin network lan type filter gt set Description Defines the AP 5131 Ethernet Type Filter configuration Syntax set mode allow or deny Allows or denies the AP 5131 from processing a specified Ethernet data type Example admin network lan type filter gt set mode allow For information on configuring the AP 5131 s type filter settings using the applet GUI see Setting the Type Filter Configuration on page 5 11 8 32 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan type filter gt add Description Adds an Ethernet Type Filter entry
253. list Command Line Interface Reference 8 27 Index MAC Address ou A WN Pe 00A0F8112233 00A0F8102030 00A0F8112234 00A0F8112235 00A0F8112236 10 1 2 4 10 10 1 2 10 1 2 3 192 160 24 6 192 169 24 7 admin network lan dhcp gt delete 1 index mac address amp WD e 00A0F8102030 00A0F8112234 00A0F8112235 00A0F8112236 10 10 1 2 10 1 2 3 192 160 24 6 192 169 24 7 admin network lan dhcp gt delete all index mac address For information on deleting client MAC and IP address information using the applet GUI see Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5 10 8 28 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan dhcp gt list Description Lists static DHCP address assignments Syntax list lt idx gt Lists the static DHCP address assignments Example admin network lan dhcp gt list Index MAC Address IP Address 1 00A0F8112233 10 1 2 4 2 00A0F8102030 10 10 1 2 3 00A0F8112234 10 1 2 3 4 00A0F8112235 192 160 24 6 5 00A0F8112236 192 169 24 7 admin network lan dhcp gt For information on listing client MAC and IP address information using the applet GUI see Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5 10 8 3 1 3 Network Type Filter Commands AP5131 gt admin network lan type filter gt Description Displays the AP 5131 Type Filter submenu The items available under this command include show Displays the current Ethernet Type exception
254. losed 7 4 Viewing Radio Statistics Summary Select the Radio Stats Summary screen to view high level information radio name type number of associated MUs etc for the radio s enabled on an AP 5131 Individual radio statistics can be displayed as well by selecting a specific radio from within the AP 5131 menu tree To view high level AP 5131 radio statistics 1 Select Status and Statistics gt Radio Summary from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol 2 Radio Stats Summary rris rr O07 e aa i y Ratio Sammer 7 Fates G02 tiigi Stavet Ra Hg MU Stat L a anonn AP Gytters Natse AP 51 71 2 Refer to the Radio Summary field to reference AP 5131 radio information Type MUs T put ABS RF Util NU Retries Monitoring Statistics 7 15 Displays the type of radio either 802 11a or 802 11b g currently deployed by the AP 5131 To configure the radio type see Setting the WLAN s Radio Configuration on page 5 36 Displays the total number of MUs currently associated with each AP 5131 radio Displays the total throughput in Megabits per second Mbps for each AP 5131 radio listed To adjust the data rate for a specific radio see Configuring the 802 1 1a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Displays the Average Bit Speed ABS in Megabits per second Mbps for each AP 5131 radio Displays the approximate RF Utilization for each AP 5131 radio Displays the percentage of the total
255. lp 4 Configure the Performance field to set the preamble thresholds values data rates and QoS values for the radio Support Short The preamble is approximately 8 bytes of packet header generated Preamble by the AP 5131 and attached to the packet prior to transmission from the 802 11b radio The preamble length for 802 1 1b transmissions is data rate dependant The short preamble is 50 shorter than the long preamble Leave the checkbox unselected if in a mixed MU AP environment as MUs and the AP 5131 are required to have the same RF Preamble settings for interoperability The default is Disabled The preamble length for 802 11a and 802 11g transmissions is the same with no long or short preamble lengths RTS Threshold RTS allows the AP 5131 to use RTS Request To Send on frames longer than the specified length The default is 2341 bytes 5 41 5 42 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Set RF QoS Click the Set RF QoS button to display the Set RF QOS screen to set QoS parameters for the AP 5131 radio This setting should not be confused with the QoS configuration screen used for a WLAN The Set RF QoS screen initially appears with default values displayed Configure the CW min and CW max contention window AIFSN Arbitrary Inter Frame Space Number and TXOPs Time for each Access Category These are the QoS policies for the 802 11a or 802 11b g radio not the QoS policies configured for the WLAN as created or edited from
256. m number of server retries to lt count gt 1 255 Note The WEP authentication mechanism saves up to four different keys one for each WLAN It is not requirement to set all keys but you must associate a WLAN with the same keys Sets the encryption type to lt type gt one of none wep40 wep104 keyguard tkip or ccmp for WLAN lt idx gt The passkey used as a text abbreviation for the entire key length 4 32 tkip ccmp index hex key ascii key rotate mode interval type key phrase rotate mode interval type key phrase mixed mode preauth lt key index gt lt kidx gt lt key string gt lt kidx gt lt key string gt lt mode gt lt time gt lt key type gt lt 256 bit key gt lt ascii phrase gt lt mode gt lt time gt lt key type gt lt 256 bit key gt lt ascii phrase gt lt mode gt lt mode gt Command Line Interface Reference 8 67 Selects the WEP KeyGuard key from one of the four potential values of lt key index gt 1 4 Sets the WEP KeyGuard key for key index lt kidx gt 1 4 for WLAN lt kidx gt to lt key string gt Sets the WEP KeyGuard key for key index lt kidx gt 1 4 for WLAN lt kidx gt to lt key string gt Note TKIP parameters are only affected if tkip is selected as the encryption type Enables or disabled the broadcast key Sets the broadcast key rotation interval to lt time gt in seconds 300
257. mands 000e eee e ee 8 23 Network Type Filter Commands 00 0 0 ccc eee sees 8 29 Network WAN Commands 0000 c cece cece eee eens 8 34 Network WAN NAT Commands 0000e0 eee ee 8 37 Network WAN VLAN Commands 002020 20 8 43 Network WAN App Commands 0 0 0 0 22 8 52 Network Wireless Commands 0 00 0 cee ec eee eee eee B56 Network WLAN Commands 0 0 0 cece eee eee 8 57 Network Security Commands 0 0000 cece eee 8 62 Network ACL Commands Labia PESTE E ERE Network Radio Configuration Commands ere ips dred e terria AD Network Quality of Service QoS anii EE EIIE EPET E Network Bandwith Management Commands 8 98 Network Rogue AP Commands 0 ccc c cece es 8 101 Network Firewall Commands 2 020 000 0000 ccc cece eee eee 8 111 Network Router Commands Lid Kehe ede De dehe ee dee BOUL System Commands 0 000 c cece eee EEE E Love donde debris OPT System Debug and Last Password Cornmands verre sod pide MRO dbo BOE System Access Commands o oa cesccees cxovacesesnvantiudsacacs 8 126 System Certificate Management Commands 8 129 System SNMP Commands o cc cccocdaccudordecdereusavdudordues 8 140 System SNMP Access Commands EEE o System SNMP Traps Commands keresnie Be System Network Time Protocol NTP TONNE Le
258. me and define a file location for updating the firmware NOTE The firmware file must be available from an FIP or TFIP site to perform the update CAUTION Make sure a copy of the AP 5131 s configuration is saved before updating the firmware To conduct a firmware update on the AP 5131 1 Export the AP 5131 current configuration settings before updating the firmware to have the most recent settings available after the firmware is updated 2 3 System Configuration 4 35 Refer to mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 for instructions on exporting the AP 5131 s current configuration to have it available after the firmware is updated Select System Configuration gt Firmware Update from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol pr BR pertwerh Contguraner i Firmware Update Q Drom Contiguraser OHCP Opmens gt oaa Goan O Owes etr b ipda N aP ate Mgmt yi Enabte Automate Comfgeraden Update by SNUP Acce Wiertace WAN v WP y nus poate Varrwere NUP RF Teig NTP Serat AP S131 Version 1 000 16IN_2005_09_20 Legging C ertz abe Fiename Oonts inpot mpedt Fuepatostorad Tr Ql arware Upiate i FTPYTFTP Gervor IP Address gt iJ ans amp Gtatasca FTPITFTP intertace WAN v we l irem Plame ASt Configure the DHCP Options field to enable automatic firmware and or configuration file updates when the selected LAN or WAN interface detects an updated file
259. me bandwidth but are unnecessary to AP 5131 operations Use the Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen to build a list of filter types and configure them as either allowed or denied for use with the AP 5131 To configure type filtering on the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt LAN gt Type Filter from the AP 5131 menu tree The Ethernet Type Filter Configuration screen displays No Ethernet types are displayed by default when the screen is first launched 5 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP 5131 PRR ruton c sragupposi uvi 9 Tae Fitter iow gt ail ethemet ees except Ow Ethernet Type Filter Configuration Hy Rano ontgaan Fadel pa 1 toy RIMAL tte B Gansenctn Management Si A AP Detecten LO ow Q Artem Contguratos H gt Quei Getep HO System Beteg H ag AP 5191 Accone gt GQ Carte ate Mgmt A Canty tepettizot Q lear Uisaate Apt ngo Cassge b 4d Mistoa A aeea Coo 2 Usethe all ethernet types except drop down menu to designate whether the Ethernet Types defined within this screen are allowed or denied for use by the AP 5131 3 To add an Ethernet type click the Add button The Add Ethernet Type screen displays Use this screen to add one type filter option at a time for a list of up to 16 entries Add Ethernet Type Select an ethemet type Or 8791 WNMP CONFIG SYMBOL Y Enter the hexa
260. min system snmp traps gt add v3 201 232 24 33 555 BigBoss none md5 admin system snmp traps gt list v3 all index 1 destination ip 201 232 24 33 destination port 555 username BigBoss security level none auth algorithm md5 auth password z RRKKKKKE privacy algorithm des privacy password S KNEE A ER For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet GUI see Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds on page 4 24 8 150 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system snmp traps gt delete Description Deletes SNMP trap entries Syntax delete viv2c lt idx all v3 lt idx gt all Example Deletes entry lt idx gt from the v1v2c access control list Deletes all entries from the v1v2c access control list Deletes entry lt idx gt from the v3 access control list Deletes all entries from the v3 access control list admin system snmp traps gt delete viv2 all For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet GUI see Configuring SNMP Settings on page 4 11 Command Line Interface Reference 8 151 AP5131 gt admin system snmp traps gt list Description Lists SNMP trap entries Syntax list viv2c Lists SNMP v1 v2c access entries v3 lt idx gt Lists SNMP v3 access entry lt idx gt all Lists all SNMP v3 access entries Example admin system snmp traps gt add viv2 203 223 24 2 162 mycomm vl admin system snmp traps gt list viv2c index dest ip dest port c
261. mware file within the Filename field If the target firmware file resides within a directory specify a complete path for the file within the Filepath optional field Enter an IP address for the FIP or TFTP server used for the update Only numerical IP address names are supported no DNS can be used Use the drop down menu to specify the FIP or THP server s location The server can reside on the WAN or on the LAN Select either the FTP or TFTP button to define whether the firmware file resides on a FIP or TFIP server Set the following FIP or TFTP parameters e Username Specify a username for the FIP server login e Password Specify a password for FIP server login Default is symbol NOTE Click Apply to save the settings before performing the firmware update The user is not able to navigate the AP 5131 user interface while the firmware update is in process 10 Click the Perform Update button to initiate the update Upon confirming the firmware 11 update the AP reboots and completes the update After the AP reboots return to the Firmware Update screen Check the Status field to verify whether the firmware update was successful If an error occurs one of the following error messages will display FAIL auto fw update check FAIL network activity time out FAIL firmware check FAIL exceed memory limit FAIL authentication FAIL connection time out 4 38 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide F
262. n exisiting WLAN name All names and IDs are case sensitive For information on mapping VLANs using the applet GUI see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 8 3 1 2 Network LAN DHCP Commands AP5131 gt admin network lan dhcp gt Description Displays the AP 5131 DHCP submenu The items available are displayed below show Displays DHCP parameters set Sets DHCP parameters add Adds static DHCP address assignments delete Deletes static DHCP address assignments list Lists static DHCP address assignments n Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI and exits the session Command Line Interface Reference 8 23 8 24 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan dhcp gt show Description Shows DHCP parameter settings Syntax show Displays DHCP parameter settings for the AP 5131 These parameters are defined with the set command Example admin network lan dhcp gt show DHCP Address Assignment Range Starting IP Address 192 168 0 100 Ending IP Address 192 168 0 254 Lease Time 86400 For information on configuring DHCP using the applet GUI see Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5 1 Command Line Interface Reference 8 25 AP5131 gt admin network lan dhcp gt set Description Sets DHCP parameters for the LAN port Syntax set range lt ip1 gt lt ip2 gt Sets the DHCP assignment range fr
263. n page 5 29 8 76 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 3 3 4 Network Radio Configuration Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio gt Description Displays the AP 5131 Radio submenu The items available under this command include show Summarizes AP 5131 radio parameters at a high level set Defines the AP 5131 radio configuration radio1 Displays the 802 11b g radio submenu radio2 Displays the 802 11a radio submenu os Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 77 AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 s current radio configuration Syntax show Displays the AP 5131 s current radio configuration Example admin network wireless radio gt show Radio Configuration Radio 1 Name Radio 1 Radio Mode enable RF Band of Operation 802 11b g 2 4 GHz Radio 2 Name Radio 2 Radio Mode enable RF Band of Operation 802 11la 5 GHz For information on configuring the Radio Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Setting the WLANs Radio Configuration on page 5 36 8 78 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio gt set Description Enables an AP 5131 Radio and defines the RF band of operation Syntax set 11a lt mode gt 11bg lt mode gt Exam
264. n such as hardware address IP address and associated WLAN and AP Reference the MU Traffic field for MU RF traffic and throughput data Use the RF Status field to reference information on RF signal averages from the target MU The Error field displays RF traffic errors based on retries dropped packets and undecryptable packets The MU Details screen is view only with no user configurable data fields To view details specific to an individual MU Select Status and Statistics gt MU Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree Highlight a specific MU Select the MU Details button Refer to the MU Properties field to view MU address information fa OS om IP Address Displays the IP address of the MU WLAN Association Displays the name of the WLAN the MU is associated with Use this information to assess whether the MU is properly grouped within that specific WLAN PSP State Displays the current PSP state of the MU The PSP Mode field has two potential settings PSP indicates the MU is operating in Power Save Protocol mode In PSP the MU runs enough power to check for beacons and is otherwise inactive CAM indicates the MU is continuously aware of all radio traffic Symbol recommends CAM for those MUs transmitting with the AP frequently and for periods of time of two hours HW Address Displays the Media Access Control MAC address for the MU Radio Association Displays the name of the AP MU is currently associated with If the name of the AP 51
265. nce Guide More IP Addresses Click the More IP Addresses button to specify additional static IP addresses for the AP 5131 Additional IP addresses are required when users within the WAN need dedicated IP addresses or when servers need to be accessed addressed by the outside world The More IP Addresses screen allows the administrator to enter up to eight WAN IP addresses for the AP 5131 WAN Only numeric non DNS names can be used Refresh Click the Refresh button to update the network address information displayed within the WAN IP Configuration field More IP Addresses y Enable WAN IP 2 ww Enable WAN IP 3 y Enable WAN IP 4 Enable WAN IP 5 Enable WAN IP 6 Enable WAN IP 7 Enable WAN IP 8 Cancel Heip 3 Configure the PPP over Ethernet field to enable high speed dial up connections to the AP 5131 WAN port Enable Use the checkbox to enable Point to Point over Ethernet PPPoE for a high speed connection that supports this protocol Most DSL providers are currently using or deploying this protocol PPPoE is a data link protocol for dialup connections PPPoE allows a host PC to use a broadband modem DSL for access to high speed data networks Username Specify a username entered when connecting to the ISP When the Internet session begins the ISP authenticates the username Password Specify a password entered when connecting to the ISP When the Internet session starts the ISP authenticates the password
266. ncrypted with the user s password The KDC has a copy of every user password Backup KDC Optionally specify a numerical non DNS IP address and port for a backup KDC Backup KDCs are referred to as slave servers The slave server periodically synchronizes its database with the primary or master KDC Remote KDC Optionally specify a numerical non DNS IP address and port for a remote KDC Kerberos implementations can use an administration server allowing remote manipulation of the Kerberos database This administration server usually runs on the KDC Port Specify the ports on which the Primary Backup and Remote KDCs reside The default port number for Kerberos Key Distribution Centers is Port 88 6 Click the Apply button to return to the WLAN screen to save any changes made within the Kerberos Configuration field of the New Security Policy screen 7 Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the Kerberos Configuration field and return to the WLAN screen This reverts all settings for the Kerberos Configuration field to the last saved configuration 6 5 Configuring 802 1x EAP Authentication The IEEE 802 1x standard ties the 802 1x EAP authentication protocol to both wired and wireless LAN applications The EAP process begins when an unauthenticated supplicant client device tries to connect with an authenticator in this case the authentication server The AP 5131 passes EAP packets from the client to an authenticat
267. nctions as a command responder and is a multilingual agent responding to SNMPv1 v2c and v3 managers command generators The factory default configuration maintains SNMPv1 2c support of the community names hence providing backward compatibility SNMP v1 v2c community definitions and SNMP v3 user definitions work independently and both use the Access Control List ACL of the SNMP Access Control sub screen 4 14 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Use the SNIVIP Access screen to define SNMP v1 v2c community definitions and SNMP v3 user definitions SNMP version 1 v1 provides a strong network management system but its security is relatively weak The improvements in SNMP version 2c v2c do not include the attempted security enhancements of other version 2 protocols Instead SNMP v2c defaults to SNMP standard community strings for read only and read write access SNMP version 3 v3 further enhances protocol features providing much improved security SNMP v3 encrypts transmissions and provides authentication for users generating requests To configure SNMP v1 v2c community definitions and SNMP v3 user definitions for the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt SNMP Access from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 T BE poseer Contgerwser f SNMP Access fga tr ITS d GAAP VAD Contguratos GR AM S191 Acct C iCocttcate wget gt Ey GMP accore MMP Trap Cortgeeater eer set Owfetens ane i Eegneerng
268. nd from the drop down menu to specify if a firewall rule is intended for inbound traffic to an interface or outbound traffic from that interface Add Click the Add button to insert a new rule at the bottom of the table Click on a row to display a new window with configuration options for that field Insert Click the Insert button to insert a new rule directly above a selected rule in the table Clicking on a field in the row displays a new window with configuration options Del Delete Click Del to remove the selected rule from the table The index numbers for all the rows below the deleted row decrease by 1 Move Up Clicking the Move Up button moves the selected rule up by one row in the table The index numbers for the affected rows adjust to reflect the new order Move Down Clicking the Move Down button moves the selected rule down by one row in the table The index numbers for the affected rows adjust to reflect the new order Index The index number determines the order firewall rules are executed Rules are executed from the lowest number to the highest number Source IP The Source IP range defines the origin address or address range for the firewall rule To configure the Source IP range click on the field A new window displays for entering the IP address and range Destination IP The Destination IP range determines the target address or address range for the firewall rule To configure the Destination IP range click on the f
269. nded light pipe adjusted as required to suit above the ceiling installations For detailed descriptions of the AP 5131 LEDs and their functionality see LED Indicators on page 2 20 1 2 Theory of Operations To understand AP 5131 management and performance alternatives users need familiarity with AP 5131 functionality and configuration options The AP 5131 includes features for different interface connections and network management The AP 5131 uses electromagnetic waves to transmit and receive electric signals without wires Users communicate with the network by establishing radio links between mobile units MUs and access points The AP 5131 uses DSSS direct sequence spread spectrum to transmit digital data from one device to another A radio signal begins with a carrier signal that provides the base or center frequency The digital data signal is encoded onto the carriers using a DSSS chipping algorithm The AP 5131 radio signal propagates into the air as electromagnetic waves A receiving antenna on the MU in the path of the waves absorbs the waves as electrical signals The receiving MU interprets demodulates the signal by reapplying the direct sequence chipping code This demodulation results in the original digital data The AP 5131 uses its environment the air and certain objects as the transmission medium The AP 5131 can either transmit in the 2 4 to 2 5 GHz frequency range 802 11b g radio or the 5 2 GHz frequency range 802 1
270. network admin network admin network admin network admin network wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless wireless radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio radio 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set 802 11bg gt set Defines the AP 5131 radio placement as indoors or outdoors Determines how the radio channel is selected Defines the actual channel used by the radio Sets the radio antenna power Defines the radio antenna power transmit level Enables or disables 802 11bg radio mode support Sets the supported radio transmit rates Sets the beacon interval used by the radio Defines the DTIM interval used by the radio Enables or disables support for short preamble for the radio Defines the cwmin cwmax aifsn and txops levels for the QoS policy used for the radio placement indoor ch mode user channel 1 antenna full power 4 bg mode enable rates beacon 100 dtim 10 preamble disable rts qos qos qos qos 2341 cwmin 125 cwmax 255 aifsn 7 txops 0 For information
271. ng all data calculations to that point to begin new data collections 5 Click the Logout button to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 7 3 1 Viewing WLAN Statistics Use the WLAN Stats screen to view detailed statistics for individual WLANs The WLAN Stats screen is separated into four fields nformation Traffic RF Status and Errors The Information field displays basic information such as number of associated Mobile Units ESSID and security Monitoring Statistics 7 11 information The Traffic field displays statistics on RF traffic and throughput The RF Status field displays information on RF signal averages from the associated MUs The Error field displays RF traffic errors based on retries dropped packets and undecryptable packets The WLAN Stats screen is view only with no user configurable data fields To view statistics for an individual WLAN 1 Select Status and Statistics gt Wireless Stats gt WLANx Stats x target WLAN from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol T Foar m 4 Hean WLANI Stats UP Content Fiterisg he aden tt Wwisie ess 10 hatna Secu Authentication Type Ne ALinerscatos Encryption Type Ns Eecnetos f o inia Mum Associated Mis 0 yana otga ret thetmenabsassahdeh Tots Rx Tx La 95 11 H Hinse Manage Packets per second 0 Pps 0 Poe 0 Pps HR Twoutet 00 Mops 00 Wps 00 Mpi w Speed 00 Mops Mon urecast pe
272. ng an FIP server to import or export the configuration TFTP Select the THP radio button if using an FTP server to import or export the configuration Username Specify a username to be used when logging in to the FTP server A username is not required for TFTP server logins Password Define a password allowing access to the FIP server for the import or export operation Import Configuration Click the Import Configuration button to import the configuration file from the server with the assigned filename and login information The system displays a confirmation window indicating the administrator must log out of the AP 5131 after the operation completes for the changes to take effect Click Yes to continue the operation Click No to cancel the configuration file import Export Configuration Click the Export Configuration button to export the configuration file from the server with the assigned filename and login information When the file is exported all field parameters are exported including LAN and WAN IP addresses The system displays a confirmation window prompting the administrator to log out of the AP 5131 after the operation completes for the changes to take effect Click Yes to continue the operation Click No to cancel the configuration file export 3 Configure the HTTP Import Export field to import export AP 5131 configuration settings using HTTP CAUTION For HTTP downloads exports to be successful pop up messages A
273. nsitive data is transmitted NOTE For information on configuring the other encryption and authentication options available to the AP 5131 see Configuring Security Options on page 6 2 2 3 Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy Multiple WLANs can share the same security policy so be careful not to name security policies after specific WLANs or risk defining a WLAN to single policy Symbol recommends naming the policy after the attributes of the authentication or encryption type selected Select the WEP 128 104 bit key checkbox 3 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The WEP 128 Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen a Morat Pre onmed key No umeri stor ketens B82 tx EAP Erap 92 charatsors Pass Key madihepet ener Excrpton Enter 28 Sexatecinal charatters or enter 1 ASCI chars madenmal i Y Ne Excrnpton skoan fOtitpratetsrorPreteraret WEP 64 40 bet key Keys 2021 222924152027282924282 JOH 92293435363736 2G 1056 E WEP 128 104 bt koh Keyes koppa 40414 24964454647 404040484 Karor veaa WPANOCHP M0 110 Java Applet Window 4 Configure the WEP 128 Settings field as required to define the Pass Key used to generate the WEP keys Pass Key Specify a 4 to 32 character pass key and click the Generate button The AP 5131 other proprietary routers and Symbol MUs use the same algorithm to convert an ASCI
274. ntenna Support for 2 4 GHz and 5 2 GHz Radios e Sixteen Configurable WLANs e Support for 4 BSSIDs per Radio e Quality of Service QoS Support e Industry Leading Data Security e VLAN Support e Multiple Management Accessibility Options e Updatable Firmware e Programmable SNMP v1 v2 v3 Trap Support e Power over Ethernet Support e MU MU Transmission Disallow e Voice Prioritization e Support for CAM and PSP MUs e Statistical Displays e Transmit Power Control e Advanced Event Logging Capability e Configuration File Import Export Functionality e Default Configuration Restoration e DHCP Support e Multi Function LEDs 1 1 1 Single or Dual Mode Radio Options One or two possible configurations are available on the AP 5131 depending on which model is purchased If the AP 5131 is manufactured as a single radio access point the AP 5131 enables you to configure the single radio for either 802 11a or 802 11b g AP 5131 Introduction 1 3 If the AP 5131 is manufactured as a dual radio access point the AP 5131 enables you to configure one radio for 802 11a and the other 802 11b g For more information on configuring your AP 5131 see Setting the WLANs Radio Configuration on page 5 36 1 1 2 Separate LAN and WAN Ports The AP 5131 has one LAN port and one WAN port each with their own MAC address The AP 5131 must manage all data traffic over the LAN connection carefully as either a DHCP client BOOTP client DHCP server or using a stat
275. ny changes to the Rogue AP Detection screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Rogue AP Detection screen to the last saved configuration 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 6 13 1 Moving Rogue APs to the Allowed AP List The AP 5131 Active APs screen enables the user to view the list of detected rogue APs and if necessary select and move an AP into a list of allowed devices This is helpful when the settings defined within the Rogue AP Detection screen inadvertently detect and define a device as a rogue AP To move detected rogue APs into a list of allowed APs 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Rogue AP Detection gt Active APs from the AP 5131 menu tree Configuring Access Point Security 6 55 AP 5131 Active APs Alowed A s Age Out Time Mire w 5 lt 1 Regus APs Age Out Time vis E Frowa AP MA i LAN to WAN Acco EDA Adeanced LAN Arte COR LQ System Contow Quaich Sous Britem Setng Ly APS N Acce m C Cecmteate Moret Add te Armes APs L Adu Al te Abowed APs L Deta ty GNMP Ace CO NTP Serr e nu a lA aatra gt rsim Marne APS 34 The Active APs screen displays with de
276. o cell it associates with a different AP 5131 The roam occurs when the MU analyzes the reception quality at a location and determines a different AP 5131 provides better signal strength and lower MU load distribution If the MU does not find an AP 5131 with a workable signal it can perform a scan to find any AP As MUs switch APs the AP updates its association statistics The user can configure the ESSID to correspond to up to 16 WLANs on each 802 11a or 802 11b g radio A Wireless Local Area Network WLAN is a data communications system that flexibly extends the functionalities of a wired LAN A WLAN does not require lining up devices for line of sight transmission and are thus desirable Within the WLAN roaming users can be handed off from one AP 5131 to another like a cellular phone system WLANs can therefore be configured around the needs of specific groups of users even when they are not in physical proximity 1 16 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 2 2 Network Topology The following are sample topologies e A single AP 5131 without a wired network establishing a single cell wireless network for peer to peer MUs AP 5131 Introduction 1 17 e A single AP 5131 bridging the Ethernet and radio networks 1 18 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide e Two or more AP 5131s coexisting as separate individual networks WLANs at the same site without interference using different ESSIDs
277. o encryption For information on configuring the encryption and authentication options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Security Options on page 6 2 8 70 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless security gt delete Description Deletes a specific security policy Syntax delete lt sec name gt Removes the specified security policy for the list supported lt all gt Removes all security policies except the default policy For information on configuring the encryption and authentication options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Security Options on page 6 2 Command Line Interface Reference 8 71 8 3 3 3 Network ACL Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless acl gt Description Displays the AP 5131 Mobile Unit Access Control List ACL submenu The items available under this command include show Displays the AP 5131 s current ACL configuration create Creates an MU ACL policy edit Edits the properties of an existing MU ACL policy delete Removes an MU ACL policy i Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 72 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless acl gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 s current ACL configuration Syntax show summary Displays the list of existing MU ACL policies poli
278. o the Logging Configuration screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost 4 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the Logging Configuration screen to the last saved configuration 5 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 7 mporting Exporting Configurations All of the configuration settings for an AP 5131 can be obtained from another AP 5131 in the form of a text file Additionally all of the AP 5131 s settings can be downloaded to another AP 5131 Use the file based configuration feature to speed up the setup process significantly at sites using multiple AP 5131 s Another benefit is the opportunity to save the current AP configuration before making significant changes or restoring the default configuration All options on the AP 5131 are deleted and System Configuration 4 31 updated by the imported file Therefore the imported configuration is not a merge with the configuration of the target AP 5131 The exported file can be edited with any document editor if necessary to a dual radio model AP 5131 In turn a dual radio model AP 5131 CAUTION A single radio model AP 5131 cannot import export its configuration cannot import export its configuration to a single radio AP 5131
279. o the power adapter Attach the power adapter cable into the power connector on the AP 5131 Plug the power adapter into an outlet p2p p Hardware Installation 2 13 5 Verify the behavior of the AP 5131 LEDs For more information see LED Indicators on page 2 20 6 Return the AP 5131 to an upright position and place it in the location you wish it to operate Ensure the AP 5131 is sitting evenly on all four rubber feet The AP 5131 is ready to configure For information on an AP 5131 default configuration see Getting Started on page 3 1 For specific details on AP 5131 system configurations see System Configuration on page 4 1 27 2 Wall Mounted Installations Wall mounting requires hanging the AP 5131 along its width or length using the pair of slots on the bottom of the unit and using the AP 5131 itself as a mounting template for the screws The AP 5131 can be mounted onto any plaster or wood wall surface The mounting hardware and tools customer provided required to install the AP 5131 on a wall consists of e Two Phillips pan head self tapping screws ANSI Standard 6 18 X 0 875in Type A or AB Self Tapping screw or ANSI Standard Metric M3 5 X 0 6 X 20mm Type D Self Tapping screw e Two wall anchors e Security cable optional To mount the AP 5131 on a wall 1 Orient the AP 5131 on the wall by its width or length 2 Using the arrows on one edge of the case as guides move the edge to the midline of the mountin
280. oad server lt ipaddress gt Sets the FIP TFIP server IP address user lt username gt Sets the FTP user name 1 to 39 characters in length passwd lt pswd gt Example admin system admin system admin system admin system Sets the FIP password 1 to 39 characters in length cfg update gt set server 192 168 22 12 cfg update gt set user myadmin cfg update gt set passwd georges cfg update gt show cfg filename cfg txt ftp tftp server ip address 192 168 22 12 ftp user name myadmin ftp password kkkkk For information on importing exporting AP 5131 configurations using the applet GUI see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 8 166 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cfg update gt export Description Exports the configuration from the system Syntax export ftp Exports the AP 5131 configuration to the FIP server Use the set command to set the server user password and file name before using this command tftp Exports the AP 5131 configuration to the TFTP server Use the set command to set the IP address for the TFIP server before using the command terminal Exports the AP 5131 configuration to a terminal Example Export FTP Example admin system cfg update gt set server 192 168 22 12 admin system cfg update gt set user myadmin admin system cfg update gt set passwd admin system cfg update gt export ftp Started Done E
281. oads the trusted certificate in PEM format that is pasted into the command line For information on configuring certificate settings using the applet GUI see mporting a CA Certificate on page 4 8 Command Line Interface Reference 8 135 AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt delca Description Deletes a trusted certificate Syntax delca lt IDname gt Deletes the trusted certificate For information on configuring certificate settings using the applet GUI see mporting a CA Certificate on page 4 8 8 136 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt listca Description Lists the loaded trusted certificate Syntax listca Lists the loaded trusted certificates For information on configuring certificate settings using the applet GUI see mporting a CA Certificate on page 4 8 Command Line Interface Reference 8 137 AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt showreq Description Displays a certificate request in PEM format Syntax showreg lt lDname gt Displays a certificate request named lt IDname gt generated from the genreq command For information on configuring certificate settings using the applet GUI see mporting a CA Certificate on page 4 8 8 138 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt delprivkey Description Deletes a private key Syntax delprivkey lt IDname gt Deletes private key named lt IDname gt For information on con
282. ogue AP detection feature enabled to scan for rogue APs Once detected the rogue AP s can be moved to the list of allowed devices if appropriate within the Active APs screen When adding an MU s detection capabilities with the AP 5131 s own rogue AP detection functionality the rogue detection area can be significantly extended To use associated rogue AP enabled MUs to scan for rogue APs 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Rogue AP Detection gt MU Scan from the AP 5131 menu tree The On Demand MU Scan screen displays with associated MUs with rogue AP detection enabled Configuring Access Point Security 6 59 AP 5131 PRE Netwon Condy i On Demand MU Scan amp sto Rogue AP eratied Mus 1 93 weet LB Secun H uu ACL m2 20 YR to Bander M 9 A Rogue A Mi Seon b O Feews _ Ro Scan Rerut Q ster puration Gi Stat t System Name AP S1 T1 2 Highlight an MU from within the Rogue AP enabled MUs field and click the scan button The target MU begins scanning for rogue devices using the detection parameters defined within the Rogue AP Detection screen To modify the detection parameters see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 Those devices detected as rogue APs display within the Scan Result table Use the displayed AP MAC ESSID and RSSI values to determine the device listed in the table is truly a rogue device or one inadvertently detected as a rogue AP If necessary highlight an indiv
283. ogue Devices 2 02005 6 58 Chapter 7 Monitoring Statistics Viewing WAN Statistics 0 00 n eee nes 7 2 visvang LAN SANS eserse eridar epi ia aa 7 5 Viewing Wireless Statistics 02 0 0 ccc rss rras tee ees 7 8 viewing WLAN SANS cea howd hee det wanted Sever raar EAE ERa 7 10 Viewing Radio Statistics Summary 00 0 000 c cece cee eee 7 14 Viewing Radio StatistitS 4 445rerbeaeienirsded reardap opens en eees 7 15 Retry Histogram once sari edceadeedae dae daedaaaeanhaedana cna 7 19 Viewing MU Statistics SumMary sro riiserrerierirrirrerer iri aed pean 7 20 Viewing MU Detaile ccc creeocedekesd boudieekereaeeheuoeheeuccs 7 22 Pinging Individual MUS 0 00000000 c cece 7 24 MU Authentication Statisties sc nc054ccectiidudsubetiehbeddeduawads 7 25 Viewing Known Access Point Statistics 00 0000 c cece eee ees 7 26 Chapter 8 Command Line Interface Reference a E e aA A A ik ctagtendes chorseatenseducrsehpeiwladseeds 8 1 Accessing the CLI through the Serial Port 0 0 0 e eens 8 1 Accessing the CLl via Telnet osc ce eve deteatee deeds dodeeiaaiudasees 8 2 Admin and Common Commands 0 0 000 c cece cece eee ee eevee 8 3 vil AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Network Commands 0 0 0000 e cee ee cece teense eevevesees 812 Network LAN Commands PEEN A AE EEE EEA ETTE Network LAN VLAN ninis EN A ET E AE EAA ERE de Network LAN DHCP Com
284. oint N N ab O O lt oD ms OW lt J symbo The Enterprise Mobility Company AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 72E 70930 01 Revision A October 2005 2005 by Symbol Technologies Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Symbol This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Symbol grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol The user agrees to maintain Symbol s copyright notice on the licensed pro
285. ol The 2 4 GHz antenna suite includes the following models Symbol Part Number Antenna Type Nominal Net Gain dBi ML 2499 11PNA2 01 Wide Angle Directional 8 5 ML 2499 HPA3 01 Omni Directional Antenna 3 3 2 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Symbol Part Number Antenna Type Nominal Net Gain dBi ML 2499 BYGA2 01 Yagi Antenna 13 9 ML 2452 APA2 01 Dual Band 3 0 NOTE An additional adapter is required to use ML 2499 11PNA2 01 and ML 2499 BYGA2 01 model antennae Please contact Symbol for more information Radio 1 The 5 2 GHz antenna suite includes the following models Symbol Part Number Antenna Type Nominal Net Gain dBi ML 5299 WPNA1 01 Panel Antenna 13 0 ML 5299 HPA1 01 Wide Band Omni Directional 5 0 Antenna ML 2452 APA2 0 Dual Band 40 Hardware Installation 2 7 II KKK LY PUA VV 7 Radio 2 For detailed specifications on the 2 4 GHz and 5 2 GHz antennae mentioned in this section see section 2 4 GHz Antenna Matrix on page A 4 and section 5 2 GHz Antenna Matrix on page A 4 14 2 5 Power Options The power options for the AP 5131 include e Symbol Power Injector Part No AP PSBIAS T 1P AF e Symbol 48 Volt Power Supply Part No 50 24000 050 e Any standard 802 3af compliant device 2 6 Symbol Power Injector System The AP 5131 can receive power either dir
286. om IP address lt ip1 gt to IP address lt ip2 gt lease lt lease gt Sets the DHCP lease time lt lease gt in seconds 1 999999 Example admin network lan dhcp gt set range 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 254 admin network lan dhcp gt set lease 86400 admin network lan dhcp gt show DHCP Address Assignment Range Starting IP Address 192 168 0 100 Ending IP Address 192 168 0 254 Lease Time 86400 For information on configuring DHCP using the applet GUI see Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5 1 8 26 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan dhcp gt add Description Adds static DHCP address assignments Syntax add lt mac gt lt ip gt Adds a reserved static IP address to a MAC address Example admin network lan dhcp gt add 00A0F8112233 192 160 24 6 admin network lan dhcp gt add OOAOF1112234 192 169 24 7 admin network lan dhcp gt list Index MAC Address IP Address 1 OOA0OF8112233 192 160 24 6 2 OOAOF8112234 192 169 24 7 For information on adding client MAC and IP address information using the applet GUI see Configuring Advanced DHCP Server Settings on page 5 10 AP5131 gt admin network lan dhcp gt delete Description Deletes static DHCP address assignments Syntax delete lt idx gt lt idx gt Example lt entry gt all Deletes the static DHCP address entry lt entry gt Deletes all static DHCP addresses admin network lan dhcp gt
287. ommunity version admin system snmp traps gt add v3 201 232 24 33 555 BigBoss none md5 admin system snmp traps gt list v3 all index 1 destination ip 201 232 24 33 destination port 555 username BigBoss security level none auth algorithm md5 auth password z RRRKKKKE privacy algorithm des privacy password REE A ER For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet GUI see Configuring SNMP RF Trap Thresholds on page 4 24 8 152 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 4 5 System Network Time Protocol NTP Commands AP5131 gt admin system gt ntp Description Displays the NTP menu The correct network time is required for numerous functions to be configured accuaretly on the AP 5131 Syntax show Shows NTP parameters settings set Sets NTP parameters z Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 153 P5131 gt admin system ntp gt show Description Displays the NTP server configuration Syntax show Shows all NTP server settings Example admin system ntp gt show current time UTC 2005 08 31 14 35 20 ntp mode enable preferred server ip 203 21 37 18 preferred server port 123 first alternate server ip 203 21 37 19 first alternate server port 123 second alternate server ip 0 0 0 0 second alternate server port 123 synchronization interv
288. on configuring the Radio 1 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Command Line Interface Reference 8 83 AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11bg advanced gt Description Displays the advanced submenu for the 802 11b g radio The items available under this command include Syntax show Displays advanced radio settings for the 802 11b g radio set Defines advanced parameters for the 802 11b g radio 5 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 84 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11bg advanced gt show Description Displays the BSSID to WLAN mapping for the 802 11b g radio Syntax show advanced Displays advanced settings for the 802 11b g radio wlan Displays WLAN summary list for the 802 11b g radio Example admin network wireless radio 802 11bg advanced gt show advanced configuration is ok configuration is ok configuration is ok WLAN BSS ID BC MC Cipher Lobby 1 Open HR 2 Open Office 3 Open BSSID Primary WLAN 1 Lobby 2 HR Office For information on configuring Radio 1 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Command Line Interface Reference 8 85 AP5131 gt admin network wireless rad
289. on options selected 3 Select the KeyGuard radio button The KeyGuard Settings field displays within the New Security Policy screen 4 Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy Manusi Pre anared wy NO saorte aon harberos 807 te EAP Enter 4 32 characters Pass Mey tuzte Jore ate Enoypaen Enter 26 nexadectmat characters of ester 13 ASCE chars Heraderima Y ra Eneepten Keyet y _ B WEP 64 69 Se dav GILE 026497 FSEDEE J 79202470AAt7COCSIETIDAISE WEP 128 104 be hay ares i vee hOu WPAP WPANCOUP 802 119 Jeva Ancia wirds 5 Configure the KeyGuard Settings field as required to define the Pass Key used to generate the WEP keys used with the KeyGuard algorithm These keys must be the same between the AP 5131 and its MU to encrypt packets between the two devices Pass Key Keys 1 4 Configuring Access Point Security 6 19 Specify a 4 to 32 character pass key and click the Generate button The pass key can be any alphanumeric string The AP 5131 other proprietary routers and Symbol MUs use the algorithm to convert an ASCII string to the same hexadecimal number MUs without Symbol adapters need to use WEP keys manually configured as hexadecimal numbers Use the Key 1 4 areas to specify key numbers The key can be either a hexadecimal or ASCII depending on which option is selected from the drop down menu The keys are 26 hexadecimal cha
290. onal Antenna 3 3 ML 2499 BYGA2 01 Yagi Antenna 13 9 ML 2452 APA2 01 Dual Band 3 0 A 4 2 5 2 GHz Antenna Matrix The f ollowing section describes each 5 2 GHz antenna approved for use with the AP 5131 Symbol Part Number Antenna Type Nominal Net Gain dBi ML 5299 WPNA1 01 Panel Antenna 13 0 ML 5299 HPA1 01 Wide Band Omni Directional 5 0 Antenna ML 2452 APA2 01 Dual Band 40 A 4 3 Additional Antenna Components The following table lists the Symbol part number for various antenna accessories This table also includes the loss for each accessory at both 2 4 and 5 2 GHz Loss db Loss db Item Symbol Part Number Description 2 4 GHz 5 2 GHz 72PJ ML 1499 72PJ 01 Cable Extension 2 5 LAK1 ML 1499 LAK1 01 Lightning 0 75 Arrestor LAK2 ML 1499 LAK2 01 Lightning Arrestor 0 25 10JK ML 1499 10JK 01 Jumper Kit 0 75 1 6 25JK ML 1499 25JK 01 Jumper Kit 1 9 3 5 Technical Specifications A 5 Loss db Loss db Item Symbol Part Number Description 2 4 GHz 5 2 GHz 50JK ML 1499 50JK 01 Jumper Kit 3 75 6 6 100JK ML 1499 100JK 01 Jumper Kit 75 12 8 A 4 4 Antenna Accessory Connectors Cable Type and Length The following describes each antenna accessory s connector and cable type plus the length Item Connector1 Connector2 Length meters Cable Type 72PJ RPBNC F RPBNC M 1 83 RG 58 LAK1 RPBNC F N
291. onfiguration 5 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 5 2 1 1 Configuring Port Forwarding Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure port forwarding parameters for inbound traffic from the associated WAN IP address To configure port forwarding for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt NAT from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Click on the Port Forwarding button within the Inbound Mappings area 3 157 235 91 63 Port Fowarding Name Transpor StatPort End Port IP Address Translation Port TCP 1 1 157 235 22 1 1 a juoP i it 1157 235 17 11 i iy w Add Del v Forward all unspecified ports to 157 235 22 12 Note Forwarding of ports used for AP 5131 management limits remote access Cancel Help Java Window Network Management Configure the Port Forwarding screen to modify the following Add Delete Name Transport Start Port and End Port IP Address Translation Port Click Add to create a local map that includes the name transport protocol start port end port and IP address for incoming packets Click Delete to remove a selected local map entry Enter a name for the service being forwarded The name can be any alphanumeric string and is used for identification of the service Use the Transport pull down menu to specify the transport protocol used in this service The
292. onfigure the LAN to WAN Access screen as required to allow or deny access to selected enabled protocols Allow or Deny all protocols except Add Del Delete Name Transport Start Port Use the drop down menu to select either Allow or Deny The selected setting applies to all protocols except those with enabled checkboxes and any traffic that is added to the table For example if the adoption rule is to Deny access to all protocols except those listed access is allowed only to those selected protocols Click Add to create a new table entry Click Del Delete to remove a selected list entry Specify a name for a newly configured protocol Select a protocol from the drop down menu For a detailed description of the protocols available see Available Protocols on page 6 30 Enter the starting port number for a range of ports If the protocol uses a single port enter that port in this field Configuring Access Point Security 6 29 End Port Enter the ending port number for a port range If the protocol uses a single port leave the field blank A new entry might use Web Traffic for its name TCP for its protocol and 80 for its port number Pre configured Rules The following protocols are preconfigured with the AP 5131 To enable a protocol check the box next to the protocol name e HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol is the protocol for transferring files on the Web HTTP is an application protocol running on top of the TC
293. ons for the Symbol power injector refer to the Power Injector Quick Install Guide Part No 72 66153 01 available from the Symbol Web site or the AP 5131 Software and documentation CDROM 2 7 Mounting the AP 5131 The AP 5131 can rest on a flat surface attach to a wall mount under a suspended T Bar or above a ceiling plenum or attic Choose one of the following mounting options based on the physical environment of the coverage area Do not mount the AP 5131 ina location that has not been approved in a site survey Refer to the following depending on how you intend to mount the AP 5131 e Desk Mounted Installations e Wall Mounted Installations e Suspended Ceiling T Bar Installations e Above the Ceiling Plenum Installations 27 1 Desk Mounted Installations The desk mount option uses rubber feet allowing the unit to sit on most flat surfaces The four 4 round rubber feet can be found in the AP 5131 main box in a separate plastic bag To install the AP 5131 in a desk mount orientation 1 Turn the AP 5131 upside down 2 Attach the radio antennae to their correct connectors antenna connectors On the Dual Radio AP 5131 a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for both Radio 1 2 4 GHz and Radio 2 5 2 GHz Two dots designate the secondary antenna for both Radio 1 and Radio 2 On Single Radio models a single dot on the antenna connector indicates the primary antenna for Radio 1 and two dots
294. ont Coretquestont Rogue AP Detection L SA Detectos Method FaR vrsi wyw Stan tery Mrs hog ve gt u HO Y t Rad by yrs b amp Canteen Minsgemert Aizen d AP bat S Rogue AF Owteiden y ADONE Ary AP Hawg Dol Defined MAC Ante a rewe Mi Qrm gt itd at ge Drwm Name AP S171 2 Configure the Detection Method field to set the detection method MU or AP 5131 and define the 802 11a or 802 11b g radio to conduct the rogue AP search RF Scan by MU RF On Channel Detection RF Scan by Detector Radio Configuring Access Point Security 6 53 Select the RF Scan by MU checkbox to enable MUs to scan for potential rogue APs within the network Define an interval in the Scan Interval field for associated MUs to beacon in an attempt to locate a rogue AP Set the interval to a value sooner than the default if a large volume of device network traffic is anticipated within the coverage area of the target AP 5131 access point The Scan Interval field is not available unless the RF Scan by MU checkbox is selected Symbol clients must be associated and have rogue AP detection enabled Select the RF On Channe Detection checkbox to enable a single radio AP 5131 to detect rogue APs on its current legal channel setting If the AP 5131 supports a dual radio SKU select the RF Scan by Detector Radio checkbox to enable the selected 11a or 11b g radio to scan for rogue APs Use the Rule Management field to restrict Symbol AP s from Rogue AP dete
295. or received However selecting any other authetnication or encryption checkbox displays a configuration field for the selected security scheme within the New Security Policy screen Configuring Access Point Security 6 7 NOTE An existing security policy can be edited from the Security Configuration screen by selecting an existing policy and clicking the Edit button Use the Edit Security Policy screen to edit the policy For more information on editing an existing security policy refer to security configuration sections described in steps 4 and 5 3 Use the Name field to define a logical security policy name Remember multiple WLANs can share the same security policy so be careful not to name security policies after specific WLANs or risk defining a WLAN to single policy Symbol recommends naming the policy after the attributes of the authentication or encryption type selected for example WPA2 Allow TKIP Enable and configure an Authentication option if necessary for the target security policy Manually Pre Shared Select this button to disable authentication This is the default Key No Authentication Kerberos 802 1x EAP value for the Authentication field Select the Kerberos button to display the Kerberos Configuration field within the New Security Policy screen For specific information on configuring Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos Authentication on page 6 9 Select the 802 1x EAP button to displa
296. or the selected Access Category This value should be set to a smaller increment for higher priority traffic to reduce packet delay time The TXOPs Time is the interval the transmitting MU is assigned for transmitting The default for Background traffic is 0 The same TXOPs values should be used for either the AP 5131 s 802 11a or 802 11b g radio there is no difference TXOP times range from 0 2 ms background priority to 3 ms video priority in a 802 11a network and from 1 2 ms to 6 ms in an 802 11b g network The TXOP bursting capability greatly enhances the efficiency for high data rate traffic such as streaming video factory defaults Symbol recommends default settings in most usage scenarios Click Apply to save any changes to the New QoS Policy or Edit QoS Policy screen to return to the Quality of Service Configuration screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost Click Cancel to securely exit the New QoS Policy or Edit QoS Policy screen to return to the Quality of Service Configuration screen closed Click Logout within the Quality of Service Configuration screen to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is 5 3 2 Setting the WLAN s Radio Configuration Each AP 5131 WLAN can have a separate 802 114 or 802 11b g radio configured and mapped to that WLAN The first step is to enable
297. ore the applet is closed Network Management 5 47 NOTE Though the Rogue AP and Firewall features appear after the Bandwidth Management features within the AP 5131 menu tree they are described in this guide within the security chapter as both items are data protection functions for more information see Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6 25 and Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 5 4 Configuring Router Settings The AP 5131 router uses routing tables and protocols to forward data packets from one network to another The AP 5131 router manages traffic within the network and directs traffic from the WAN to destinations on the AP 5131 managed LAN Use the AP 5131 Router screen to view the router s connected routes To access the Router screen 1 Select Network Configuration gt Router from the AP 5131 menu tree Oyster Name ay 49 30 AP 5131 symbo RE Potensi Contqurater i Router i X AP 5331 Roste Tabie Ovan m 6 ve A z y 9000 0000 197 714927 WAN 0 gaY ree He TL a Bo yR l e Le amp t reer Owtres Routes R E Five CO Reuter j 2 Refer to the AP 5131 Router Table field to view existing routes The AP 5131 Router Table field displays a list of connected routes between an enabled subnet and the router These routes can be changed by modifying the IP address and subnet masks of the enabled subnets 5 48 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The information
298. ormer ceiling space 15 Cable the AP 5131 using either the Symbol power injector solution or an approved line cord and power supply CAUTION Do not supply power to the AP 5131 until the cabling of the unit is A N complete 2 20 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide For Symbol power injector installations a Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the Power Injector Data In connector Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the power injector Data amp Power Out connector and the AP 5131 LAN port Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source host to the power injector and AP 5131 does not exceed 100 meters 333 ft The power injector has no On Off power switch The power injector receives power as soon as AC power is applied For more information on using the power injector see Symbol Power Injector System on page 2 7 For standard Symbol 48 Volt Power Adapter Part No 50 24000 050 and line cord installations a Daag o Connect RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the AP 5131 LAN port Verify the power adapter is correctly rated according the country of operation Connect the power supply line cord to the power adapter Attach the power adapter cable into the power connector on the AP 5131 Plug the power adapter into an outlet 16 Verity the behavior of the AP 5131 LED lightpipe For more information see LED Indicators on page
299. orting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 MIB Management Information Base accessing the AP 5131 SNMP functions using a MIB Browser The AP 5131 CDROM contains the following 2 MIB files e Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 standard Symbol MIB file e Symbol AP 5131 MIB AP 5131 specific MIB file Getting Started 3 3 3 3 Basic Device Configuration For the basic setup described in this section the Java based Web UI will be used to configure the AP 5131 Use the AP 5131 s LAN interface for establishing a link with the AP 5131 Configure the AP 5131 as a DHCP client For optimal screen resolution set your screen resolution to 1024 x 768 pixels or greater 1 Start Internet Explorer and enter the following IP address in the address field 192 168 0 1 NOTE DNS names are not supported as a valid IP address for the AP 5131 The user is required to enter a numerical IP address NOTE For optimum compatibility use Sun Microsystems JRE 1 5 or higher available from Sun s Website and be sure to disable Microsoft s Java Virtual Machine if installed The AP 5131 login screen displays ACCESS POINT 2 Login using admin as the default User ID and symbol as the default Password 3 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 3 If the default login is successful the Change Admin Password window displays Change the password Change Admin Password Enter ADMINISTRATOR Password Enter New Password 0 11 ch
300. ot be changed MUs The number MUs associated with the located AP 5131 Monitoring Statistics 7 27 KBIOS The data traffic handled by the located AP 5131 in kilobytes both transmitted and received per second Unit Name Displays the name assigned to the AP 5131 using the System Settings screen For information on changing the unit name see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 Click the Clear Known AP Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections Click the Details button to display AP address and radio information Click the Ping button to display a screen for verifying the link with a highlighted Symbol access point Click the Send Cfg to APs button to send the your AP 5131 s configuration to other AP 5131 s with same ESSID Recipient AP 5131 must be the same single or dual radio model as the AP 5131 sending the configuration The sending and recipient AP 5131 s must also be running the same major firmware version i e 1 0 to 1 0 NOTE A ping test initiated from the AP 5131 Known AP Statistics screen uses WNMP pings Therefore target devices that are not Symbol access points are unable to respond to the ping test 6 Click the Start Flash button to flash the LEDs of other AP 5131s detected and displayed within the Known AP Statistics screen Use the Start Flash button to determine the location of the devices displayed within the Known AP Statistics sc
301. ous network segments within large areas airports shopping malls etc A VLAN is a group of clients with a common set of requirements independent of their physical location VLANs have the same attributes as physical LANs but they enable administrators to group clients even when they are not members of the same network segment For more information see Configuring VLAN Support on page 5 5 1 1 10 Multiple Management Accessibility Options The AP 5131 can be accessed and configured using one of the following methods e Java Based Web Ul e Human readable config file imported via FTP or TFTP e MIB Management Information Base e Command Line Interface CLI accessed via RS 232 or Telnet Use the AP 5131 DB 9 serial port for direct access to the command line interface from a PC Use Symbol s Null Modem cable Part No 25 632878 0 for the best fitting connection 1 9 1 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 1 11 Updatable Firmware Symbol periodically releases updated versions of the AP 5131 device firmware to the Symbol Web site If the AP 5131 firmware version displayed on the System Settings page see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 is older than the version on the Web site Symbol recommends updating the AP 5131 to the latest firmware version for full feature functionality For instructions on updating the AP 5131 firmware using FIP or THP see Updating Device Firmware on page 4 34 1 1 12 Programmable SNMP v1 v2 v
302. ovided Click the Apply button Once the admin password has been created updated the System Settings screen displays If the AP 5131 has not had its System Settings device name location etc configured see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 Once the password has been set refer back to Configuring Security Options on page 6 2 to determine which AP 5131 security feature to configure next 6 2 1 Resetting the AP 5131 Password The AP 5131 Command Line Interface CLI enables users who forget their password to reset it to the factory default symbol From there a new password can be defined To reset the AP 5131 password back to its default setting 1 2 Connect one end of a null modem serial cable to the AP 5131 s serial connector Attach the other end of the null modem serial cable to the serial port of a PC running HyperTerminal or a similar emulation program Set the HyperTerminal program to use 19200 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity no flow control and auto detect for terminal emulation Press lt ESC gt or lt Enter gt to access the AP 5131 CLI A serial connection has now been established and the user should be able to view the serial connection window Reset the AP 5131 Configuring Access Point Security 6 5 An AP 5131 can be reset by removing and re inserting the LAN cable or removing and re inserting the power cable As the AP 5131 is re booting a Press esc key to run boot firmware messag
303. ows SNMP rate trap parameter settings admin system snmp traps gt show trap SNMP MU Traps mu associated mu unassociated mu denied association mu denied authentication SNMP Traps snmp auth failure snmp acl violation SNMP Network Traps physical port status change denial denial SNMP System system system of service of service trap rate limit Traps cold start config changed rogue ap detection ap radar detection enable disable disable disable disable disable enable enable 10 disable disable disable disable Command Line Interface Reference 8 147 For information on configuring SNMP traps using the applet GUI see Enabling SNMP Traps on page 4 19 8 148 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system snmp traps gt set Description Sets SNMP trap parameters Syntax set mu assoc mu unassoc mu deny assoc mu deny auth enable disable enable disable enable disable enable disable Enables disables the MU associated trap Enables disables the MU unassociated trap Enables disables the MU association denied trap Enables disables the MU authentication denied trap snmp auth enable disable Enables disables the authentication failure trap snmp acl enable disable Enables disables the SNMP ACL violation trap port enable disable Enables disables the physical port status trap dos attack enable disable Enables disables the denial of service
304. pecified access point s LEDs Syntax flash all leds lt index gt Defines the Known AP index number of the target AP to flash lt stop start gt Begins or terminates the flash activity Example admin stats gt admin stats gt flash all leds 1 start Password kkkkkkkxk admin stats gt flash all leds 1 stop admin stats gt For information on flashing AP 5131 LEDs using the applet GUI see Viewing Known Access Point Statistics on page 7 26 8 180 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin stats gt echo Description Defines the echo test values used to conduct a ping test to an associated MU Syntax list Defines echo test parameters and result set Determines echo test packet data start Begins echoing the defined station i Goes to parent menu I Goes to root menu quit Quits CLI session For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 Command Line Interface Reference 8 181 AP5131 gt admin stats echo gt list Description Lists echo test parameters and results Syntax list Lists echo test parameters and results Example admin stats echo gt list Station Address 00A0F8213434 Number of Pings 10 Packet Length 10 Packet Data in HEX 55 Number of MU Responses 2 admin stats echo gt For information on MU Echo and Ping tests using the applet GUI see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 8
305. ped RE Bytes 5197280 RX Overruns TXByees 118100 MKOemns Rx frome t TK Camie 2 Refer to the Information field to view the following AP 5131 device address information HW Address The Media Access Control MAC address of the AP 5131 The MAC address is hard coded at the factory and cannot be changed IP Address The Internet Protocol IP addresses for the AP 5131 LAN port 3 Refer to the Received field to view data received over the AP 5131 LAN port RX Packets RX packets are data packets received over the AP 5131 LAN port The number is a cumulative total since the LAN connection was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted To begin a new data collection see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 RX Bytes RX bytes are bytes of information received over the LAN port The value is a cumulative total since the LAN connection was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted To begin a new data collection see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 RX Errors RX errors include dropped data packets buffer overruns and frame errors on inbound traffic The number of RX errors is a total of RX Dropped RX Overruns and RX Carrier errors Use this information to determine performance quality of the current LAN connection RX Dropped RX Overruns RX Frame Monitoring Statistics 7 7 The RX Dropped field displays the number of data packets failing to reach the LAN port If this number appears excessive consi
306. ple admin network wireless admin network wireless admin network wireless Radio Configuration Radio 1 Name Radio Mode RF Band of Operation Radio 2 Name Radio Mode RF Band of Operation Enables or disables the AP 5131 s 802 114 radio Enables or disables the AP 5131 s 802 11b g radio radio gt set lla disable radio gt set 11bg enable radio gt show Radio 1 enable 802 11b g 2 4 GHz Radio 2 disable 802 1la 5 GHz For information on configuring the Radio Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Setting the WLAN Radio Configuration on page 5 36 Command Line Interface Reference 8 79 AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio radio1 gt Description Displays a specific 802 11b g radio submenu The items available under this command include Syntax show Displays 802 11b g radio settings set Defines specific 802 11b g radio parameters advanced Displays the Adavanced radio settings submenu 3 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI For information on configuring Radio 1 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Setting the WLANs Radio Configuration on page 5 36 8 80 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio radio1 gt show Description Displays specific 802 11b g radio settings Synt
307. point in addition to the Ethernet infrastructure This often required an electrical contractor to install power drops at each access point location An approved power injector solution merges power and Ethernet into one cable reducing the burden of installation and allows optimal AP 5131 placement in respect to the intended radio coverage area The AP 5131 can only use a Power over Ethernet device when connected to the LAN port AP 5131 Introduction The Symbol Power Injector Part No AP PSBIAS T 1P AF is a single port 802 3af compliant Power over Ethernet hub combining low voltage DC with Ethernet data in a single cable connecting to the AP 5131 The Power Injector s single DC and Ethernet data cable creates a modified Ethernet cabling environment on the AP 5131 s LAN port eliminating the need for separate Ethernet and power cables For more information on the Symbol Power Injector see Symbol Power Injector System on page 2 7 1 1 14 MU MU Transmission Disallow The AP 5131 s MU MU Disallow feature prohibits MUs from communicating with each other even if they are on different WLANs assuming one of the WLAN s is configured to disallow MU MU communication Therefore if an MU s WLAN is configured for MU MU disallow it will not be able to communicate with any other MUs connected to this AP 5131 For information on configuring an AP 5131 WLAN to disallow MU to MU communications see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 1 1 15 Vo
308. r enter 1 ASCI chars bis Excretion kan r At WEP BA 40 bt key Kan 2021 227924262627282924262 WEP 128 104 Dt keh Keyes WER h atal hat Mey ea 40414245944454647 40404484 koart veamoP WPANOCHP 002110 mene Javea Applet Window 5 Configure the WEP 64 Settings or WEP 128 Settings field as required to define the Pass Key used to generate the WEP keys These keys must be the same between the AP 5131 and its MU to encrypt packets between the two devices Pass Key Specify a 4 to 32 character pass key and click the Generate button The pass key can be any alphanumeric string The AP 5131 other proprietary routers and Symbol MUs use the algorithm to convert an ASCII string to the same hexadecimal number MUs without Symbol adapters need to use WEP keys manually configured as hexadecimal numbers Configuring Access Point Security 6 17 Keys 1 4 Use the Key 1 4 areas to specify key numbers The key can be either a hexadecimal or ASCII depending on which option is selected from the drop down menu For WEP 64 40 bit key the keys are 10 hexadecimal characters in length or 5 ASCII characters For WEP 128 104 bit key the keys are 26 hexadecimal characters in length or 13 ASCII characters Select one of these keys for activation by clicking its radio button Default hexadecimal keys for WEP 64 include Key 1 1011121314 Key2 2021222324 Key 3 3031323334 Key 4 4041424344 Default hexadecimal keys for WEP 128 include Key 1
309. r the default username of admin and the default password of symbol If this is your first time logging into the AP 5131 you are unable to access any of the AP 5131 s commands until the country code is set A new password will also need to be created 8 2 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 1 2 Accessing the CLI via Telnet To connect to the AP 5131 CLI through a Telnet connection 1 Telnet into the AP 5131 using an IP address of 192 168 0 1 2 Enter the default username of admin and the default password of symbol If this is your first time logging into the AP 5131 you are unable to access any of the AP 5131 s commands until the country code is set A new password will also need to be created Command Line Interface Reference 8 3 8 2 Admin and Common Commands AP5131 gt admin gt Description Displays admin configuration options The items available under this command are shown below Syntax admin Accesses admin configuration This requires an administration login help Displays general user interface help passwd Changes the admin password summary Shows a system summary containing network address information IP address network mask DHCP mode default gateway and WLAN information for the AP 5131 network Goes to the network submenu system Goes to the system submenu stats Goes to the stats submenu 5 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash qu
310. racters in length or 13 ASCII characters Select one of these keys for activation by clicking its radio button Default hexadecimal keys for KeyGuard include Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 101112131415161718191A1B1C 202122232425262728292A2B2C 303132333435363738393A3B3C 404142434445464748494A4B4C 6 Click the Apply button to save any changes made within the KeyGuard Setting field of the New Security Policy screen 7 Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the KeyGuard Setting field and return to the WLAN screen This reverts all settings to the last saved configuration 6 8 Configuring WPA Using TKIP Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a robust encryption scheme specified in the IEEE Wireless Fidelity Wi Fi standard 802 111 WPA provides more sophisticated data encryption than WEP WPA is designed for corporate networks and small business environments where more wireless traffic allows quicker discovery of encryption keys by an unauthorized person WPA s encryption method is Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP TKIP addresses WEP s weaknesses with a re keying mechanism a per packet mixing function a message integrity check and an extended initialization vector WPA also provides strong user authentication based on 802 1x EAP To configure WPA TKIP encryption on the AP 5131 6 20 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Security from the AP 5131 menu
311. rame 3 iy SB verevore ee ot t Me p 20a conn Ch Muace Ors P Rado Contguratos Ca Bardevst Marajerert a Rogue AP Delechos p tewal OC Rote t Q mrn Contigeradorg O Oai bor O Oeaterm Setnge Gg P4191 Actes C Coctcate Mgmt mg ONUP Access NTP Serera R Legging Configuration A Oori tnpotixped Q f amware Upstate a aL T ney Lagai Oyster name AP Stat ee Df 2 Click the Create button to configure a new ACL policy or select a policy and click the Edit button to modify an existing ACL policy The AP 5131 supports a maximum of 16 MU ACL policies New MU ACL Policy Name demo roord Mobile Unit Access Control List Allow access for all Mobile Units except End MAC 00A0F8 3161 2 Start MAC 00 A0 F8 31 61 01 Apply Cancel Help Network Management 5 31 Either the New MU ACL Policy or Edit MU ACL Policy screens display 3 Assign a name to the new or edited ACL policy that represents an inclusion or exclusion policy specific to a particular type of MU traffic you may want to use with a single or group of WLANs More than one WLAN can use the same ACL policy 4 Configure the parameters within the Mobile Unit Access Control List field to allow or deny MU access to the AP 5131 The MU adoption list identifies MUs by their MAC address The MAC address is the MU s unique Media Access Contro number printed on the device for example 00 09 5B 45 9B 07 by t
312. rap is enabled a trap is sent every 5 seconds until the condition no longer exists MU associated Generates a trap when an MU becomes associated with one of the AP 5131 s WLANs MU unassociated Generates a trap when an MU becomes unassociated with or gets dropped from one of the AP 5131 s WLANs MU associated MU denied association MU denied authentication System Configuration 4 23 Generates a trap when an MU becomes associated with one of the AP 5131 s WLANs Generates a trap when an MU is denied association to a AP 5131 WLAN Can be caused when the maximum number of MUs for a WLAN is exceeded or when an MU violates the AP 5131 s Access Control List ACL Generates a trap when an MU is denied authentication on one of the AP s WLANs Can be caused by the MU being set for the wrong authentication type for the WLAN or by an incorrect key or password Configure the SNMP Traps field to generate traps when SNMP capable MUs are denied authentication privileges or are subject of an ACL violation When a trap is enabled a trap is sent every 5 seconds until the condition no longer exists SNMP authentication Generates a trap when an SNMP capable client is denied access failures SNMP ACL violation to the AP 5131 s SNMP management functions or data This can result from an incorrect login or missing incorrect user credentials Generates a trap when an SNMP client cannot access SNMP management functions or data due to an
313. rberos continue to step 2 2 Click the Create button to configure a new policy supporting Kerberos The New Security Policy screen displays with no authentication or encryption options selected 3 Select the Kerberos radio button 6 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The Kerberos Configuration field displays within the New Security Policy screen 4 Ensure the Name of the security policy entered suits the intended configuration or function of the policy Marnen Pre stared bey No menor atom betes On tr EAP Sacngtion Resm Name ono Pamen KOC 11597 735 17 1 Pon Baso KDC 12 4 Pon Remote KDC r Pon WEP 178 104 bt hey KayGeaed 5 Setthe Kerberos Configuration field as required to define the parameters of the Kerberos authentication server and AP 5131 Realm Name Specify a realm name that is case sensitive for example SYMBOL COM The realm name is the name domain realm name of the KDC Server A realm name functions similarly to a DNS domain name In theory the realm name is arbitrary However in practice a Kerberos realm is named by uppercasing the DNS domain name that is associated with hosts in the realm Configuring Access Point Security 6 11 Primary KDC Specify a numerical non DNS IP address and port for the primary Key Distribution Center KDC The KDC implements an Authentication Service and a Ticket Granting Service whereby an authorized user is granted a ticket e
314. received copy the content from the email into the clipboard 8 Click the Paste from clipboard button The content of the email displays in the window 9 Click the Import Certificate button to import the certificate and make it available for use as a VPN authentication option NOTE f the AP 5131 is restarted after a certificate request has been generated but before the signed certificate is imported the import will not execute properly Do not restart the AP 5131 during this process The certificate ID displays in the Signed list 10 To use the certificate for a VPN tunnel first define a tunnel and select the IKE settings to use either RSA or DES certificates For additional information on configuring VPN tunnels see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 4 4 Configuring SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices SNMP uses Management Information Bases MIBs to manage the device 4 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide configuration and monitor Internet devices in potentially remote locations MIB information accessed via SNMP is defined by a set of managed objects called object identifiers O Ds An object identifier OID is used to uniquely identify each object variable of a MIB The AP 5131 CDROM contains the following 2 MIB files e Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 common Symbol MIB file e Symbol AP 5131 MIB AP 5131 spe
315. reen When an AP 5131 is highlighted and the Start Flash button is selected the LEDs on the selected AP 5131 flash When the Stop Flash button is selected the LEDs on the selected AP 5131 go back to normal operation Click the Logout button to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 7 28 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The AP 5131 Command Line Interface CLI is accessed through the serial port or a Telnet session The AP 5131 CLI follows the same conventions as the Web based user interface The CLI does however provide an escape sequence to provide diagnostics for problem identification and resolution The AP 5131 CLI treats the following as invalid characters amp 7 1 lt gt In order to avoid problems when using the AP 5131 CLI these characters should be avoided 8 1 Connecting to the CLI 8 1 1 Accessing the CLI through the Serial Port To connect to the AP 5131 CLI through the serial port 1 Connect one end of a null modem serial cable to the AP 5131 s serial connector 2 Attach the other end of the null modem serial cable to the serial port of a PC running HyperTerminal or a similar emulation program 3 Set the HyperTerminal program to use 19200 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity no flow control and auto detect for terminal emulation Press lt ESC gt or lt Enter gt to enter into the CLI 5 Ente
316. rements may want to leave the checkbox unselected and configure each MU with an ESSID The default is unselected thus not allowing the acceptance of broadcast ESSIDs Quality of Service If QoS policies are undefined none select the Create button to Policy launch the New QoS Policy screen Use this screen to create a QoS policy wherein data traffic for the new or revised WLAN can be prioritized to best suit the MU transmissions within that WLAN For more information see Setting the WLAN Quality of Service QoS Policy on page 5 31 6 Click Apply to save any changes to the WLAN screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost 7 Click Cancel to securely exit the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screen and return to the Wireless Configuration screen 5 3 1 1 Configuring WLAN Security Policies As WLANs are being defined for an AP 5131 a security policy can be created or an existing policy edited using the Create or Edit buttons within the Security Configuration screen to best serve the security requirements of the WLAN Once new policies are defined they are available within the New WLAN or Edit WLAN screens and can be mapped to any WLAN A single security policy can be used by more than one WLAN if its logical to do so For example there may be two or more WLANs within close proximity of each other requiring the same data protection scheme To create a new security policy or modify
317. requirements independent of their physical location VLANs have the same attributes as physical LANs but they enable system administrators to group MUs even when they are not members of the same network segment The AP 5131 assignment of VLANs can be implemented using Static or Dynamic assignments often referred to as memberships for individual WLANs Both methods have their advantages and disadvantages Static VLAN membership is perhaps the most widely used method because of the relatively small administration overhead and security it provides With Static VLANs you manually assign individual WLANs to individual VLANs Although static VLANs are the most common form of VLAN assignments dynamic VLAN assignment is possible per WLAN Configuring dynamic VLANs entail the AP 5131 sending a DHCP request for device information such as an IP address Additional information such as device MAC address information is sent to the AP 5131 The AP 5131 sends this MAC address to a host housing a copy of the Dynamic VLAN database This database houses the records of MAC addresses and VLAN assignments The VLAN database looks up the MAC to determine what VLAN is assigned to it If it is not in the database it simply uses a default VLAN assignment The VLAN assignment is sent to the AP 5131 The AP 5131 then maps the target WLAN for the assigned VLAN and traffic passes normally allowing for the completion of the DHCP request and further traffic To create new
318. rface Reference 8 99 AP5131 gt admin network wireless bandwidth gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 s current Bandwidth Management configuration Syntax show Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration for defined WLANs and how they are weighted Example admin network wireless bandwidth gt show Bandwidth Share Mode First In First Out For information on configuring the Bandwidth Management options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Bandwidth Management Settings on page 5 45 8 100 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless bandwidth gt set Description Defines the AP 5131 Bandwidth Management configuration Syntax set mode lt bw mode gt Defines bandwidth share mode of First In First Out lt fifo gt Round Robin lt rr gt or Weighted Round Robin lt wrr gt weight lt num gt Assigns a bandwidth share allocation for the WLAN lt index 1 16 gt when Weighted Round Robin lt wrr gt is selected The weighting is from 1 10 For information on configuring the Bandwidth Management options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Bandwidth Management Settings on page 5 45 Command Line Interface Reference 8 101 8 3 3 7 Network Rogue AP Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless rogue ap gt Description Displays the Rogue AP submenu The items available under this command include show Displays the
319. rivate network however because the data travels through the public network it needs several layers of security The AP 5131 can function as a robust VPN gateway For additional information on configuring VPN security on the AP 5131 see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 AP 5131 Introduction 1 1 8 9 Content Filtering Content filtering allows system administrators to block specific commands and URL extensions from going out through the AP 5131 WAN port only Therefore content filtering affords system administrators selective control on the content proliferating the network and is a powerful screening tool Content filtering allows the blocking of up to 10 files or URL extensions and allows blocking of specific outbound HTTP SMTP and FIP requests For instructions on configuring content filtering on the AP 5131 see Configuring Content Filtering Settings on page 6 48 1 1 9 VLAN Support A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a means to electronically separate data on the same AP 5131 from a single broadcast domain into separate broadcast domains By using a VLAN you can group by logical function instead of physical location There are 16 VLANs supported on the AP 5131 An administrator can map up to 16 WLANs to 16 VLANs and enable or disable dynamic VLAN assignment In addition to these 16 VLANs the AP 5131 supports dynamic user based VLANs when using EAP authentication VLANs enable organizations to share network resources in vari
320. rk Therefore it may be practical to assign a name to a VLAN representative or the area or type of network traffic it represents A business may have offices in different locations and want to extend an internal LAN between the locations An AP 5131 managed infrastructure could provide this connectivity but it requires VLAN numbering be managed carefully to avoid conflicts between two VLANs with the same ID 5 Define a 32 ASCII character maximum VLAN Name Enter a unique name that identifies members of the VLAN Symbol recommends selecting the name carefully as the VLAN name should signify a group of clients with a common set of requirements independent of their physical location 6 Click Apply to save the changes to the new or modified VLAN and return to the VLAN Name screen 7 Click the VLAN Config button VLAN Configuration Management VLAN Tag WLANs WLAN1 Sales Front Lobby Marketing 1st Floor Marketing v Dynamic Marketing 2nd Floor Sales Generic 3rd Floor HR v Dynamic Generic Apply Cancel Help The VLAN Configuration screen displays 8 Enter a Management VLAN Tag Network Management 5 9 The Management VLAN uses a default tag value of 1 The Management VLAN is used to distinguish VLAN traffic flows The trunk port marks the frames with special tags as they pass between the AP 5131 and its destination these tags help distinguish data traffic Authentication servers such as Radius and Ker
321. rk statistics and setting configuration options Statistics track the network activity of associated MUs and data transfers on the AP interfaces The AP 5131 requires one of the following connection methods to perform a custom installation and manage the network e Secure Java Based WEB Ul use Sun Microsystems JRE 1 5 or higher available from Sun s Web site and be sure to disable Microsoft s Java Virtual Machine if installed e Command Line Interface CLI via Serial Telnet and SSH e Config file Human readable Importable Exportable via FTP and TFTP e MIB Management Information Base accessing the AP 5131 SNMP function using a MIB Browser The AP 5131 CDROM contains the following 2 MIB files e Symbol CC WS2000 MIB 2 0 standard Symbol MIB file e Symbol AP 5131 MIB AP 5131 specific MIB file Make configuration changes to AP 5131 s individually Optionally use the AP 5131 import export configuration function to download AP 5131 s settings to other AP 5131s For more information see Importing Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 1 24 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide An AP 5131 installation includes mounting the AP 5131 on a table top wall ceiling T bar or above the ceiling attic or plenum connecting the AP 5131 to the network LAN or WAN port connection connecting antennae and applying power Installation procedures vary for different environments CAUTION Symbol recommends conducting a radio site surv
322. roperties define the radio s threshold and QoS settings set the radio s channel and antenna settings and define beacon and DTIM intervals To configure the AP 5131 s 802 11a or 802 11b g radio 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Radio Configuration gt Radiol default name from the AP 5131 menu tree On a single radio AP 5131 Radio1 could either be an 802 114 or 802 11b g radio depending on which radio has been enabled AP 5131 t9 t Ratel 002 1 thi g x I Redoni thy Settings Advanced Settings Network Management 5 39 Properties Rado Senny hance Setegs Pix emort MAC Adsress CO ASFA TI AD OF S Astormate Setecto Rane Twe 02115 Annaa Drersty Fuit Power Level j Performance 180 02 11 bg mede 8 acc y Suspert Gnert Pre arrie ATS Threshold IAT Byes Boscon Semegs Beacon terval OTIM interval Grete Natse AP 51 71 2 Configure the Properties field to assign a name and placement designation for the radio Placement MAC Address Radio Type Use the Placement drop down menu to specify whether the radio is located outdoors or indoors Default placement depends on the country of operation selected for the AP 5131 The AP 5131 like other Ethernet devices has a unique hardware encoded Media Access Control MAC or IEEE address MAC addresses determine the device sending or receiving data A MAC address is a 48 bit number written as six hexadecimal bytes separat
323. rror statistics for the WLAN selected from the AP 5131 menu tree Avg Num of Retries Displays the average number of retries for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN The number in black represents average retries for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents average retries for the last hour Dropped Packets Displays the percentage of packets which the AP gave up on for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour of Undecryptable Displays the percentage of undecryptable packets for all MUs Pkts associated with the selected WLAN The number in black represents undecryptable pkts for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents undecryptable pkts for the last hour NOTE The Apply and Undo Changes buttons are not available on the WLAN Statistics screen as this screen is view only with no configurable data fields 7 144 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 6 Click the Clear WLAN Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections Do not clear the WLAN stats if currently in an important data gathering activity or risk losing all data calculations to that point 7 Click the Logout button to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is c
324. rum 0 TK Btes 17657007 X Overrun 0 Ra Frame XC 0 Gyeters Name AP S171 2 Monitoring Statistics 7 3 Refer to the Information field to reference the following AP 5131 WAN data Status The Status field displays Enabled if the WAN interface is enabled on the WAN screen If the WAN interface is disabled on the WAN screen the WAN Stats screen displays no connection information and statistics To enable the WAN connection see Configuring WAN Settings on page 5 13 HW Address The Media Access Control MAC address of the AP 5131 WAN port The WAN port MAC address is hard coded at the factory and cannot be changed IP Addresses The displayed nternet Protocol IP addresses for the AP 5131 WAN port Mask The Mask field displays the subnet mask number for the AP 5131 s WAN connection This value is set on the WAN screen Refer to Configuring WAN Settings on page 5 13 to change the subnet mask Link The Link field displays Up if the WAN connection is active between the AP 5131 and network and Down if the WAN connection is interrupted or lost Use this information to assess the current connection status of the WAN port Speed The WAN connection speed is displayed in Megabits per second Mbps for example 54Mbps If the throughput speed is not achieved examine the number of transmit and receive errors or consider increasing the supported data rate To change the data rate of the 802 114 or 802 11b g radio see Config
325. rver to use the AP 5131 as a DHCP server over the LAN connection Select the Bootp client option to enable a diskless system to discover its own IP address NOTE Symbol recommends that the WAN and LAN ports should not both be configured as DHCP clients 3 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide If using the static or DHCP Server option enter the network assigned P Address of the AP 5131 NOTE DNS names are not supported as a valid IP address for the AP 5131 The user is required to enter a numerical IP address The Subnet Mask defines the size of the subnet The first two sets of numbers specify the network domain the next set specifies the subset of hosts within a larger network These values help divide a network into subnetworks and simplify routing and data transmission If using the static or DHCP Server option enter a Default Gateway to define the numerical IP address of a router the AP 5131 uses on the Ethernet as its default gateway If using the static or DHCP Server option enter the Primary DNS Server numerical IP address If using the DHCP Server option use the Address Assignment Range parameter to specify a range of IP address reserved for mapping clients to IP addresses If a manually static mapped IP address is within the IP address range specified that IP address could still be assigned to another client To avoid this ensure all statically mapped IP addresses are outside of the IP a
326. ry for an SNMP v3 user Specify a numerical non DNS name destination IP address for receiving the traps sent by the AP 5131 SNMP agent Specify a destination User Datagram Protocol UDP port for receiving traps Enter a username specific to the SNMP capable client receiving the traps Use the Security Level drop down menu to specify a security level of noAuth no authorization AuthNoPriv authorization without privacy or AuthPriv authorization with privacy The NoAuth setting specifies no login authorization or encryption for the user The AuthNoPriv setting requires login authorization but no encryption The AuthPriv setting requires login authorization and uses the Data Encryption Standard DES Select Passwords to display the Password Settings screen for specifying authentication and password settings for an SNMP v3 user The maximum password length is 11 characters Use the Authentication Algorithm drop down menu to specify MD5 or SHA as the authentication algorithm Use the Privacy Algorithm drop down menu to define an algorithm of DES or AES 128bit If entering the same username on the SNMP Traps and SNMP Access screens the password entered on the SNMP Traps page overwrites the password entered on the SNMP Access page To avoid this problem enter the same password on both pages Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP Trap Configuration screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply b
327. s NAT is useful because it allows the authentication of incoming and outgoing requests and minimizes the number of WAN IP addresses needed when a range of local IP addresses is mapped to each WAN IP address NAT can be applied in one of two ways e One to one mapping with a private side IP address The private side IP address can belong to any of the private side subnets e One to many mapping with a configurable range of private side IP addresses Ranges can be specified from each of the private side subnets Use the NAT screen to configure IP address mappings To configure IP address mappings for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt NAT from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Network Management 5 19 AP 5131 symbo FEB mesan Corgon f NAT L an van Addrets Mappings i dwt rn WAM IP Aderess NAT Type Oulbound Mappings inbound MMappengs ee ced EB vere 15729592177 i t9 masy UN i ware Bf ORA Guster Name AP 5131 Configure the Address Mapping field to generate a WAN IP address define the NAT type and set outbound inbound NAT mappings WAN IP Address The WAN IP addresses on the NAT screen are dynamically generated from address settings applied on the WAN screen NAT Type Specify the NAT Type as 1 to 1 to map a WAN IP address to a single host local IP address 1 to 1 mapping is useful when users need dedicated addresses and for public facing servers connected to the AP 5131 Set the NAT T
328. s lt ip gt Sets the radius server lt sidx gt 1 primary or 2 secondary lt port gt 1 65535 Sets the EAP shared secret lt secret gt 1 63 characters for server lt sidx gt 1 primary or 2 secondary Enables or disables EAP reauthentication Sets the reauthentication period lt period gt in seconds 30 9999 8 66 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide enc wep keyguard accounting adv lt idx gt passkey retry mode timeout retry syslog ip mu quiet mu timeout mu tx mu retry svr timeout svr retry lt type gt lt passkey gt lt number gt lt mode gt lt period gt lt number gt lt mode gt lt ip gt lt time gt lt timeout gt lt time gt lt count gt lt time gt lt count gt Sets the maximum number of reauthentication retries lt retry gt 1 99 Enable or disable Radius accounting Defines MU timout period in seconds 1 255 Sets the maximum number of MU retries to lt retry gt 1 10 Enable or disable syslog messages Defines syslog server IP address Set the EAP MU supplicant quiet period to lt time gt seconds 1 65535 Sets the EAP MU supplicant timeout in seconds 1 255 Sets the EAP MU supplicant TX period lt time gt in seconds 1 65535 Sets the EAP maximum number of MU retries to lt count gt 1 10 Sets the server timeout lt time gt in seconds 1 255 Sets the maximu
329. s not require lining up devices for line of sight transmission and are thus desirable Within the WLAN roaming users can be handed off from one AP 5131 to another like a cellular phone system WLANs can therefore be configured around the needs of specific groups of users even when they are not in physical proximity Use the AP 5131 s Wireless Configuration screen to create new WLANSs edit the properties of existing WLANs or delete a WLAN to create space for a new WLAN Sixteen WLANs are available on the AP 5131 regardless of single or dual radio modell To configure WLANs on the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Network Management 5 23 AP 5131 A Wireless Configuration I SiN ase ATS If a WLAN is defined that WLAN displays within the Wireless Configuration screen When the AP 5131 is first booted WLAN exists as a default WLAN available immediately for connection Refer to the information within the Wireless Configuration screen to view the name ESSID AP 5131 radio designation VLAN ID and security policy of existing WLANs WLAN Name The Name field displays the name of each WLAN that has been defined The WLAN names can be modified within individual WLAN configuration screens See Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 to change the name of a WLAN ESSID Displays the Extended Services Set Identification ESSID associated with each
330. s numerous encryption and authentication techniques to protect the data transmitting on the WLAN The following authentication techniques are supported on the AP 5131 e Kerberos Authentication e FAP Authentication The following encryption techniques are supported on the AP 5131 e WEP Encryption e KeyGuard Encryption e Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Using TKIP Encryption WPA2 CCMP 802 111 Encryption In addition the AP 5131 supports the following additional security features e Firewall Security e VPN Tunnels e Content Filtering For an overview on the encryption and authentication schemes available on the AP 5131 refer to Configuring Access Point Security on page 6 1 1 1 8 1 Kerberos Authentication Authentication is a means of verifying information that is transmitted from a secure source If information is authentic you know who created it and you know that it has not been altered in any way since it was originated Authentication entails a network administrator employing a software supplicant on their computer or wireless device Authentication is critical for the security of any wireless LAN device Traditional authentication methods are not suitable for use in wireless networks where an unauthorized user can monitor network traffic and intercept passwords The use of strong authentication methods that do not disclose passwords is necessary Symbol uses the Kerberos authentication service protocol specified 1 6
331. s the SNMP v3 Engine ID Example admin system snmp access gt show eid AP 5131 snmp v3 engine id 000001846B8B4567F871AC68 admin system snmp access gt For information on configuring SNMP access settings using the applet GUI see Configuring SNMP Access Control on page 4 17 Command Line Interface Reference 8 143 AP5131 gt admin system snmp access gt add Description Adds SNMP access entries for specific v1v2 and v3 user definitions Syntax add acl lt ip1 gt lt ip2 gt viv2e lt comm gt lt access gt lt oid gt v3 lt user gt lt access gt lt auth gt lt pass1 gt Adds an entry to the SNMP access control list with lt ip1 gt as the starting IP address and lt ip2 gt and as the ending IP address Adds an SNMP v1 v2c configuration with lt comm gt as the community 1 31 characters the read write access set to ro read only or rw read write and the Object Identifier lt oid gt a string of 1 127 numbers separated by dot such as 2 3 4 5 6 lt oid gt lt sec gt lt priv gt lt pass2 gt Adds an SNMP v3 user definition with the username lt user gt 1 to 31 characters access set to ro read only or rw read write the object ID set to lt oid gt 1 to 127 chars in dot notation such as 1 3 6 1 the security type lt sec gt set to one of none auth or auth priv The following parameters must be specified if lt sec gt is not none Authentication type lt auth gt set to md5 or sh
332. security policy should be configured for WLAN1 as part of the basic configuration outlined in this guide A security policy can be configured for the WLAN from within the Quick Setup screen Policies can be defined over time and saved to be used as needed as the AP 5131 s security requirements change Symbol recommends you familiarize yourself with the security options available on the AP 5131 before defining a security policy Refer to Configuring WLAN Security Settings on page 3 9 10 Click Apply to save any changes to the AP 5131 Quick Setup screen Navigating away from 11 the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the screens being lost Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the AP 5131 Quick Setup screen to the last saved configuration 3 3 1 1 Configuring WLAN Security Settings To configure a basic security policy for a WLAN i From the AP 5131 Quick Setup screen click the Create button to the right of the Security Policy item The New Security Policy screen displays with the Manually Pre shared key No authentication and No Encryption options selected Naming and saving such a policy as is would provide no security and might only make sense in a guest network wherein no sensitive data is either transmitted or received Consequently at a minimum a basic security scheme in this case WEP 128 is recommended in a network environment wherein se
333. sed 6 11 Configuring VPN Tunnels The AP 5131 allows up to 25 VPN tunnels to either a VPN endpoint or to another AP 5131 VPN tunnels allow all traffic on a local subnet to route securely through a IPSEC tunnel to a private network A VPN port is a virtual port which handles tunneled traffic When connecting to another site using a VPN the traffic is encrypted so if anyone intercepts the traffic they cannot see what it is unless they can break the encryption The traffic is encrypted from your computer through the network to the VPN At that point the traffic is un encrypted Use the VPN screen to add and remove VPN tunnels To configure an existing VPN tunnel select it from the list in the VPN Tunnels field The selected tunnels configuration displays ina VPN Tunnel Config field To configure a VPN tunnel on the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt VPN from the AP 5131 menu tree 6 34 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide EE paseron Conigursent LO uN van duet he Fite ER vere te e TR 4 Bo yy Rado Contgurs ee width vasa fa Regus AP Detect amp joy ty Ei ta Ersten name apasat AP 5131 symbol VPN VPN Tusnels f varua 157335521 1073735111 Maerua VPN Tunnel Cont Defn Ontresy 167 298 9822 Tare hanme Mane Local Wan P J Manual Key DeDeg Remote Soba 147 Aut KE bry Exctacge Remote Gotret Mask Remote Owteway nage de Change rep Lege 2 Us
334. ss ehecniedekeeeeaues EEEE 1 8 VPN auto key settings seated PANIE 6 40 6 41 VPN COMHQUIING 22 202 sares ecee wees hu ii 6 33 VPN IKE key settings 0 20204 6 42 VPN manual key settings 000 6 36 VPN StAtUs 612 sot pbc dgdeae hihira saanee d 6 46 W wall mounting IEIET SS ree Sue Ti 2 13 MPN COU aisct aenntenhminardseaunenmeens eames 1 3 WAN configuring Tee Tere es WAN port forwarding 0 20200 5 20 WAN statistics TIETE SE ET POOE 7 2 ALE a PE S Re EE EE Re ETE 1 6 WEP encryption EEE EESTI ere 1 5 1 6 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA 1 7 WEAN AG ccc caceeiecacerandied aga gesianaes 5 29 WLAN CrSatii lt 2 cccccctcce dards egeton 5 24 WLAN COMMING n ia iiras a ar ads 5 24 WPAZ COMP 802 111 cccsierrrssarccenensen O WPA CCMP 802 11i TEEN Eolas 1 5 WLAN emai ois disseeouies peruse tedde WLAN security 05 EES ae on aca nuetcsenrnedepectwanad Ae WPA2 CCMP PERE ETIT aa 8 a IN 9 IN 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www symbol com 72E 70930 01 Revision A October 2005
335. ss to high speed data networks a Select the Keep Alive checkbox to enable occasional communications over the WAN port even when client communications to the WAN are idle Some ISPs terminate inactive connections while others do not In either case enabling Keep Alive maintains the WAN connection even when there is no traffic If the ISP drops the connection after the idle time the AP 5131 automatically reestablishes the connection to the ISP b Specify a Username entered when connecting to the ISP When the Internet session begins the ISP authenticates the username c Specify a Password entered when connecting to the ISP When the Internet session starts the ISP authenticates the password For additional AP 5131 WAN port configuration options see Configuring WAN Settings on page 5 13 7 Click the LAN tab to set a minimum set of parameters to use the AP 5131 LAN interface a Select the Enable LAN Interface checkbox to forward data traffic over the AP 5131 LAN connection The LAN connection is enabled by default b Use the This Interface drop down menu to specify how network address information is defined over the AP 5131 s LAN connection Select DHCP Client if the larger corporate network uses DHCP DHCP is a protocol that includes mechanisms for IP address allocation and delivery of host specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host Some of these parameters are IP address network mask and gateway Select DHCP Se
336. system access capabilities and timeout values For information on configuring AP 5131 access settings using the applet GUI see Configuring Data Access on page 4 5 8 4 3 System Certificate Management Commands AP5131 gt admin system gt cmgr Description Displays the Certificate Manager submenu The items available under this command include genreq Generates a Certificate Request delself Deletes a Self Certificate loadself Loads a Self Certificate signed by CA listself Lists the self certificate loaded loadca Loads trusted certificate from CA delca Deletes the trusted certificate listca Lists the trusted certificate loaded showreq Displays a certificate request in PEM format delprivkey Deletes the private key listprivkey Lists names of private keys impcert Imports the target certificate file 3 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 129 8 130 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system cmgr gt genreg Description Generates a certificate request Syntax genregq lt IDname gt lt Subject gt ou lt OrgUnit gt on lt OrgName gt cn lt City gt st lt State gt an p lt PostCode gt cc lt CCode gt e lt Email gt d lt Domain gt i lt IP gt sa lt SAlgo gt Generates a self certificate request for a Certification Authority CA wh
337. t Syntax delete lt idx gt Deletes an AP MAC address and ESSID or all addresses from the allowed list lt all gt For information on configuring the Rogue AP options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 Command Line Interface Reference 8 111 8 3 4 Network Firewall Commands AP5131 gt admin network firewall gt Description Displays the AP 5131 firewall submenu The items available under this command include show Displays the AP 5131 s current firewall configuration set Defines the AP 5131 s firewall parameters access Enables disables firewall permissions through the LAN and WAN ports advanced Displays interoperaility rules between the LAN and WAN ports 5 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 112 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network firewall gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 firewall parameters Syntax show Shows all AP 5131 s firewall settings Example admin network firewall gt show Firewall Status disable Override LAN to WAN Access disable Configurable Firewall Filters ftp bounce attack filter enable syn flood attack filter enable unaligned ip timestamp filter enable source routing attack filter enable winnuke attack filter enable seq num prediction attack filter enable mime flood attack f
338. t access Description Displays the AP 5131 access submenu show Displays AP 5131 system access capabilities set Goes to the AP 5131 system access submenu S Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the current configuration to the AP 5131 system flash quit Quits the CLI and exits the current session Command Line Interface Reference 8 127 AP5131 gt admin system access gt set Description Defines the permissions to access the AP 5131 applet CLI SNMP as well as defining their timeout values Syntax set applet applet app timeout cli cli ssh ssh auth timout inactive timeout snmp snmp admin auth server port secret lan wan lt minutes gt wan lan wan lan lt seconds gt lt minutes gt wan lan local RADIUS lt ip gt lt port gt lt pw gt Defines the applet HTTP HTTPS access parameters for the LAN port Defines the applet HTTP HTTPS access parameters for the WAN port Sets the radio interface timeout interval if no activity is detected over Applet HTTPS port 443 after the defined interval Default is 300 Mins Defines CLI Telnet access parameters for the AP 5131 WAN port Defines CLI Telnet access parameters for the AP 5131 LAN port Sets the WAN access to the CLI using the SSH Secure Shell protocol Sets the LAN access to the CLI using the SSH Secure Shell protocol Disables the radio interface if no data activity is detected after the interval de
339. t be negotiated if the initiator chooses public key encryption Operation Mode 6 44 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Local ID Type Local ID Data Remote ID Type Remote ID Data IKE Authentication Mode Select the type of ID to be used for the AP 5131 end of the SA IP Select IP if the local ID type is the IP address specified as part of the tunnel FQDN Use FQDN if the local ID is a fully qualified domain name such as sj symbol com UFQDN Select UFODN if the local ID is a user fully qualified domain name such as johndoe symbol com Specify the FODN or UFODN based on the Local ID type assigned Select the type of ID to be used for the AP 5131 end of the tunnel from the Remote D Type drop down menu IP Select the IP option if the local ID type is the IP address specified as part of the tunnel FODN Select FODN if the local ID type is a fully qualified domain name such as sj symbol com The setting for this field does not have to be fully qualified however it must match the setting for the Certificate Authority UFODN Select this item if the local ID type is a user unqualified domain name such as johndoe symbol com The setting for this field does not have to be unqualified it just must match the setting of the field of the Certificate Authority If FODN or UFODN is selected specify the data either the qualified domain name or the user name in the Remote ID Data field Select the
340. t can be assigned to a BSSID BSSID Assign a BSSID value of 1 through 4 to a WLAN in order to map the WLAN to a specific BSSID BC MC Cipher A read only field displaying the downgraded BC MC Broadcast Multicast cipher for a WLAN based on the BSSID and VLAN ID to which it has been mapped Status Displays the following color coded status Red Error Invalid Configuration Yellow Warning Broadcast Downgrade Green Good Configuration is OK Message Displays the verbal status of the WLAN and BSSID assignments If the Status column displays green the Message will typically be Configuration is OK If yellow a description of invalid configuration displays 7 Use the Primary WLAN drop down menu to select a WLAN from those WLANs sharing the same BSSID The selected WLAN is the primary WLAN for the specified BSSID Network Management 5 45 8 Click Apply to save any changes to the Radio Settings and Advanced Settings screens Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in changes to the screens being lost 9 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made to the screen and its sub screens Undo Changes reverts the settings to the last saved configuration 10 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 5 3 3 Configuring Bandwidth Management Settings The AP 5131 can be configured to grant individual WLA
341. t menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11a advanced gt show Description Displays the BSSID to WLAN mapping for the 802 11a radio Syntax show advanced Displays advanced settings for the 802 11a radio wlan Displays WLAN summary list for 802 114 radio Example Command Line Interface Reference 8 91 admin network wireless radio 802 1la advanced gt show advanced configuration is ok configuration is ok configuration is ok WLAN BSS ID BC MC Cipher Lobby 1 Open HR 2 Open Office 3 Open BSSID Primary WLAN Lobby HR Office For information on configuring the Radio 2 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 8 92 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless radio 802 11a advanced gt set Description Defines advanced parameters for the target 802 11a radio Syntax set wlan lt wlan name gt lt bssid gt Defines advanced WLAN to BSSID mapping for the target radio bss lt bss id gt lt wlan name gt Sets the BSSID to primary WLAN definition Example admin network wireless radio 802 1la advanced gt set wlan demoroom 1 admin network wireless radio 802 1la advanced gt set bss 1 demoroom For information on configuring Radio 2 Configuration options available to the AP 5131 using
342. t of the fields are not active e ESP Enables ESP for this tunnel e ESP with Authentication Enables ESP with authentication ESP Encryption Use this menu to select the encryption and authentication Algorithm algorithms for this VPN tunnel e DES Selects the DES algorithm requiring 64 bit 16 character hexadecimal keys e 3DES Selects the 3DES algorithm requiring 192 bit 64 character hexadecimal keys e AES 128 bit Selects the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e AES 192 bit Selects the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 192 bit 48 character hexadecimal keys e AES 256 bit Selects the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with 256 bit 64 character hexadecimal keys ESP Authentication Use this menu to select the authentication algorithm to be used Algorithm with ESP This menu is only active when ESP with Authentication was selected for the ESP type e MD5 Enables the Message Digest 5 algorithm requiring 128 bit 32 character hexadecimal keys e SHA1 Enables Secure Hash Algorithm 1 requiring 160 bit 40 character hexadecimal keys 4 Click Ok to return to the VPN screen Click Apply to retain the settings made on the Auto Key Settings screen 5 Click Cancel to return to the VPN screen without retaining the changes made to this screen 6 11 3 Configuring IKE Key Settings The nternet Key Exchange IKE is an IPsec standard protocol used to ensure
343. t or receive direction determines whether the encryption or decryption function is performed The device takes plain text encrypts or scrambles the text typically by mathematically combining the key with the plain text as instructed by the algorithm then transmits the data over the network At the receiving end another device takes the encrypted text and decrypts or unscrambles the text revealing the original message An unauthorized user can know the algorithm but cannot interpret the encrypted data without the appropriate key Only the sender and receiver of the transmitted data know the key Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is an encryption security protocol specified in the IEEE Wireless Fidelity Wi Fi standard 802 11b and supported by the AP 5131 AP WEP encryption is designed to provide a WLAN with a level of security and privacy comparable to that of a wired LAN The level of protection provided by WEP encryption is determined by the encryption key length and algorithm An encryption key is a string of case sensitive characters used to encrypt and decrypt data packets transmitted between a mobile unit MU and the AP 5131 An AP 5131 and associated wireless clients must use the same encryption key typically 1 through 4 to interoperate For additional information on configuring WEP see Configuring WEP Encryption on page 6 15 1 1 8 4 KeyGuard Encryption Use KeyGuard to shield the master encryption keys from being discovered through hackin
344. ta rate refer to the RF Statistics and Errors fields to troubleshoot Displays the percentage of the total packets that are non unicast Non unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets The number in black represents packets for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents packets for the last hour Monitoring Statistics 7 13 4 Refer to the RF Status field to view the following MU signal noise and performance information for the WLAN selected from the AP 5131 menu tree Avg MU Signal Displays the average RF signal strength in dBm for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour If the signal is low consider mapping the MU to a different WLAN if a better functional grouping of MUs can be determined Avg MU Noise Displays the average RF noise for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN The number in black represents MU noise for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents MU noise for the last hour If MU noise is excessive consider moving the MU closer to the AP 5131 or in area with less conflicting network traffic Avg MU SNR Displays the average Signal to Noise Ratio SNA for all MUs associated with the selected WLAN The Signal to Noise Ratio is an indication of overall RF performance on your wireless networks 5 Refer to the Errors field to view MU association e
345. te 9 0 Wade Grae RF States Errors OwWi ter ag MU Signal 5 sEm Avg Mm of Hewes 0D FER Wemiess suan Avg MU Note 08 28m Cropped Packets 5 P MANI State fog MU SM 0S 26 Undecryptobhe Pats o L srarhary Sw rr pra ee BB test 22 vecencs BJ wstnour gt oy Ronold 11 nly Stadetes Lg ie t beat WLAN Sew Hg MU Stat LA inoan AP _ Hets Logout Gyehens Name AP S171 2 Refer to the Information field to view specific WLAN address MU and security scheme information for the WLAN selected from the AP 5131 menu tree ESSID Displays the Extended Service Set ID ESS D for the target WLAN Radio s Displays the name of the 802 114 or 802 11b g radio the target WLAN is using for AP 5131 transmissions Authentication Type Displays the authentication type 802 1x EAP or Kerberos defined for the WLAN If the authentication type does not match the desired scheme for the WLAN or needs to be enabled see Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page 6 5 7 12 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Encryption Type Displays the encryption method defined for the WLAN If the encryption type does not match the desired scheme for the WLAN or needs to be enabled see Enabling Authentication and Encryption Schemes on page 6 5 Num Associated MUs Displays the total number of MUs currently associated with the 3 Refer to the Traffic field to view performance and throughput information for the WLAN WLAN If this n
346. tected rogue devices displayed within the Rogue APs table 2 Enter a value in minutes in the Allowed APs Age Out Time field to indicate the number of elapsed minutes before an AP will be removed from the approved list and reevaluated A zero 0 for this value default value indicates an AP can remain on the approved AP list permanently 3 Enter a value in minutes in the Rogue APs Age Out Time field to indicate the number of elapsed minutes before an AP will be removed from the rogue AP list and reevaluated A zero 0 for this value default value indicates an AP can remain on the rogue AP list permanently 4 Highlight an AP from within the Rogue APs table and click the Add to Allowed APs List button to move the device into the list of Allowed APs 5 Click the Add All to Allowed APs List button to move each of the APs displayed within the Rogue APs table to the list of allowed APs 6 56 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 6 Highlight a rogue AP and click the Details button to display a screen with device and detection information specific to that rogue device This information is helpful in determining if a rogue AP should be moved to the Allowed APs table For more information on the displaying information on detected rogue APs see Displaying Rogue AP Details on page 6 56 7 Click Apply to save any changes to the Active APs screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking Apply results in all changes to the s
347. teristics Operating Channels 802 1 802 1 802 1 1a radio Channels 1 35 4920 5825 MHz 1b g radio Channels 1 13 2412 2472 MHz 1b g radio Channel 14 2484 MHz Japan only Actual operating frequencies depend on regulatory rules and certification agencies Receiver Sensitivity 802 11a Radio 802 11b g Radio 6 Mbps 88 11 Mbps 84 9 Mbps 87 5 5 Mbps 88 12 Mbps 85 2 Mbps 90 18 Mbps 81 1 Mbps 94 24 Mbps 79 36 Mbps 75 48 Mbps 70 54 Mbps 68 Radio Data Rates 802 11a radio 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbit Sec 802 11g radio 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbit Sec 802 11b radio 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps Wireless Medium Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM A 4 Antenna Specifications The AP 5131 antenna suite has the following specifications 2452 APA2 01 could render the AP 5131 s Rogue AP Detector Mode CAUTION Using an antenna other than the Dual Band Antenna Part No ML feature inoperable Contact your Symbol sales associate for specific information A 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide A 4 1 2 4 GHz Antenna Matrix The f ollowing section describes each 2 4 GHz antenna approved for use with the AP 5131 Below is a table of each of these 2 4 GHz antennas and Symbol s part number Symbol Part Number Antenna Type Nominal Net Gain dBi ML 2499 11PNA2 01 Wide Angle Directional 8 5 ML 2499 HPA3 01 Omni Directi
348. teti Mar Retos 2 FD retien WRADCCMP 002 110 0 Apai Cancet Hep saree Appi Woe 5 Configure the Server Settings field as required to define address information for the authentication server Configuring Access Point Security 6 13 Radius Server Specify the numerical non DNS IP address of a primary Remote Address Dial In User Service RADIUS server Optionally specify the IP address of a secondary server The secondary server acts as a failover server if the primary server cannot be contacted An ISP or a network administrator provides these addresses RADIUS is a client server protocol and software enabling remote access clients to communicate with a server used to authenticate users and authorize access to the requested system or service RADIUS Port Specify the port on which the primary RADIUS server is listening Optionally specify the port of a secondary failover server Older RADIUS servers listen on ports 1645 and 1646 Newer servers listen on ports 1812 and 1813 Port 1645 or 1812 is used for authentication Port 1646 or 1813 is used for accounting The ISP or a network administrator needs to confirm the appropriate primary and secondary port numbers for authentication RADIUS Shared Specify a shared secret for authentication on the primary RADIUS Secret server The shared secret is required to match the shared secret on the Radius server Optionally specify a shared secret for a secondary failover server Use shared
349. the browser If selected a message displays warning the user all current configuration settings will be lost with the exception of WAN and SNMP settings Before using this feature Symbol recommends using the Config Import Export screen to export the current configuration for safekeeping see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 Use the Restart AP 5131 field to restart the AP if necessary Restart AP 5131 Click the Restart AP 5131 button to reboot the AP Restarting the AP 5131 resets all data collection values to zero Symbol does not recommend restarting the AP during significant system uptime or data collection activities Click Apply to save any changes to the System Settings screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost NOTE The Apply button is not needed for restoring the AP 5131 default configuration or restarting the AP 5131 System Configuration 4 5 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the System Settings screen to the last saved configuration Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 2 Configuring Data Access Use the AP 5131 Access screen to enable disable data throughput to the AP 5131 s LAN and WAN interfaces and display screens for changing administra
350. the AP 5131 forwards it over all enabled interfaces except over the interface the ARP request packet was received On receiving the ARP response packet the AP 5131 database keeps a record of the destination address along with the receiving interface With this information the AP 5131 forwards any directed packet to the correct destination Transmitted ARP request packets echo back to other MUs The AP 5131 removes from its database the destination or interface information that is not used for a specified time The AP refreshes its database when it transmits or receives data from these destinations and interfaces 1 2 4 Media Types The AP 5131 radio interface conforms to IEEE 802 11a b g specifications The interface operates at a maximum 54Mbps 802 114 radio using direct sequence radio technology The AP 5131 supports multiple cell operations with fast roaming between cells Within a direct sequence system each cell can operates independently Adding cells to the network provides increased coverage area and total system capacity The RS 232 serial port provides a Command Line Interface CLI connection The serial link supports a direct serial connection The AP 5131 is a Data Terminal Equipment DTE device with male pin connectors for the RS 232 port Connecting the AP 5131 to a PC requires a null modem serial cable 1 2 5 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Spread spectrum broadband uses a narrowband signal to spread the transmission over a
351. the Edit button if necessary to launch the Edit WLAN screen Use the Edit WLAN screen to revise the properties of an existing WLAN that would continue display and be selectable within the Wireless Configuration screen For additional information see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 5 Consider using the Delete button to remove an existing WLAN if it has become outdated and is no longer required or if you are coming close the maximum 16 WLANs available per AP 5131 6 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 5 3 1 Creating Editing Individual WLANs If the WLANs displayed within the Wireless Configuration screen do not satisfy your network requirements you can either create a new WLAN or edit the properties of an existing WLAN NOTE Before editing the properties of an existing WLAN ensure it is not being used by an AP 5131 radio or is a WLAN that is needed in its current configuration Once updated the previous configuration is not available unless saved Network Management 5 25 Use the New WLAN and Edit WLAN screens as required to create modify a WLAN To create a new WLAN or edit the properties of an existing WLAN 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless from the AP 5131 menu tree The Wireless Configuration screen displays 2 Click the Create button to configure a new WLAN or highlight a WLAN and clic
352. the applet GUI see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Command Line Interface Reference 8 93 8 3 3 5 Network Quality of Service QoS Commands AP5131 gt admin network wireless qos gt Description Displays the AP 5131 Quality of Service QoS submenu The items available under this command include show Displays AP 5131 QoS policy information create Defines the parameters of the QoS policy edit Edits the settings of an existing QoS policy delete Removes an existing QoS policy i Goes to the parent menu j Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI 8 94 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network wireless qos gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 s current QoS policy by summary or individual policy Syntax show summary Displays all exisiting QoS policies that have been defined policy lt index gt Displays the configuration for the requested QoS policy Example admin network wireless qos gt show summary 1 Default 2 IP Phones 3 Video 101 Audio Dept Vidio Dept admin network wireless qos gt show policy 1 Policy Name Support Legacy Voice Mode Multicast address 1 Multicast address 2 WMM QOS Extension Mode IP Phones disable 01005E000000 09000E000000 disable For information on configuring the WLAN QoS options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Setting the WLAN Qual
353. the configuration file where an error or ambiguous input was detected 4 34 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide message displays defining the line number where the error occurred The configuration is still imported except for the error Consequently it is possible to import an invalid configuration The user is required to fix the problem and repeat the import operation until an error free import takes place A CAUTION f errors occur when importing the configuration file a parsing 5 Click Apply to save the filename and Server IP information The Apply button does not execute the import or export operation only saves the settings entered 6 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on Config Import Export screen to the last saved configuration 7 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 8 Updating Device Firmware Symbol periodically releases updated versions of the AP 5131 device firmware to the Symbol Web site If the AP 5131 firmware version displayed on the System Settings page see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 is older than the version on the Web site Symbol recommends updating the AP 5131 to the latest firmware version for full feature functionality If a firmware update is required use the Firmware Update screen to specify a filena
354. the destination IP address for each tunnel configured to use IKE for automatic key exchange Lists the remaining life of the current IKE key for each tunnel When the remaining life on the IKE key reaches 0 IKE initiates a negotiation for a new key IKE keys associated with a renegotiated tunnel 4 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 6 12 Configuring Content Filtering Settings Content filtering allows system administrators to block specific commands and URL extensions from going out through the AP 5131 WAN port Therefore content filtering affords system administrators selective control on the content proliferating the network and is a powerful data and network Configuring Access Point Security 6 49 screening tool Content filtering allows the blocking of up to 10 files or URL extensions and allows blocking of specific outbound HTTP SMTP and FIP requests To configure content filtering for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt WAN gt Content Filtering from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol Content Filtering HTTP surp Goce Oufhownd SMTP Commands wi r MAL r Oat 7 ame R pata Mork Outlowns URL Extensions r FIP More Outbound FTP AcSons Oyster Marne APS 30 2 Configure the HTTP field to configure block Web proxies and URL extensions Block Outbound HTTP HyperText Transport
355. the entire AP 5131 system log file Example admin system logs gt view Jan 7 16 14 00 none syslogd 1 4 1 restart remote reception Jan 7 16 14 10 none klogd ps log fc queue maintenance Jan 7 16 14 41 none klogd ps log fc queue maintenance Jan 7 16 15 43 none last message repeated 2 times Jan 7 16 16 01 none CC 4 16pm up 6 days 16 16 load average 0 00 0 01 0 00 Jan 7 16 16 01 none CC Mem 62384 32520 29864 0 0 Jan 7 16 16 01 none CC 0000077e 0012e95b 0000d843 00000000 00000003 0000121 e 00000000 00000000 0037ebf7 000034dc 00000000 00000000 00000000 Jan 7 16 16 13 none klogd ps log fc queue maintenance Jan 7 16 16 44 none klogd ps log fc queue maintenance Jan 7 16 17 15 none klogd ps log fc queue maintenance Jan 7 16 17 15 none klogd ps log fc queue maintenance For information on configuring logging settings using the applet GUI see Logging Configuration on page 4 28 Command Line Interface Reference 8 159 AP5131 gt admin system logs gt delete Description Deletes the log files Syntax delete Deletes the AP 5131 system log file Example admin system logs gt delete For information on configuring logging settings using the applet GUI see Logging Configuration on page 4 28 8 160 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin system logs gt send Description Sends log and core file to an FIP Server Syntax send Sends the system log file
356. tion can be configured independently for both AP 5131 802 11a and 802 11b g radios if using a dual radio sku AP 5131 A rogue detection interval is the user defined interval the AP 5131 waits to search for rogue APs Additionally the AP 5131 does not detect rogue APs on illegal channels channels not allowed by the regulatory requirements of the country the AP 5131 is operating in 6 52 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide The rogue detection interval is used in conjunction with Symbol MUs that identify themselves as rogue detection capable to the AP 5131 The detection interval defines how often the AP 5131 requests these MUs to scan for a rogue AP A shorter interval can effect the performance of the MU but it will also decrease the time it takes for the AP 5131 to scan for a rogue AP A longer interval will have less of an impact to the MU s but it will increase the amount of time used to detect rogue APs Therefore the interval should be set according to the perceived risk of rogue devices and the criticality of MU performance 2452 APA2 01 could render the AP 5131 s Rogue AP Detector Mode feature inoperable Contact your Symbol sales associate for specific information f CAUTION Using an antenna other than the Dual Band Antenna Part No ML To configure Rogue AP detection for the AP 5131 1 Select Network Configuration gt Wireless gt Rogue AP Detection from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 p RE Piem
357. tng a APS Acre TG Comtcate Mort H lig SNUP acco BNMP Trap Cortgaraton MMP Trap AP 5131 symbol SNMP Traps SNMP wtW2c Trap ConSguration 157 335161 1e SNMP s Trap Costgurapen ee SPA in wer woh Parnus e apy nde Change ep Lege Oyster Marne AP 5131 2 Configure the SNMP v1 v2c Trap Configuration field if SNMP v1 v2c Traps are used to modify the following Add Delete Destination IP Port Community SNMP Version Click Add to create a new SNMP v1 v2c Trap Configuration entry Click Delete to remove a selected SNMP v1 v2c Trap Configuration entry Specify a numerical non DNS name destination IP address for receiving the traps sent by the AP 5131 SNMP agent Specify a destination User Datagram Protocol UDP port for receiving traps The default is 162 Enter a community name specific to the SNMP capable client that receives the traps Use the SNMP Version drop down menu to specify v1 or v2 Some SNMP clients support only SNMP v1 traps while others support SNMP v2 traps and possibly both verify the correct traps are in use with clients that support them 3 Configure the SNMP v3 Trap Configuration field if SNMP v3 Traps are used to modify the following Add Delete Destination IP Port Username Security Level Passwords System Configuration 4 21 Click Add to create a new SNMP v3 Trap Configuration entry Select Delete to remove an ent
358. tor passwords Use the AP 5131 Access screen checkboxes to enable or disable LAN and or WAN access using the protocols and ports listed If access is disabled this effectively locks out the AP administrator from configuring the AP 5131 using that interface To avoid jeopardizing the network data managed by the AP 5131 Symbol recommends enabling only those interfaces used in the routine daily management of the network and disabling all other interfaces until they are required To configure access for the AP 5131 Select System Configuration gt AP 5131 Access from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol et A 4 BE ereak Contguranert AP 5131 Access E a e fguww os Pi AP 51 71 Access Sree Sane fem LAN from WAN cp APSF Ae m SIH Access Aggiet HTTP pon t0 G Comtcate Mort L fig Snup Acce Appii HTTPS odt 447 NTP Server CU TENET Got N r ggg Contgurate CU SSH pert 22 A Cong meone SNMP Gon 161 Q Furrware upeaa dd an A States Apper Timos Admn Acitver sbon HTTPS Timeost 4d Mee a Rafiys Gerver for Amm Athens sbon esem Marne ASt 4 6 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 2 Use the AP 5131 Access field checkboxes to enable disable the following AP 5131 interfaces Applet HTTP port 80 Select the LAN and or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the AP 5131 configuration applet using a Web browser Applet HTTPS port Select the LAN and or WAN checkboxes to enable access to the 443 AP
359. trap interval lt rate gt Sets denial of service trap interval cold enable disable Enables disables the system cold start trap cfg enable disable Enables disables a configuration changes trap rogue ap enable disable Enables disables a trap when a rogue ap Is detected ap radar enable disable Enables disables the AP Radar Detection trap rate lt rate gt lt scope gt lt value gt Sets the particular lt rate gt to monitor to lt value gt given the indicated lt scope gt See table below for information on the possible values for lt rate gt lt scope gt and lt value gt min pkt lt pkt gt Sets the minimum number of packets required for rate traps Choices lt rate gt to fire 1 65535 Allowed Range for lt value gt Allowed lt scope gt Interpretation pkts Packets second gt lt value gt 0 9999 99 wlan ap mu mbps Throughput gt lt value gt 0 108 00 wlan ap mu avg bps Average bit speed in mbps lt lt value gt 0 108 00 wlan ap mu pet nu not UNICAST gt lt value gt 0 100 00 wlan ap mu avg signal Negative average signal lt lt value gt 0 100 00 wlan ap mu avg retries Average retries gt lt value gt 0 16 00 wlan ap mu pet dropped dropped packets gt lt value gt 0 100 00 wlan ap mu pet undecrypt undecryptable gt lt value gt 0 100 00 wlan ap mu assoc mus Number of associated MUs gt lt value gt 0 200 wlan ap Note lt value gt can be a number with up to two decimal places except
360. trol list entries viv2c Lists SNMP v1 v2c configuration v3 lt idx gt Lists SNMP v3 user definition with index lt idx gt all Lists all SNMP v3 user definitions Example admin system snmp access gt list acl index start ip 209 236 24 46 1 209 236 24 1 admin system snmp access gt list viv2 index community access 1 public read only 2 private read write admin system snmp access gt list v3 2 index username access permission object identifier security level auth algorithm auth password privacy algorithm privacy password 2 judy read write 1 3 6 1 auth priv md5 kkkkkkkxk des kkkkkkxk For information on configuring SNMP access settings using the applet GUI see Configuring SNMP Access Control on page 4 17 8 146 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 4 4 2 System SNMP Traps Commands AP5131 gt admin system snmp traps Description Displays the SNMP traps submenu The items available under this command are shown below show Shows SNMP trap parameters set Sets SNMP trap parameters add Adds SNMP trap entries delete Deletes SNMP trap entries list Lists SNMP trap entries Zs Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI AP5131 gt admin system snmp traps gt show Description Shows SNMP trap parameters Syntax show trap rate trap Example Shows SNMP trap parameter settings Sh
361. trol on page 4 17 5 If configuring SNMP v3 user definitions set the SNMP v3 engine ID AP 5131 SNMP v3 Engine ID The AP 5131 SNMP v3 Engine ID field lists the unique SNMP v3 Engine ID for the AP 5131 This ID is used in SNMP v3 as the source for a trap response or report It is also used as the destination ID when sending get getnext getbulk set or inform commands System Configuration 4 17 6 Click Apply to save any changes to the SNMP Access screen Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screen being lost 7 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the SNMP Access screen to the last saved configuration 8 Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed For additional SNMP configuration information see e Configuring SNMP Access Control e Enabling SNMP Traps e Configuring Specific SNMP Traps e Configuring SNMP FF Trap Thresholds 4 4 1 Configuring SNMP Access Control Use the SNMP Access Control screen as launched from the SNMP Access screen to specify which users can read SNMP generated information and if capable modify related settings from an SNMP capable client Use the SNMP Access Control screen s Access Control List ACL to limit by Internet Protocol IP address who can access the AP 5131
362. ts The Total column displays the average total packets per second crossing the radio The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received The Tx column displays the average total packets per second transmitted The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour The Total column displays average throughput on the radio The Rx column displays average throughput in Mbps for packets received The Tx column displays average throughput for packets transmitted The number in black represents statistics for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour Use this information to assess whether the current throughput is sufficient to support required network traffic The Total column displays the average bit speed in Mbps for the radio This includes all packets transmitted and received The number in black represents statistics for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour The approximate RF utilization of the AP 5131 radio This value is calculated as throughput divided by average bit speed The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour Displays the percentage of total radio packets that are non unicast Non unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets The number in bl
363. ts in a terminated connection The default is 2 retries Syslog for MUs interoperating with the AP 5131 and EAP authentication server Enable Accounting Select the Enable Accounting checkbox to implement the MU timeout and retry definitions configured within the Radius Accounting field Configuring Access Point Security 6 15 MU Timeout Specify the time in seconds for the AP 5131 s retransmission of EAP Request packets The default is 10 seconds If this time is exceeded the authetnication session is terminated Retries Specify the number of retries for the MU to retransmit a missed frame to the Radius server before it times out of the authentication session The default is 2 retries Enable Syslog Select the Enable Syslog checkbox to enable syslog messages relating to EAP events to be written to the specified syslog server Syslog Server IP Enter the IP address of the destination syslog server to be used to log EAP events 9 Click the Apply button to save any changes made within the 802 1x EAP Settings field including all 5 selectable tabs of the New Security Policy screen 10 Click the Cancel button to undo any changes made within the 802 1x EAP Settings field and return to the WLAN screen This reverts all settings for the 802 1x EAP Settings field to the last saved configuration 6 6 Configuring WEP Encryption Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in the EEE Wireless Fidelity Wi Fi standar
364. ual WLANs on page 5 24 To view AP 5131 WLAN Statistics 1 Select Status and Statistics gt Wireless Stats from the AP 5131 menu tree 2 Monitoring Statistics 7 9 AP 5131 LAN Stat Total AP RF Trank maade ee Tatai phts per second Pps vw Stats C a Total bts per second 25 wbes he i Total associated MUs Dysto Name aP 5531 Refer to the WLAN Summary field to reference high level data for each enabled WLAN Name Displays the names of all the enabled WLANs on the AP 5131 For information on enabling a WLAN see Enabling Wireless LANs WLANs on page 5 22 MUs Displays the total number of MUs currently associated with each enabled WLAN Use this information to assess if the MUs are properly grouped by function within each enabled WLAN To adjust the maximum number of MUs permissible per WLAN see Creating Editing Individual WLANs on page 5 24 F put Displays the total throughput in Megabits per second Mbps for each active WLAN ABS Displays the Average Bit Speed ABS in Megabits per second Mbps for each active WLAN displayed NU Displays a percentage of the total packets for each active WLAN that are non unicast Non unicast packets include broadcast and multicast packets 7 10 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Retries Clear All WLAN Stats 3 Refer to the Total AP RF Traffic field to view throughput information for the AP 5131 and WLAN Total
365. ubmenu The items available under this command are add Adds user defined routes delete Deletes user defined routes list Lists user defined routes show Displays the existing AP 5131 router configuration X Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI Command Line Interface Reference 8 117 AP5131 gt admin network router gt show Description Shows the AP 5131 route table Syntax show Shows the AP 5131 route table Example admin network router gt show index destination netmask gateway interface metric 1 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 2 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 3 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 lan 0 4 192 168 24 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 wan 0 5 157 235 19 5 255 255 255 0 192 168 24 1 wan 0 For information on configuring the Router options available to the AP 5131 using the applet GUI see Configuring Router Settings on page 5 47 8 118 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network router gt add Description Adds user defined routes Syntax add lt dest gt lt netmask gt lt gw gt lt iface gt lt metric gt Adds a route with destination IP address lt dest gt IP netmask lt netmask gt destination gateway IP address lt gw gt interface LAN or WAN lt iface gt and metric set to lt metric gt 1 15 Example admin network router gt add 192 168 2 100 255 255 255 0
366. uction This guide provides configuration and setup information for the AP 5131 model access point Document Conventions The following document conventions are used in this document NOTE Indicate tips or special requirements A CAUTION Indicates conditions that can cause equipment damage or data loss viii AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide WARNING Indicates a condition or procedure that could result in personal injury or A N equipment damage Notational Conventions The following notational conventions are used in this document e italics are used to highlight specific items in the general text and to identify chapters and sections in this and related documents e Bullets indicate e action items e lists of alternatives e lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential e Sequential lists those describing step by step procedures appear as numbered lists Service Information If a problem is encountered with the AP 5131 contact the Symbol Customer Support Refer to Appendix C for contact information Before calling have the model number and serial number at hand If the problem cannot be solved over the phone you may need to return your equipment for servicing If that is necessary you will be given specific instructions Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used Shipping the units
367. uctions on setting the radio transmit power level see Configuring the 802 11a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 1 1 19 Advanced Event Logging Capability The AP 5131 provides the capability for periodically logging system events Logging events is useful in assessing the throughput and performance of the AP 5131 or troubleshooting problems on the AP 5131 Introduction 1 13 AP 5131 managed Local Area Network LAN For more information see Logging Configuration on page 4 28 1 1 20 Configuration File Import Export Functionality Configuration settings for an AP 5131 can be downloaded from the current configuration of another AP 5131 This affords the administrator the opportunity to save the current configuration before making significant changes or restoring the default configuration For information on importing or exporting configuration files see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 1 1 21 Default Configuration Restoration The AP 5131 has the ability to restore its default configuration or a partial default configuration with the exception of current WAN and SNMP settings Restoring the default configuration is a good way to create new WLANs if the MUs the AP 5131 supports have been moved to different radio coverage areas For information on restoring a default or partial default configuration see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 1 1 22 DHCP Support The AP 5131 can use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to
368. umber seems excessive consider segregating MU s to other WLANs if appropriate selected from the AP 5131 menu tree Pkts per second Throughput Avg Bit Speed Non unicast pkts The Total column displays the average total packets per second crossing the selected WLAN The Rx column displays the average total packets per second received on the selected WLAN The Tx column displays the average total packets per second sent on the selected WLAN The number in black represents this statistic for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents this statistic for the last hour The Total column displays average throughput in Mbps for a given time period on the selected WLAN The Rx column displays average throughput in Mbps for packets received on the selected WLAN The Tx column displays average throughput for packets sent on the selected WLAN The number in black represents statistics for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour Use this information to assess whether the current AP 5131 data rate is sufficient to support required network traffic The Total column displays the average bit speed in Mbps for a given time period on the selected WLAN This includes all packets that are sent and received The number in black represents statistics for the last 30 seconds and the number in blue represents statistics for the last hour If the bit speed is significantly slower than the selected da
369. unnel s properties Default Gateway Displays the WAN interface s default gateway IP address Tunnel Name Enter a name to define the VPN tunnel The tunnel name is used to uniquely identify each tunnel Select a name best suited to that tunnel s function so it can be selected again in the future if required in a similar application Local WAN IP Enter the WAN s numerical non DNS IP address in order for the tunnel to pass traffic to a remote network Remote Subnet Specify the numerical non DNS IP address for the Remote Subnet Remote Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for the tunnel s remote network for the tunnel The remote subnet mask is the subnet setting for the remote network the tunnel connects to Remote Gateway Enter a numerical non DNS remote gateway IP address for the tunnel The remote gateway IP address is the gateway address on the remote network the VPN tunnel connects to Remote Subnet Mask Enter a numerical non DNS remote gateway IP address for the tunnel The remote gateway IP address is the gateway address on the remote network the VPN tunnel connects to Manual Key Exchange Selecting Manual Key Exchange requires you to manually enter keys for AH and or ESP encryption and authentication Click the Manual Key Settings button to configure the settings Manual Key Settings Select Manual Key Exchange and click the Manual Key Settings button to open a screen where AH authentication and ESP encryption authentication
370. uration submenu firewall Goes to the firewall submenu router Goes to the router submenu Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the current configuration to the system flash quit Quits the CLI and exits the current session Command Line Interface Reference 8 13 8 3 1 Network LAN Commands AP5131 gt admin network lan gt Description Displays the LAN submenu The items available under this command are shown below show Shows current AP 5131 LAN port parameters set Sets LAN parameters vlan Defines LAN VLAN configuration values dhcp Goes to the LAN DHCP submenu type filter Goes to the type filter submenu to specify data types allowed or denied access to the AP 5131 WLAN traffic Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the configuration to system flash quit Quits the CLI For an overview of the AP 5131 s LAN configuration options using the applet GUI see Configuring the LAN Interface on page 5 1 8 14 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide AP5131 gt admin network lan gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 LAN settings Syntax show Shows the settings for the AP 5131 LAN interface Example admin network lan gt show LAN Interface enable LAN Timeout 45 sec 802 11q Trunking disable 802 1x Port Authentication Username admin Password kkkkkkkxk LAN IP mode DHCP server IP Address Network Mask Default Gateway Domain Name Primary
371. uring the 802 1 1a or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 Refer to the Received field to reference data received over the AP 5131 WAN port RX Packets RX packets are data packets received over the WAN port The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN interface was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted RX Bytes RX bytes are bytes of information received over the WAN port The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN interface was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted To restart the AP 5131 to begin a new data collection see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 7 4 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide RX Errors RX Dropped RX Overruns RX Frame RX errors include dropped data packets buffer overruns and frame errors on inbound traffic The number of RX errors is a total of RX Dropped RX Overruns and RX Carrier errors Use this information to determine performance quality of the current WAN connection The RX Dropped field displays the number of data packets that fail to reach the WAN interface If this number appears excessive consider a new connection to the device RX overruns are buffer overruns on the WAN connection RX overruns occur when packets are received faster than the WAN port can handle them If RX overruns are excessive consider reducing the data rate for more information see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 The RX Frame field displa
372. utton results in all changes to the screen being lost Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on SNMP Trap Configuration screen to the last saved configuration Click Logout to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 4 22 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 4 4 3 Configuring Specific SNMP Traps Use the SNMP Traps screen to enable specific traps on the AP 5131 Symbol recommends defining traps to capture unauthorized devices operating within the AP 5131 coverage area Trap configuration depends on the network machine that receives the generated traps SNMP v1 v2c and v3 trap configurations function independently In a mixed SNMP environment traps can be sent using configurations for both SNMP v1 v2c and v3 To configure specific SNMP traps on the AP 5131 1 Select System Configuration gt SNMP Access gt SNMP Traps from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol BE nierwon Cortguraner SNMP Traps ee ces MU Trape SNMP Traps oO then Sear a PAH Ate G C onicate vg v ly GNMP acco v NMP at SNMP Tr SNUP Trapa oq paor SNUP R r ONF PT Bie y Netesrk Tras nwe Send tap every Secs Legeut Gystern name APSE 3t 2 Configure the MU Traps field to generate traps for MU associations MU association denials and MU authentication denials When a t
373. utton to display a screen for verifying the link with an associated MU For detailed information on conducting a ping test for an MUs see Pinging Individual MUs on page 7 24 NOTE Anecho test initiated from the AP 5131 MU Stats Summary screen uses WNMP pings Therefore target clients that are not Symbol MUs are unable to respond to the echo test 5 Click the MU Authentication Statistics button to display a screen with detailed authentication statistics for the an MU For information on individual MU authentication statistics see MU Authentication Statistics on page 7 25 6 Click the MU Details button to display a screen with detailed statistics for a selected MU For detailed information on individual MU authentication statistics see Viewing MU Details on page 7 22 7 Click the Clear All MU Stats button to reset each of the data collection counters to zero in order to begin new data collections 7 22 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 Click the Logout button to securely exit the AP 5131 Symbol Access Point applet A prompt displays confirming the logout before the applet is closed 7 5 1 Viewing MU Details Use the MU Details screen to display throughput signal strength and transmit error information for a specific MU associated with the AP 5131 The MU Details screen is separated into four fields MU Properties MU Traffic MU Signal and MU Errors The MU Properties field displays basic informatio
374. v 0221109 2 4 OH Time Server r O02 tta 6 Ow WAN LAN WAN WAN MANDO WUANI y Erato LAN isferface Legpeg ConSgurat Thee interface al 4 esso 4 LECIE IP agamas i E Q imwas Upcate mo k es tatas udset Mash Awatatie On Detect Oatewar Pomary DONS Gereer Becutty Petey Deteut Adsrets Asmgnmert Range v Gestern Mane art 31 2 Enter a System Name for the AP 5131 The System Name is useful if multiple Symbol devices are being administered 3 Select the Country for the AP 5131 s country of operation from the drop down menu The AP 5131 prompts the user for the correct country code on the first login A warning message also displays stating that an incorrect country settings may result in illegal radio operation Selecting the correct country is central to legally operating the AP 5131 Each country has its own regulatory restrictions concerning electromagnetic emissions and the maximum RF signal strength that can be transmitted To ensure compliance with national and local laws be sure to set the Country accurately CLI and MIB users cannot configure their AP 5131 until a two character country code for example United States us is set Refer to Country Codes on page A 5 for the two character country codes NOTE The System Name and Country are also configurable within the System Settings screen Refer to Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 if necessary to set a system location and admin email addr
375. xecuted over the AP 5131 s WAN or LAN interface lt iface gt For information on updating AP 5131 device firmware using the applet GUI see Updating Device Firmware on page 4 34 8 172 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 8 4 9 System Test Commands AP5131 gt admin system test gt Description Displays the AP 5131 test submenu The items available under this command include show Displays the AP 5131 test options set Defines the parameters of an AP 5131 system test 4 Goes to the parent menu Goes to the root menu save Saves the current configuration to the AP 5131 system flash quit Quits the CLI and exits the current session Command Line Interface Reference 8 173 AP5131 gt admin system test gt show Description Displays the AP 5131 test options Syntax show Displays the AP 5131 test options Example admin system test gt show half fc windows for ap100 val OxO0000 0 broadcast in psp val 0x0000 1 drop bc pre wep val 0x0000 1 wpa2 tkip disabled val 0x0000 wee Oe wireless disable val 0x0000 vee Desc psp fix more data val 0x0000 220 0244 wpa2 tkip disabled val 0x0000 phen es J wpa ie before rsn ie val 0x0000 0 eee disable wpa countermeasures val 0x0000 OF eceiseienaens ss int1 0x46 int2 0x0 int3 0x0 int4 0x0 str1 str2 str3 str4 evtlog
376. xport operation Building configuration file File transfer In progress File transfer Done m m m m m Export operation Done Export TFTP Example admin system cfg update gt set server 192 168 0 101 admin system cfg update gt export tftp Started Done Export operation Building configuration file File transfer In progress File transfer Done mm m om m m Export operation Done For information on importing exporting AP 5131 configurations using the applet GUI see mporting Exporting Configurations on page 4 30 Command Line Interface Reference 8 167 AP5131 gt admin system cfg update gt import Description Imports the AP 5131 configuration to the AP 5131 Syntax import ftp Imports the AP 5131 configuration file from the FIP server Use the set command to set the server user password and file tftp Imports the AP 5131 configuration from the THP server Use the set command to set the server and file Example Import FTP Example admin system cfg update gt set server 192 168 22 12 admin system cfg update gt set user myadmin admin system cfg update gt set passwd mysecret admin system cfg update gt import ftp Import operation Started File transfer In progress File transfer Done Import operation Done Import THP Example admin system cfg update gt set server 192 168 0 101 admin system cfg update gt import tftp Import operation St
377. y security policy screens used to configure the authetication and encryption schemes available to the AP 5131 These security policies can be used on more than one WLAN To create a security policy supporting 802 1x EAP see Configuring 802 1x EAP Authentication on page 6 11 To define a security policy supporting Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos Authentication on page 6 9 To create a security policy supporting WEP see Configuring WEP Encryption on page 6 15 To configure a security policy supporting KeyGuard see Configuring KeyGuard Encryption on page 6 17 To define a security policy supporting WPA TKIP see Configuring WPA Using TKIP on page 6 19 To create a security policy supporting WPA2 CCMP see Configuring WPA2 CCMP 802 111 on page 6 22 To configure the AP 5131 to block specific kinds of HTTP SMTP and FIP data traffic see Configuring Firewall Settings on page 6 25 To create VPN tunnels allowing traffic to route securely through a IPSEC tunnel to a private network see Configuring VPN Tunnels on page 6 33 To configure the AP 5131 to block transmissions with devices detected as Rogue AP s hostile devices see Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 51 Configuring Access Point Security 6 3 6 2 Setting Passwords Before setting the AP 5131 security parameters verify an administrative password for the AP 5131 has been created to restrict access to the device before advanced device security is configured To passwor
378. y standards based 802 3af compliant power A separate power injector is required for each AP 5131 comprising the network amp amp x Data Power Injector Wireless LAN Hardware Installation 2 9 2 6 1 Installing the Power Injector Refer to the following sections for information on planning installing and validating the power injector installation 2 6 1 1 Preparing for Site Installation Cabling the Power Injector Power Injector LED Indicators Preparing for Site Installation The power injector can be installed free standing on an even horizontal surface or wall mounted using the power injector s wall mounting key holes The following guidelines should be adhered to before cabling the power injector to an Ethernet source and an AP 5131 Do not block or cover airflow to the power injector Keep the power injector away from excessive heat humidity vibration and dust The power injector is not a repeater and does not amplify the Ethernet data signal For optimal performance ensure the power injector is placed as close as possible to the network data port 2 6 1 2 Cabling the Power Injector To install the power injector to an Ethernet data source and AP 5131 with an appropriate ground connection approved for the country of CAUTION Ensure AC power is supplied to the power injector using an AC cable operation Connect the power injector to an AC outlet 110VAC to 220VAC Conn
379. y the 802 1x EAP Settings field within the New Security Policy screen For specific information on configuring EAP see Configuring 802 1x EAP Authentication on page 6 11 Enable and configure an Encryption option if necessary for the target security policy No Encryption WEP 64 40 bit key If No Encryption is selected encryption is disabled for the security policy If security is not an issue this setting avoids the overhead an encryption protocol causes on the AP 5131 No Encryption is the default value for the Encryption field Select the WEP 64 40 bit key button to display the WEP 64 Settings field within the New Security Policy screen For specific information on configuring WEP 64 see Configuring WEP Encryption on page 6 15 6 8 AP 5731 Access Point Product Reference Guide WEP 128 104 bit key Select the WEP 128 104 bit key button to display the WEP 128 Settings field within the New Security Policy screen For specific information on configuring WEP 128 see Configuring WEP Encryption on page 6 15 KeyGuard Select the KeyGuard button to display the KeyGuard Settings field within the New Security Policy screen For specific information on configuring KeyGuard see Configuring KeyGuard Encryption on page 6 17 WPA TKIP Select the WPA TKIP button to display the WPA TKIP Settings field within the New Security Policy screen For specific information on configuring WPA TKIP see Configuring WPA Using TKIP on page 6 19
380. yed statistics to determine if the target MU would be better served with a different AP 5131 WLAN or AP 5131 radio Click Ok to return to the MU Stats Summary screen 7 26 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 7 6 Viewing Known Access Point Statistics The AP 5131 has the capability of detecting and displaying the properties of other access points both Symbol and those from other manufacturers located within its coverage area Detected AP 5131 s transmit a WNMP message indicating their channel IP address firmware version etc This information is used to create a known AP list The list has field indicating the properties of the access point discovered To view detected access point statistics 1 Select Status and Statistics gt Known AP from the AP 5131 menu tree AP 5131 symbol Fom ai 4 ven Known AP Statistics m reani t koer AP Samm ay B vares P Anye us ut Blew eM 4 gt OB 1 4 Seni PIC tris m OB r y rT OOF F Fleet AB LEDs erer i P gt Rado 202 t toyi Stat Radoja 1a Stat Y Hg wu Su 2 Knopen AP Oyster Name APS 0 The Known AP Statistics screen displays the following information IP Address The network assigned Internet Protocol address of the located AP MAC Address The unique 48 bit hard coded Media Access Control address known as the devices station identifier This value is hard coded at the factory by the manufacturer and cann
381. ype 2 16 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide 4 Cable the AP 5131 using either the Symbol power injector solution or an approved line cord and power supply AN CAUTION Do not supply power to the AP 5131 until the cabling of the unit is complete For Symbol power injector installations a Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the Power Injector Data In connector Connect a RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the power injector Data amp Power Out connector and the AP 5131 LAN port Ensure the cable length from the Ethernet source host to the power injector and AP 5131 does not exceed 100 meters 333 ft The power injector has no On Off power switch The power injector receives power as soon as AC power is applied For more information on using the power injector see Symbol Power Injector System on page 2 7 For standard Symbol 48 Volt Power Adapter Part No 50 24000 050 and line cord installations a a o o Connect RJ 45 Ethernet cable between the network data supply host and the AP 5131 LAN port Verify the power adapter is correctly rated according the country of operation Connect the power supply line cord to the power adapter Attach the power adapter cable into the power connector on the AP 5131 Plug the power adapter into an outlet 5 Verify the behavior of the AP 5131 LEDs For more information see LED Indicators on page 2 20 e e a
382. ype as 1 to Many to map a WAN IP address to multiple local IP addresses This displays the 1 to Many Mappings button in the adjacent Outbound Mappings field This button displays a screen for mapping the LAN IP addresses that are associated with each subnet Define the NAT Type as none when routable IP addresses are used on the internal network 5 20 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide Outbound Mappings Inbound Mappings Port Forwarding When 1 to 1 NAT is selected a single IP address can be entered in the Outbound Mappings area This address provides a 1 to 1 mapping of the WAN IP address to the specified LAN IP address When 1 to Many is selected the Outbound Mappings area displays LAN If none is selected The Outbound Mappings area is blank When 1 to 1 or 1 to Many is selected the Inbound Mappings option displays a Port Forwarding button Click the Port Forwarding button to display a screen of port forwarding parameters for inbound traffic from the associated WAN IP address for information on configuring port forwarding see Configuring Port Forwarding on page 5 20 3 Click Apply to save any changes to the NAT 1 to Many Mappings and Port Forwarding screens Navigating away from the screen without clicking the Apply button results in all changes to the screens being lost 4 Click Undo Changes if necessary to undo any changes made Undo Changes reverts the settings displayed on the NAT screen to the last saved c
383. yption n sanean naunan urnana 1 5 WW asstiation 2 22 12 se4cecededelvedeeouns 1 21 MU association Process 2s 2 lt s4 ceeescaberes 1 21 MU MU transmission disallow 1 11 N NAT CONNGUUNO aiccacainaneedt rinkti EENES 5 18 network time protocol NTP 05 4 26 network topology 0 cece cece eae 1 16 notational conventions 0 55 viii WP E AIEE EEE denen T EEE 4 26 NTP COnnGUM Ai is cinta yapese 4 26 0 operating modes 20 c ccc ee eee 1 22 P package contentS 0 0 cece eee eae 2 2 phone numbers Symbol vill physical characteristics 0 ccc eee eee A 1 power injector cabling se rerririrsrrsrssersriaas 2 9 power injector installation 0 2 9 power mech LEDS cy desccinedounes veiw ees 2 10 POWE ODLIONS accscda oc dadhcadacasariwaacat aaa 2 7 PEP over EMME n ccuiceesaseeetunes eeecderes 5 16 precautions n annann eee eee 2 1 product CONTIGUFATIONS 32 2 eons nee iia 2 2 programmable SNMP trap 1 3 Por et lend E NAE R O E E EET 1 12 PSP stations 20 0 0 reniri neriesi 1 12 hedt eraa cena 1 12 EE EA E E EE TET 1 12 Q DOS SO cncctaies eeh 1 4 Quality GF Service O08 e ssoiritresrrtrserisrisa 1 4 R PANG WOMGNS ersan teeter tip DALA 1 2 radio retry histogram 0 0c eee 7 19 IN 7 IN 8 AP 5131 Access Point Product Reference Guide r
384. ys the number of TCP IP data frame errors received 4 Refer to the Transmitted field to reference data received over the AP 5131 WAN TX Packets TX Bytes TX Errors TX Dropped TX Overruns TX packets are data packets sent over the WAN connection The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN interface was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted To begin a new data collection see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 TX bytes are bytes of information sent over the WAN connection The displayed number is a cumulative total since the WAN interface was last enabled or the AP 5131 was last restarted To begin a new data collection see Configuring System Settings on page 4 2 TX errors include dropped data packets buffer overruns and carrier errors on outbound traffic The displayed number of TX errors is the total of TX Dropped TX Overruns and TX Carrier errors Use this information to re assess AP 5131 location and transmit speed The TX Dropped field displays the number of data packets that fail to get sent from the WAN interface TX overruns are buffer overruns on the WAN connection TX overruns occur when packets are sent faster than the WAN interface can handle If TX overruns are excessive consider reducing the data rate for more information see Configuring the 802 114 or 802 11b g Radio on page 5 38 port Monitoring Statistics 7 5 TX Carrier The TX Carrier field displays the number of T

Zebra ML-1499-LAK1-01R lightning arrester

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents